SPI-Configure Users Guide.

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Version 2008 Service Pack 1 October 2008 / May 2009 DISO-PE-200007A-UPDATED

Copyright

Copyright © 1991-2009 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties

which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was developed at

private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the

Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors,

and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"):

This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS

227.7202-3.

Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.

Intergraph Corporation P.O. Box 240000 Huntsville, AL 35813 Street address: 170 Graphics Drive, Madison, AL 35758

Terms of Use

Use of this software product is subject to the End User License Agreement and Limited Product

Warranty ("EULA") delivered with this software product unless the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take precedence and govern the use of this software product. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for licensee's internal, non-commercial use. The documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.

Warranties and Liabilities

All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in the EULA provided with the software or

applicable license for the software product signed by Intergraph Corporation, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its

contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this

publication is accurate as of its publication date.

The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical

product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.

The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this

license. No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its

affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE

USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Trademarks

Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Convert, I-Export, I-Sketch,

SmartMarine, IntelliShip, INtools, ISOGEN, MARIAN, SmartSketch, Spoolgen, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide i

Contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... v

What's New In SmartPlant I-Configure ............................................................................................. vii

Welcome to SmartPlant I-Configure .................................................................................................... 9

Legacy System Support................................................................................................................... 10

Getting Started .................................................................................................................................... 11

Configuration Files ......................................................................................................................... 12 Backing Sheets ......................................................................................................................... 12 Templates ................................................................................................................................. 12 CreateTutorial_<application name>.xml ................................................................................... 13 IsoDirList.xml .......................................................................................................................... 13 Project_Data.xml ...................................................................................................................... 13 ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml .................................................................................... 13 ProjectList.xml ......................................................................................................................... 15 ProjectPipeline.xml................................................................................................................... 15 Style.xml .................................................................................................................................. 15

Tutorial Project ............................................................................................................................... 16 Set up a Network Project ................................................................................................................. 17 Create User Templates .................................................................................................................... 18

Modify the User ProjectConfig File .......................................................................................... 19 Comment ........................................................................................................................................ 20 Objects ........................................................................................................................................... 20 Properties........................................................................................................................................ 21 Values ............................................................................................................................................ 21 Collections ...................................................................................................................................... 22

Add to Collection ..................................................................................................................... 23 Remove from Collection ........................................................................................................... 23

Controls .......................................................................................................................................... 23 Mouse ...................................................................................................................................... 24 Keyboard .................................................................................................................................. 24 Shortcut Menu .......................................................................................................................... 24

Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface ............................................................................... 29

Menus ............................................................................................................................................. 31 File Menu ................................................................................................................................. 31 Edit Menu................................................................................................................................. 36 Wizards Menu .......................................................................................................................... 39 Tools Menu .............................................................................................................................. 64 Help Menu................................................................................................................................ 77

ii SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................... 78 Project View Panel.......................................................................................................................... 79 Properties Panel .............................................................................................................................. 80 Overview Panel............................................................................................................................... 81 Detail Panel .................................................................................................................................... 82 Status Bar ....................................................................................................................................... 85

Isometric Directories ........................................................................................................................... 87

Isometric Directory Object Properties ............................................................................................. 87 Create an Isometric Directory.......................................................................................................... 88 Delete an Isometric Directory.......................................................................................................... 89 Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory ............................................................................................ 90

Projects ................................................................................................................................................ 91

Project Object Properties ................................................................................................................. 91 Name ........................................................................................................................................ 93 Path .......................................................................................................................................... 93 Source ...................................................................................................................................... 93 AppList .................................................................................................................................... 93 AppCount ................................................................................................................................. 93 WeldGaps ................................................................................................................................. 94 ElbowConversion ..................................................................................................................... 94 ChangeStyleList ....................................................................................................................... 95 AccessRights ............................................................................................................................ 96 LockedBy ................................................................................................................................. 96

Project Defaults .............................................................................................................................. 96 Application ............................................................................................................................... 97 Material Database ..................................................................................................................... 97 Repeat Style ............................................................................................................................. 98 Imported Weld Numbers ........................................................................................................... 98 Imported Part Numbers ............................................................................................................. 99 Imported Split Points ...............................................................................................................100 Imported Spool IDs .................................................................................................................101 Import Directory ......................................................................................................................101 PreProcessor ............................................................................................................................102 GED Configuration..................................................................................................................102 Project Work Folder ................................................................................................................103 Straight Length ........................................................................................................................103 Project ID Type .......................................................................................................................104 SmartPlant Integration .............................................................................................................104 Default Support Category ........................................................................................................105

Attributes .......................................................................................................................................106 Pipeline Attributes ...................................................................................................................108 Component Attributes ..............................................................................................................110 Weld Attributes .......................................................................................................................111 Bolt Attributes .........................................................................................................................111 Spool Attributes .......................................................................................................................112 Material Attributes ...................................................................................................................112

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide iii

Add a New Attribute ................................................................................................................112 Edit an Attribute ......................................................................................................................113 Delete an Attribute...................................................................................................................114 Import PipeHeader Attributes ..................................................................................................115 Attribute Expressions...............................................................................................................115

Copy and Paste a Project ................................................................................................................121 Create a Project ..............................................................................................................................121 Delete a Project ..............................................................................................................................122

Styles ...................................................................................................................................................125

Style Object Properties ...................................................................................................................125 Name .......................................................................................................................................126 Path .........................................................................................................................................126 ExportBehavior .......................................................................................................................126 StyleState ................................................................................................................................126 StyleType ................................................................................................................................127 CanWrite .................................................................................................................................127 CanExport ...............................................................................................................................127

Detail Panel ...................................................................................................................................127 AlternativeTexts ......................................................................................................................130 Drawing ..................................................................................................................................166 DrawingFrame .........................................................................................................................334 MaterialList .............................................................................................................................355 WeldList..................................................................................................................................412 CutList ....................................................................................................................................435 Supplementary Object..............................................................................................................457

Copy and Paste a Style ...................................................................................................................558 Create a Style .................................................................................................................................559 Delete a Style .................................................................................................................................560 Export a Style ................................................................................................................................561 Save a Style ...................................................................................................................................561 Select a Style .................................................................................................................................561

Techniques ..........................................................................................................................................563

Bar Codes ......................................................................................................................................563 AutoCAD Barcode ..................................................................................................................564

Bends and Elbows ..........................................................................................................................565 Bends ......................................................................................................................................565 Elbows ....................................................................................................................................565

External Data .................................................................................................................................566 External Data Source ...............................................................................................................566 XML Configuration File ..........................................................................................................567 Pipeline Data ...........................................................................................................................568 Component and Information Data ............................................................................................569 Example XML Configuration File............................................................................................570

Welding .........................................................................................................................................571 Weld Lists ...............................................................................................................................571 Weld Logic ..............................................................................................................................572

iv SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Weld Constructions .................................................................................................................574 Cut Lists ........................................................................................................................................578 Detail Sketch and Information Notes ..............................................................................................579 Dynamic File Naming ....................................................................................................................583 Flange Rotation..............................................................................................................................584 HeatTreatment-NDE ......................................................................................................................587 Location Points ..............................................................................................................................588 Site Assemblies..............................................................................................................................593 Traceability and Unique Numbers ..................................................................................................595 Work Measurement ........................................................................................................................596

Index ...................................................................................................................................................601

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide v

This document is a user's guide for SmartPlant I-Configure and provides conceptual information

and procedural instructions for creating and managing the isometric directories, projects and styles that are used by other SmartPlant piping solutions products to generate isometric drawings and reports using ISOGEN®. The content is identical to the online Help that is delivered as part of the SmartPlant I-Configure software.

Intergraph gives you permission to print as many copies of this document as you need for non-commercial use at your company. You cannot reprint this document for resale or redistribution outside your company.

Preface

Preface

vi SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide vii

Version 2008 Service Pack 1

Documentation of AText reference data, including a listing of AText identification numbers,

is delivered as part of the SmartPlant I-Configure user documentation. For more information, see Alternative Text (on page 130).

The following new properties have been added to the Drawing Format object to help you control the format of the information on the isometric:

AngleAccuracy (on page 243)

OletBranchOrientationMessage (on page 265)

SpecBrkEnclosure (on page 282)

The AngleStyle property has been enhanced to give you additional control over the output of angle data. For more information, see AngleStyle (on page 243).

A printable user's guide is now delivered with the software. The content is identical to the online Help that is also delivered with the SmartPlant I-Configure software. You can access

the SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide using the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

What's New In SmartPlant I-Configure

What's New In SmartPlant I-Configure

viii SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide 9

S E C T I O N 1

SmartPlant® I-Configure allows you to create and manage the isometric directories, projects and

styles that are used by other SmartPlant products to generate isometric drawings and reports using ISOGEN®.

ISOGEN is the industry-standard software for the automatic production of piping isometric

drawings. It is integral to most of the major plant design systems on the market, including PDS® and SmartPlant 3D, and is used in the vast majority of process plant projects involving the design of pipework.

A significant factor in the success of ISOGEN is its broad range of configuration options. Virtually everything about the piping isometric drawing – from the style of dimensioning and format of weld and part numbers to the location and layout of the material take-off – is configurable. This allows you to produce isometric drawings to your own specifications.

SmartPlant I-Configure has been specifically designed to simplify the customization of piping isometrics produced by ISOGEN. It allows ISOGEN's substantial array of control switches and files to be easily managed. Easy to learn and simple to use, SmartPlant I-Configure makes

ISOGEN features available to more users and allows them to configure SmartPlant Isometrics, SmartPlant Isometrics I-Tools, and SmartPlant Spoolgen®.

SmartPlant I-Configure includes the following features:

Support for projects (see "Import Project" on page 69) and styles created in Project Manager (PipMan).

Connections (see "Connect to Isometric Directory" on page 33) to network projects (see "Set up a Network Project" on page 16) .

Object (see "Objects" on page 20) -based user interface for the configuration of ISOGEN™ control files.

Explorer type windows (see "Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface" on page 29) to navigate the available projects and styles.

Wizards (see "Wizards Menu" on page 38) to quickly set-up and configure styles.

XML (see "Configuration Files" on page 11) files for storage of project and style information.

Built-in drawing previewer (see "Preview Drawing" on page 64) to graphically examine on-the-fly the impact of modifications made to styles.

Password protection (see "Project Access Rights" on page 76) to avoid unauthorized alterations to projects and styles.

Welcome to SmartPlant I-Configure

Welcome to SmartPlant I-Configure

10 SmartPlant I-Configure User's Guide

Legacy System Support

SmartPlant I-Configure allows you to import style settings from earlier versions of I-Sketch, I-Configure and SPOOLGEN, and even from IDF files.

Information for I-Configure 2.8 Users

The MLD/WDF format created by the software was changed in subsequent version of the software. However, you can use the Comment (on page 20) field to control the format more precisely. This will impact on SmartPlant Isometrics I-Data Integrator, which uses the comment field in the MLD to control the name of fields created in its database tables. Consequently, you

must manually set up projects used by SmartPlant Isometrics I-Data Integrator to ensure that the new formats match the old.

For details of all other changes made in this version of the software, refer to the Release

Notes.txt file that is delivered with the software. By default, this file is delivered to C:\Program

Files\Common Files\Intergraph\I-Configure during installation.

Information for I-Sketch Users

The introduction of SmartPlant I-Configure impacts SmartPlant Isometrics users as follows.

SmartPlant Isometrics works against existing PipMan projects and styles without any modification being necessary, and without PipMan being installed on the machine.

SmartPlant I-Configure replaces PipMan and the ISOGEN Options and AText editors.

The AText.pdf is delivered by default to C:\Program Files\Common Files\Intergraph\I-

Configure\resdlls\0009 during installation of the software.

PipMan projects were fixed format and always included:

Projects - Pipes, Exports and Inputs folders.

Styles - Drawings, Messages, Reports folders.

SmartPlant I-Configure projects are controlled by an XML configuration file. All ISOGEN settings (inputs and outputs) are written to this file, which is held in the Style folder.

The outputs from SmartPlant I-Configure are the same as from PipMan - the FLS and ISOGEN control files: DDF, MLD, WDF, POS and so on.

Project properties are not held in registry. Instead, they are contained in a variety of XML configuration files (on page 11).

Existing PipMan projects and styles must be imported (see "Import Project" on page 69) before they can be changed in SmartPlant I-Configure.


S E C T I O N 2

SmartPlant I-Configure brings all of ISOGEN's controls together into a single application. In its

interface, these are represented as a series of control objects which have properties. For example, the control objects have an OutputFormat property which controls the CAD format of the drawing. Where appropriate, the allowable options are presented to the user to minimize error.

Convenient Style Wizards

You can choose from hundreds of properties to set, some of which must be set in combination

with other properties. To assist the user, I-Configure features a number of wizards which guide the user step by step through setting particular sets of related properties.

The drawing wizard helps the user configure the drawing template. This is usually a company-

standard backing sheet on which ISOGEN plots the drawing and related data such as the material take-off, welding report, and project-related data. The drawing wizard has a graphical interface, overlaying the location of key items onto the backing sheet.

The dimensioning wizard helps the user set up the dimensioning styles used by ISOGEN. Other wizards assist with the setup of welding controls such as weld numbering styles and numbering sequences, and in the creation of report files.

Preview Mode

SmartPlant I-Configure allows the user to quickly preview the results the settings configured using a built-in test file. ISOGEN can be run to check the output without ever leaving the I-Configure environment.

To function correctly, the Drawing Setup Wizard (on page 39) and the Preview

Drawing (on page 64) command both require that VoloView Express is installed on the workstation that is running SmartPlant I-Configure. Also, if you do not have access to any other 2D CAD system for isometric drawing productions, you can use VoloView Express to produce DXF drawings in any of the other products and tools delivered on the product DVD. VoloView Express is delivered on the Intergraph SmartPlant Isometrics product DVD. For information

about installing VoloView Express, see the SmartPlant Isometrics Installation Guide, which is available using the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.

Getting Started

Getting Started


Configuration Files

SmartPlant I-Configure stores configuration information in a variety of XML files.

CreateTutorial_<application name>.xml (on page 12)

IsoDirList.xml (on page 13)

Project_Data.xml (on page 13)

ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml (on page 13)

ProjectList.xml (on page 15)

ProjectPipeline.xml (on page 15)

Style.xml (on page 15)

Although you can view configuration files using Internet Explorer; Intergraph PPM cautions against modifying them in any way.

See also Backing Sheets (on page 12) Templates (on page 12)

Backing Sheets

To help you get started with SmartPlant I-Configure, a set of backing sheets, commonly referred to as drawing frames, is supplied. During a default installation of the software, these backing sheets are delivered to <Installation Folder>Program Files\Common Files\Intergraph\I-

Configure\Backing Sheets.

See also TemplateFile (on page 338)

Templates

To help you get started with SmartPlant I-Configure, a set of template Styles is supplied with the software. During a default installation, these template styles are delivered to <Installation

Folder>:\Program Files\Common Files\Intergraph\I-Configure\Templates.

See also Style.xml (on page 15)

Getting Started


CreateTutorial_<application name>.xml

The CreateTutorial_<application name>.xml configuration file controls the creation of the tutorial project. Each product installs its own version of this file.

The CreateTutorial configuration file uses the same syntax as the ProjectConfig_<application name>n.xml file--CopyFile and CreateFolder--but also supports the setting of project defaults to specific values.

See also Tutorial Project (on page 15) ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml (on page 13)

IsoDirList.xml

Contains the list of isometric directories set-up on the current machine. SmartPlant I-Configure

creates this configuration file %ALLUSERSPROFILE%\Application Data\Alias.

Windows 2000, XP - ALLUSERSPROFILE = Documents and Settings\All Users

Windows NT - ALLUSERSPROFILE = WINNT\Profiles\All Users

Project_Data.xml

Each project folder contains a Project_Data file, which is used to store application-specific

project defaults (on page 37) and other project level data. For example, in the file name P1000_Data.xml, P1000 is the name of the project.

ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml

The structure of SmartPlant I-Configure projects is controlled by the ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file configuration file--for example, ProjectConfig_Spoolgen.xml. In a default setup, this file is delivered to <Installation Folder>:\Program Files\Common

Files\Intergraph\I-Configure\Application Data.

Although projects are application-specific, they can be enabled for multiple applications from

the same source, if necessary. The project configuration file defines:

Any data files that must be copied to the project (or style).

Any folders that must be created.

Any mandatory styles that must be created. For example, SmartPlant Spoolgen must have a style called SGImport and one called Spool.

Any application-specific project defaults.

Getting Started


When you create a new SmartPlant I-Configure project, you must use the Application list to

specify the associated application.

The software displays a list of supported applications in the Application list on the New

Project dialog box, depending on what has been installed.

Using a User-Defined ProjectConfig_App.xml File

If a file with the name UserProjectConfig_<application name>.xml is found in the same folder

as the supplied ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file, it is used in preference to define the project structure, style content and so on. This allows you to create a user-specific project configuration that is not overwritten by the next installation of SmartPlant I-Configure. For example, if both UserProjectConfig_SPIsometrics.xml and ProjectConfig_SPIsometrics.xml are found in the same folder, the software uses the former XML configuration file when you set-up a new project for SmartPlant Isometrics.

Getting Started


Initial Settings

New syntax in ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file allows you to specify an initial setting (in the form of an XML file) for any property using the following syntax:

<SetProjectProperties PROPERTY='FILENAME' />

Consider the following example:

<SetProjectProperties

WeldGaps='$APPCONFIG$\Application Data\WeldGaps_Template.xml'

ElbowConversion='$APPCONFIG$\Application

Data\ElbowConversion_Template.xml'/>

SmartPlant I-Configure then loads the specified property with the contents of the specified file.

See also Create a Project (on page 121) Enable Project (on page 34) Source (on page 93) Project Defaults (on page 37)

ProjectList.xml

Each isometric directory contains a ProjectList.xml file, which contains a list of projects and styles.

ProjectPipeline.xml

The ProjectPipeline.xml file is an application-specific configuration file, which can be present in

the project folder. For example, it is be found in SmartPlant Spoolgen- and SmartPlant Isometrics-enabled projects. The ProjectPipeline.xml file contains the user specified extensions to Pipeline, Component, Weld and Bolt attributes that have been defined for the project.

See also Pipeline Attributes (on page 108) Component Attributes (on page 110) Weld Attributes (on page 110) Bolt Attributes (on page 111) Project Defaults (on page 37)

Style.xml

Each style folder contains a Style.xml file, such as Final-Basic.xml, which is used to store the style configuration data. To help you get started with SmartPlant I-Configure, a set of template styles is supplied with the software. However, before a style can be used by an application, the style must first be exported.

If you have not already exported the style, the application can perform this step for itself.

See also Export (on page 35) Templates (on page 12)

View Isogen Controls (on page 69)

Getting Started


Tutorial Project

Any product which uses SmartPlant I-Configure, such as SmartPlant Spoolgen or SmartPlant Isometrics, installs a sample tutorial project that you can use to help you get started (see "Getting Started" on page 11) with the software.

If you alter the tutorial project in anyway, you can use the Create Tutorial Utility to restore its out-of-the-box default settings. To launch the utility, click Start > All Programs >

Intergraph SmartPlant Isometrics > Create Tutorial Project.

The following table shows the styles made available under the tutorial project structure

depending on which application is installed:

Application Command Line Switch Result

SmartPlant

Isometrics

-aSPIsometrics

SmartPlant

Spoolgen

-aSpoolgen

Do not use the tutorial project as a basis for production work, as subsequent installations of the same application overwrite the tutorial project. If you make changes to the tutorial project and wish to keep them, rename the SampleIsoDir or the project before re-installing any software which installs and runs CreateTutorial.exe as part of its installation, or

before running Create Tutorial Project from the Start menu.

See also CreateTutorial_application.xml (see "CreateTutorial_<application name>.xml" on page 12) Configuration Files (on page 11)

Getting Started


Set up a Network Project

You can set up projects on a network server so that users working on multiple client workstations can access and share project configurations concurrently.

What do you want to do?

Set Up a Project on a Network Server (on page 17) Connect to a Network Project (on page 18)

For a description of use of mapped drives and UNC paths for network projects, see Options (on page 77).

For more information about connecting to network isometric directory and associate

projects, see Connecting to an Isometric Directory (see "Connect to Isometric Directory" on page 33).

See also Project View Panel (on page 79) Supplementary ReportFiles Object (on page 532)

Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 534)

Set Up a Project on a Network Server

1. Create an isometric directory (on page 88).

2. Create a project (on page 121) and its associated styles.

To avoid file conflict errors, it is also necessary to change the output path for the Message file for each style in the project configuration, so that the file is written locally--for example to C:\TEMP--when users attempt to use the same style concurrently. ISOGEN then outputs the Message file it creates to this local folder instead of to the same folder on the network server.

3. Use Windows Explorer to create the Message file path, such as C:\TEMP, if one does not exist.

Getting Started


4. For each style in the project, add a definition (see "Add to Collection" on page 23) to the

Supplementary ReportFiles object's ISOGENFiles collection, which sets the message path to C:\TEMP\Message filename.

You can use the Reports wizard (on page 63) can be used to set the message file path.

Use an appropriate filename for the message file, such as Spool mes for the spool style.

Set the drive on which the isometric directory and project to be connected to resides to

be shared, and set the required permissions for the share.

Connect to a Network Project

1. Click Create Isometric Directory .

2. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, browse to the network path where the isometric directory to be connected to resides, select the project, and then click OK.

The project appears in the Project View panel.

Create User Templates

1. Create the style (see "Create a Style" on page 559) using your own company standard

backing sheet and settings.

2. Save the style XML file and copy it to a folder designated to hold your company templates.

For the purposes of this example, assume that the style template is stored in \\Server\CompanyTemplates folder. File paths in the project/style hierarchy are automatically converted to use $PROJECT$ or $STYLE$ instead of the actual file path. This

means that the style XML files can readily be copied between styles and do not need modification.

Getting Started


3. Copy the ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file to a file named

UserProjectConfig_<application name>.xml and modify this file to reference your new template.

By default, the ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file is delivered to in <Installation Folder>:\Program Files\Common Files\Intergraph\I-

Configure\Application Data and is application-specific. That is, there is a file called ProjectConfig_Spoolgen.xml that defines SmartPlant Spoolgen projects and another called ProjectConfig_SPIsometrics.xml for SmartPlant Isometrics projects.

See also Modify the ProjectConfig File (see "Modify the User ProjectConfig File" on page 19) Save (on page 35)

Modify the User ProjectConfig File

Before proceeding, make a backup copy of the ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file.

You can safely modify the following two sections of the file.

Immediately after the <AppSpecificProjectConfiguration> tag, you can create additional

CreateFolder and/or CopyFile commands to create and populate new folders in the project folder.

<AppSpecificProjectConfiguration Source="Alias">



<CopyFile From="$APPCONFIG$\Application Data\ProjectPipeline.xml"

To="$PROJECT$\"/>



<CreateFolder Name="$PROJECT$\Inputs"/>

<CreateFolder Name="$PROJECT$\Pipes"/>

<CreateFolder Name="$PROJECT$\Data"/>

<CreateFolder Name="$PROJECT$\Data\Materials"/>

<CreateFolder Name="$PROJECT$\Data\Sketches"/>

Between the <Optional-Styles> and </Optional-Styles> tags, you can delete existing

<Style> blocks--to reduce the number of styles that are available when a project is created--and add new entries, pointing to the company specific template.

<Style Name="CoSpecific"

Template="\\server\CompanyTemplates\CoSpecific.xml" >

<CopyFile From="\\server\CompanyTemplates\CoSpecific.dwg"

To="$STYLE$\" />



<CreateFolder Name="$STYLE$\Drawings"/>

<CreateFolder Name="$STYLE$\Reports"/>

<CreateFolder Name="$STYLE$\Messages"/>

</Style>

The ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file is updated when a new version of SmartPlant I-Configure is installed (CreateTutorial.exe overwrites all tutorial project files).

Getting Started


Creating the UserProjectConfig_<application name>.xml file prevents any changes you make from being lost.

Comment

You use the Comment column to enter a text comment for any definition contained in

TextColumns and XYColumns collections.

If any text is entered in this field, it is output as a comment--preceded by a "!"--to the relevant data or summary report file. As an example, consider the following:

Declared attribute names are no longer output automatically as a comment in the MLD/WDF If a SmartPlant Isometrics I-Data Integrator project is dependent on this to generate column names in output files, you can now manually set these values in the Comment column

instead. Any comment field in an imported MLD is preserved.

Objects

Objects are used to contain and control the properties which define isometric directories, projects

and styles. An object contains a set of related properties. For example, the DrawingFrame

object contains a set of properties that define the drawing frame. An object can also contain other objects, called sub-objects. For example, the WeldList object contains the following sub-objects:

FixedLayout

VariableLayout

UserDefined

SummaryFile

An object can contain a collection of other objects, also known as definitions, or a set of identical objects. For example, the MaterialList.SummaryFile object can contain a set of TextColumn objects. Each one defines a single column in the SummaryFile output. Other

examples of collections are the AlternativeTexts object, the Drawing.Definitions object and the MaterialList.UserDefined object.

See also . (Dot) Notation

Getting Started


Properties (on page 21) Collections (on page 22) Values (on page 21)

Properties

An object contains a set of related properties. When you change the object properties that belong

to a style, it alters the content and appearance of the isometric drawing and report file outputs that are produced when the style is used in those products that use SmartPlant I-Configure.

You can display and access objects of a style using the Detail panel (on page 82); however, you

can only modify properties by changing values in the Properties panel (on page 80). Depending on the purpose of the property, you can set different values in the Value field of each property. Some properties have a selection list that displays automatically when you double-click the property. Other properties are typed entries--simply click in the Value field to place the cursor, and then type the required value. Some properties are read only and are set automatically by the software when other properties are defined.

See also Find (on page 66) Objects (on page 20) Collections (on page 22) Values (on page 21)

Values

The values that object properties or collection definitions possess, are determined by their

purpose. For example, a value can be a character or number, a filename and/or file path, an ISOGEN attribute, or some or other keyword used in an ISOGEN input control or output report file.

You can clear the value of a property using the Clear command on the shortcut menu (on page 24).

Alphanumeric - Characters or numbers (real or integer).To enter an alphanumeric value:

Click in the Value field.

Type the alphanumeric value.

Path - Path to a file or folder. To enter a path value:

Double click in the Value field to open the Browse to File dialog box.

Navigate to the required file or folder and click OK.

Drop-down list - List that contains various options. For more information about the options available for the property, read Properties (on page 21), To enter a value in a list:

Double click in the Value field and select the option required from those available in the list.

Pop-up list - Pop-up list of various ISOGEN attributes or keyword syntax. To enter a value from this list:

Getting Started


Double click in the Value field and select the option required from those available in the list.

See also Objects (on page 20) Collections (on page 22)

Collections

A collection is a special type of object that holds a set of other objects. The collection has its own properties, which apply to the collection as a whole. For example, the MaterialList.UserDefined object is a collection of XYColumn objects, such as the headers used for the Material list. All collections have a Count property that shows the number of objects in

the collection. When you select a collection in the Detail panel (on page 82), the Properties panel (on page 80) displays its definitions.

You can use the Clear (on page 26) command on the shortcut menu to clear the value of a definition.

You can use the commands on the shortcut menu to manipulate the order of the definitions (as rows in the collection).

To change the value of a definition, do one of the following:

Getting Started


a. Double-click it and select a new value from those available in a drop-down or pop-up list.

b. Click in the field and type in a new value.

c. Browse to a file to set a file path.


Add to Collection (on page 23)

Remove from Collection (on page 23)

See also Row Manipulation (on page 26) Values (on page 21)

Add to Collection

There are several different collections in SmartPlant I-Configure, but they all use the same mechanism to add data entries.

Click Add to Collection .

Alternatively, you can click Add Row on the shortcut menu.

Remove from Collection

There are several different collections in SmartPlant I-Configure, but they all use the same mechanism to remove data entries.

Click Remove from Collection .

Alternatively, you can click Delete Row on the shortcut menu.

Controls

Various ways of controlling SmartPlant I-Configure are available, such as the following:

Menus (on page 31)

Toolbar (on page 78)

Mouse (on page 24)

Keyboard (on page 24)

Shortcut Menu (on page 24)

Getting Started


Mouse

SmartPlant I-Configure makes extensive use of the mouse to control the application.

Left-hand button - The left mouse button (LHB) is used mainly to select items.

Right-hand button - The right mouse button (RHB) displays a shortcut menu that is

specific to the item that you select. A single RHB click is equivalent to selecting an object using the left mouse button and then clicking a toolbar button or a menu item to perform a function.

If you right-click an item in any other part of the SmartPlant I-Configure Main

window and no shortcut menu is available for the item, the right mouse button acts like the left mouse button and simply selects the item. The Properties panel updates to reflect the selection.

Middle button - The middle mouse button moves the scroll bar in any of the panels of the SmartPlant I-Configure Main window.

See also Shortcut Menu (on page 24)

Keyboard

Like other Windows applications, you can access some SmartPlant I-Configure commands using

the Hot Keys. For example, you can press CTRL+C to copy an object.

Shortcut Menu

The shortcut menu displays when you do any of the following.

The commands that display on the shortcut menu are dependent upon where you right-click

Right-click an object is selected in the Project View panel (Getting_Started_Interface_Project_View_Panel.htm)

Paste only becomes available when something is available to paste from the Copy buffer.

Getting_Started_Interface_Project_View_Panel.htm

Getting Started


Right-click the property/value of an object in the Properties panel (on page 80) :

Right-click an object (Definition/Row) of a Collection in the Properties panel:

See also Mouse (on page 24) Row Manipulation (on page 26)

Copy

Copies an isometric directory, project or style.


Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory (on page 89) Copy and Paste a Project (on page 121) Copy and Paste a Style (on page 558)

Getting Started


Paste

Pastes an isometric directory, project or style.


Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory (on page 89)

Copy and Paste a Project (on page 121) Copy and Paste a Style (on page 558)

Clear

Clears the value field of a property. Available on the shortcut menu (on page 24)

Row Manipulation

There are various features available on the shortcut menu (on page 24) that allow the user to control the number and order of the objects (Definitions/Rows) that make up the contents of a collection (see "Collections" on page 22).


Add a Row (on page 26) Delete a Row (on page 27) Copy a Row (on page 27) Move Up a Row (on page 27) Move Down a Row (on page 27)

See also Shortcut Menu (on page 24) Collections (on page 22) Add to Collection (on page 23) Remove from Collection (on page 23)

Getting Started


Add a Row

1. Click in the last row in the collection.

2. Right-click and then click Add Row in the shortcut menu.

3. Double-click the various fields of the row to change the values, to set file paths, and so on.

Delete a Row

1. Click in the row you want to delete.

2. Right-click and then click Delete Row in the shortcut menu.

Copy a Row

1. Select the row to be copied.

2. Right-click and then click Copy Row in the shortcut menu.

The row is copied and appears beneath the row that was copied.

3. Double-click the various fields of the row to change some of the values, to set file paths, and so on.

Move Up a Row

1. Select the row you want to move up the list.

2. Right-click and then click Move Row Up in the shortcut menu.

The row moves up one level to be higher in the list.

3. Repeat to move the row further up the list.

Move Down a Row

1. Select the row that you want to move down the list.

2. Right-click and then click Move Row Down in the shortcut menu.

The row moves down one level to be higher in the list.

3. Repeat to move the row further down the list.

Getting Started


Context Sensitive Help

To use context sensitive help, click any value In the Properties panel and then press F1. The

software displays the appropriate Help topic in the Help window.


S E C T I O N 3

The standard SmartPlant I-Configure Main window consists of the following components as shown in the following illustration:

The SmartPlant I-Configure Main window is made up of several panels, each of which you can

use to perform specific key tasks.

Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface



A - Menu Bar

Click the name of a menu to display the menu commands. Many menu commands have equivalent keystrokes, such as CTRL+C for the Copy command that you can use to quickly perform an action. For more information, see Menus (on page 31).

B - Toolbar

Toolbars are groups of icons that provide rapid access to commonly used commands. They are an alternative to using menu items or keyboard shortcuts. For more information, see Toolbar (on page 78).

C - Project View Panel

The Project View panel displays all of the available isometric directories, projects and styles in tree structure format. For more information, see Project View Panel (on page 79).

D - Overview Panel

The Overview panel displays a simplified overview of the key properties of a style, for both the drawing and report output. For more information, see Overview Panel (on page 81).

E - Detail Panel

The Detail panel shows the objects of style in a tree view format. For more information, see

Detail Panel (on page 82).

F - Properties Panel

The Properties panel displays the defined values for each object property or the definitions for a

collection. For more information, see Properties Panel (on page 80).

G - Status Bar

The status bar contains summary information. For more information, see Status Bar (on page

85).

To help get you started, a tutorial project (on page 15) is installed during setup of the software.

See also Keyboard (on page 24) Mouse (on page 24) Shortcut Menu (on page 24)



Menus

SmartPlant I-Configure has several menus that provide access to its main features and most frequently used commands.

File (see "File Menu" on page 31)

Edit (see "Edit Menu" on page 35)

Wizards (see "Wizards Menu" on page 38)

Tools (see "Tools Menu" on page 64)

Help (see "Help Menu" on page 77)

See also Toolbar (on page 78) Shortcut Menu (on page 24)

File Menu

The File menu provides access to the following commands:

New (on page 31)

Connect to Isometric Directory (on page 33)

Disconnect Isometric Directory (on page 33)

Enable Project (on page 34)

Export (on page 35)

Save (on page 35)

Exit (on page 35)

See also Menus (on page 31)

Toolbar (on page 78) Shortcut Menu (on page 24)



New

New is a sub-menu of the File menu. It contains the commands used to create new isometric

directories, projects and styles.


Create an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Create a Project (on page 121) Create a Style (on page 559)

Isometric Directory

You can use File > New > Isometric Directory to create a new isometric directory. Isometric

directories are displayed in the Project View panel.

Isometric directories can contain many projects. Its configuration information is contained in various configuration files and its own object (see "Isometric Directory Object Properties" on

page 87).

See also Configuration Files (on page 11) Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory (on page 89) Create an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Delete an Isometric Directory (on page 88)

Reset Isometric Directories

Project

You can use File > New > Project to create a new project. Projects are displayed in the Project

View panel.

You can only create a new project under an Isometric directory.

Multiple projects can exist under a single Isometric directory.

Projects contain styles. Project configuration information is contained in various configuration files and its own object (see "Project Object Properties" on page 91).

See also Configuration Files (on page 11) Copy and Paste a Project (on page 121)

Create a Project (on page 121) Delete a Project (on page 122)



Style

You can use File > New > Style to create a new style. Styles are displayed in the Project View

panel.

You can only create a style under a project.

Multiple styles can exist under a single project.

Style configuration information is contained in various configuration files and its own object (see "Style Object Properties" on page 125).

See also Configuration Files (on page 11) Create a Style (on page 559) Delete a Style (on page 560) Export a Style (on page 560) Save a Style (on page 561) Select a Style (on page 561)

Connect to Isometric Directory

Adds an existing (usually remote) isometric directory, without creating the isometric directory folder.

1. Click File > Connect to Isometric Directory.

Alternatively, you can click Connect to Isometric Directory .

2. In the Connect to Isometric Directory dialog box, navigate to the Project List.xml, select it

and click Open.

The isometric directory is displayed in the Project View panel.

Whether a mapped drive or full UNC path is shown is dependent on options (on page 77) set for the project.

See also Isometric Directory (on page 32) Create an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Disconnect Isometric Directory (on page 33)

Set up a Network Project (on page 16)



Disconnect Isometric Directory

Removes an isometric directory from the Project View panel without deleting the (usually

remote) folder. In addition, deleting a remote isometric directory now only removes the reference to it from the Project View panel, the folder is not deleted. You cannot delete remote projects and style folders.

1. In the Project View panel, click the isometric directory you want to remove.

2. Click File > Disconnect Isometric Directory.

Alternatively, you can click Disconnect Isometric Directory .

The isometric directory disappears from the Project View panel.

See also Isometric Directory (on page 32) Connect to Isometric Directory (on page 33)

Enable Project

When you first create a project, it is for use with a specific application, such as SmartPlant Isometrics. This is because different applications require different styles to be available, which is

determined by the type of isometric and report deliverables the application is required to produce. For example, SmartPlant Isometrics must be capable of providing as-designed or as-built piping isometrics, whereas SmartPlant Spoolgen needs to be able to produce isometrics suitable for pipe fabrication in the shop and erection/construction of the spools on-site.

1. Click the project you want to enable in the Project View panel (on page 79).

2. Click File > Enable Project.

Alternatively, you can click Enable Project .

3. Select the application that the project is to be enabled for in the Application list.

4. Select the (optional) styles required by checking/un-checking the boxes of those available.

The project cannot be re-enabled for itself. In other words, the application that the project was first created for is not shown in the list.

Existing projects can be enabled to work with other applications installed on the same

workstation. For example, a Project initially created for I-Run, can also be enabled for use with SmartPlant Isometrics. For more information, see the following Enable Project Matrix:

Default SmartPlant

Isometrics

SmartPlant

Isometrics I-Tools

SmartPlant

Spoolgen

Default N Y Y Y

SmartPlant Isometrics Y N Y Y



Default SmartPlant

Isometrics

SmartPlant

Isometrics I-Tools

SmartPlant

Spoolgen

SmartPlant Isometrics

I-Tools

Y Y N Y

SmartPlant Spoolgen Y Y Y N

Some styles are considered mandatory and some optional. For example, SmartPlant

Spoolgen requires the SGImport.xml and Spool.xml. As such, these are considered mandatory styles. All other styles are optional.

Mandatory styles cannot be unselected (un-checked).

See also ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml (on page 13) Tutorial Project (on page 15)

Save

Writes the current SmartPlant I-Configure settings to the Style.xml (on page 15) file. Before any new settings become available in the application being used, you must first save them.

See also Save a Style (on page 561)

Export

Creates the ISOGEN control files--*.opl, *.pos, *.alt, *.fls--based on the settings made for the

style in SmartPlant I- Configure.

This is not a required step since the products will do it for themselves before running ISOGEN.

The Export command is useful for debugging and, if the ExportBehaviour property for the style is set to Never Export, allows the style to be manually modified.

See also ExportBehaviour (on page 126) Export a Style (on page 560) View Isogen Controls (on page 69)

Exit

Closes the software. If you have not saved your changes, the software prompts you to do so.



Edit Menu

The Edit menu provides access to the following commands:

Copy (on page 25)

Delete (on page 36)

Paste (on page 25)

Project Defaults (on page 37)

See also Menus (on page 31) Toolbar (on page 78)


Copy

Copies an isometric directory, project or style.


Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory (on page 89) Copy and Paste a Project (on page 121)

Copy and Paste a Style (on page 558)

Paste

Pastes an isometric directory, project or style.


Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory (on page 89) Copy and Paste a Project (on page 121) Copy and Paste a Style (on page 558)



Delete

Deletes an isometric directory, project or style.

Exercise caution when using the Delete command. You cannot undo a deletion.


Delete an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Delete a Project (on page 122)

Delete a Style (on page 560)

Project Defaults

1. In the Project View panel, select a project.

2. Click Project Defaults .

Alternatively, you can click Edit > Project Defaults.

The software displays the Project Defaults dialog box.

3. Define values for the properties as required.

The project defaults that the software displays are product-specific. Consequently, not all properties display for all products.

Material Database (on page 97)

Repeat Style (on page 98)

Imported Weld Numbers (on page 98)

Imported Part Numbers (on page 99)

Imported Split Points (on page 100)

Imported Spool Ids (on page 100)

Import Directory (on page 101)

PreProcessor (on page 102)

GED Configuration (on page 102)

Project Work Folder (on page 103)

Straight Length (on page 103)

Project ID Type (on page 104)

SmartPlant Integration (on page 104)

Default Support Category (on page 105)



In the case of the default application, such as I-Run, no project defaults are displayed.

You can click the Attributes tab to display pipeline, component, weld and bolt attribute information.

See also Attributes (on page 105) ProjectConfig_application.xml (see "ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml" on page 13)



Wizards Menu

The Wizards menu provides access to four wizards that you can use to help define various aspects of a style.

Drawing Setup Wizard (on page 39)

Welding Wizard (on page 51)

Dimensioning Wizard (on page 55)

Reports Wizard (on page 63)

You can also access the SmartPlant I-Configure wizards using the Wizards toolbar in the

Overview panel (on page 81).

Drawing Setup Wizard

You use the Drawing Setup wizard to customize the various parts of the isometric drawing.

The Drawing Setup wizard requires VoloView Express. Without VoloView Express, the Drawing Setup wizard does not run. For information about installing VoloView

Express, see the SmartPlant Isometrics Installation Guide. You can access the installation guide using the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.



The Drawing Setup wizard consists of the following pages:

Drawing Area (see "Drawing Area Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 42)

Report Options (see "Report Options Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 43)

Material List (see "Material List Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 46)

Attributes (see "Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 47)

Drawing Setup Wizard Toolbar

The following table lists the commands that are available on the Drawing Setup Wizard toolbar.

Help

Cancel

Go back to previous step

Go forward to next step

Finish

Pan

Zoom Window

Zoom In/Out

Zoom All

Click Go forward to next step and Go back to previous step to move through the pages of the Drawing Setup wizard.

If you right-click anywhere in the Drawing Setup wizard, the VoloView Express shortcut menu displays.

VoloView Express provides a 2D CAD environment for the display of the backing frame. You are advised not to use the facilities available on the VoloView shortcut menu. Instead, use only the commands available on the Drawing Setup wizard.

See also

Template File (see "Template File Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 41)



Template File Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)

The Template File page of the Drawing Setup wizard allows you to customize the drawing

frame, which includes the extents of the area shown by the green highlighted border.

You can define the following Template File properties:

Drawing output format - Controls the 2D CAD file format that ISOGEN creates. For more information, see OutputFormat (on page 186)

Drawing Size - Controls the size of the drawing. For more information, see DrawingSize (on page 182).

Template file may be specified - Specifies the file to be used for the backing sheet. For more information, see TemplateFile (on page 338).

Backing Sheet Units - Specifies the drawing units to be used for the project. For more information, see Options (on page 77).

Isogen to generate standard drawing frame - Ignores the user-specified template backing sheet. ISOGEN generates drawings using its own in-built drawing frame.



See also Drawing Setup Wizard (on page 39)

Drawing Area (see "Drawing Area Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 42) Report Options (see "Report Options Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 43) Material List (see "Material List Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 46) Attributes (see "Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 47)

Drawing Area Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)

The Drawing Area page of the Drawing Setup wizard allows you to customize the drawing

area, or the area contained within the blue highlighted border.

Change the Margins by Section

1. Click the margin you want to change.

The software highlights the column in red and the cursor updates from a pointer to a cross,

indicating that the margin is selected and ready to be altered.

2. Move the cross until it is over the margin, depress the left-mouse button, drag the margin

boundary to a new position, and then release the mouse.

The position of the margin updates and the new value appears in the Margins table.



To accurately fit the Drawing area, zoom in to each corner of the area being defined.

Change the Margins by Editing Values

1. Double-click in the field of the margin to be edited.

2. Type in the new value and then press Enter.

For more information about the Drawing Area properties that you can define, read the following topics:

LeftMargin (on page 335)

RightMargin (on page 336)

TopMargin (on page 335)

BottomMargin (on page 335)

See also Drawing Setup Wizard (on page 39) Template File (see "Template File Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 41) Report Options (see "Report Options Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 43) Material List (see "Material List Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 46) Attributes (see "Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 47)

Report Options Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)

The Report Options page of the Drawing Setup wizard allows you to customize the various

lists.



The options shown on the next pages of the wizard are dependent upon the options selected on the following page, such as whether the backing frame has sections for the material, welding and cutting lists.



Consider the following illustration. This template backing frame has only a two-part Material list: a Fabrication section, shown by the boxes highlighted in blue, and an Erection section, shown by the boxes highlighted in green.

You can use the options in the Material List grid to define the layout and appearance of the reported materials. Then, when ISOGEN processes the style to produce isometric drawings, the

material list is automatically populated to report the materials that make-up the pipeline (or spool).

If this backing frame had sections for welding and cutting information, it would have also been

necessary to define attributes for these reports, too.

For more information about the specific properties that you can define, see the following topics:

Material List (see "Material List Object" on page 355)

OneSection (see "MaterialList UserDefined OneSection Object" on page 380)

TwoSection (see "MaterialList UserDefined TwoSection Object" on page 382)

ThreeSection (see "MaterialList UserDefined ThreeSection Object" on page 385)

Weld List (see "WeldList Object" on page 412)

Cut List (see "CutList Object" on page 435)




Template File (see "Template File Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 41) Drawing Area (see "Drawing Area Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 42) Material List (see "Material List Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 46) Attributes (see "Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 47)

Material List Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)

The Material List page of the Drawing Setup wizard allows you to customize the Material list

(those boxes shown highlighted in blue).

For the previous example, see the following topics

MaterialList Object (see "Material List Object" on page 355)

UserDefined Object (see "MaterialList UserDefined Object" on page 372)

TwoSection Object (see "MaterialList UserDefined TwoSection Object" on page 382)

Click on any of the attributes in the grid and the corresponding rectangle in the graphical view is highlighted to show its plotted position on the isometric.




Template File (see "Template File Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 41) Drawing Area (see "Drawing Area Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 42) Report Options (see "Report Options Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 43) Attributes (see "Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 47)

Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)

The Attributes page of the Drawing Setup wizard allows you to customize the pipeline

attribute areas on the title block (those areas shown highlighted in magenta).


Add a New Attribute (on page 48) Remove Attributes (on page 48) Graphically Move an Attribute (on page 49) Select an Attribute Graphically and Edit its Value in the Attributes Grid (on page 49) Change Column Widths in the Attribute Grid (on page 49) Copy and Paste Attributes (on page 50)




Template File (see "Template File Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 41) Drawing Area (see "Drawing Area Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 42) Report Options (see "Report Options Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 43) Material List (see "Material List Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)" on page 46)

Add a New Attribute

1. Click +/- to open the Drawing Frame Attributes dialog box:

2. In the Available list, select the attribute (or attributes) to be added.

3. Click > to add the attribute In Use list.

4. Click Quit.

The dialog box closes, and the new attribute is located on the left-hand side of the drawing frame.

5. Position as required, by graphically selecting and moving it, and then adjust its position by editing it in the attribute grid.

Remove Attributes

1. Click +/- to open the Drawing Frame Attributes dialog box.

2. In the In Use list, select the attribute (or attributes) to be removed.

3. Click < to remove the attribute from In Use list.

4. Click Quit.



Graphically Move an Attribute

1. Click the attribute you want to move.

The software highlights the attribute in red and the pointer changes to a cross.

2. Click the attribute again and move it to a new position.

Select an Attribute Graphically and Edit its Value in the Attributes Grid

1. Click an attribute box.

The software highlights the attribute in red in the Attributes grid.

2. Double-click the field of the attribute to be edited.

3. Type in the new value and press Enter.

Alternatively, you can select the value required from the shortcut menu.

Change Column Widths in the Attribute Grid

Click and drag the left or right border of the column to increase or decrease the width.



Copy and Paste Attributes

1. Right-click in the Attributes grid and click Copy in the shortcut menu.

2. Right-click again in the Attributes grid and click Paste in the shortcut menu.



Welding Wizard

You can use the Welding wizard to manage the numbering, types and appearance of welds on

the isometric drawing.

Welding Wizard Toolbar

The following table lists the commands that are available on the Welding Wizard toolbar.

Help

Cancel



Finish

Pan

Zoom Window

Zoom In/Out

Zoom All

See also Weld Types (on page 52)



All Weld Types (on page 54) Drawing Welds Object (on page 301) ShowWelds (on page 303)

WeldTypes (on page 327) ShowWeldNumbers (on page 303) WeldNumberSequence (on page 326) SupportWeldSeq (on page 325)

Weld Types

The Weld Types page of the Welding wizard allows you to specify which weld types will have their appearance changed from the default settings, such as those used for erection welds. You can change the settings for each weld type by clicking > (single) or >> (all).


Change Settings for a Single Weld Type (on page 53) Change Settings for All Weld Types (on page 53) Remove Weld Types (on page 53)

See also Drawing Welds Object (on page 301) Welding Wizard (on page 51)



Change Settings for a Single Weld Type

1. Select a weld type in the These weld types will share settings list.

2. Click > to move the selected weld type to the These weld types will have different settings

list.

3. Click Go forward to the next step to change weld type settings.

The template settings, such as those used for erection welds, are displayed first on the next page of the Welding wizard and apply to all weld types except those chosen to be different.

Subsequent pages in the Welding wizard allow you to define the settings for the other weld types individually.

Change Settings for All Weld Types

1. Click >> to include all weld types on the These weld types will have different settings list.

2. Click Go forward to the next step to change weld type settings.

The template settings, such as those used for erection welds, are displayed first on the next page of the Welding wizard. Settings for other weld types display on all subsequent pages

Remove Weld Types

1. Select a weld type in the These weld types will share settings list.

2. Click < and the weld type is shown in the These weld types will share settings list.

Click << and all weld types are included in the These weld types will share settings list.



All Weld Types

See also Welding Wizard (on page 51)



Dimensioning Wizard

The Dimensioning wizard is used to customize the style of dimensioning used on the isometric

drawing.

Dimensioning Wizard Toolbar

The following table lists the commands that are available on the Dimensioning Wizard toolbar.

Help

Cancel



Finish

Pan

Zoom Window

Zoom In/Out

Zoom All



See also Dimension Format (see "Dimension Format Page (Dimensioning Wizard)" on page 56)

Dimensioning Style (see "Dimensioning Style Page (Dimensioning Wizard)" on page 57) Overall Dimensioning (see "Overall Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard)" on page 58) Gasket Dimensioning (see "Gasket Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard)" on page 59) Elevations/Vertical Dimensions (see "Elevations/Vertical Dimensions Page (Dimensioning Wizard)" on page 60) Coordinates (see "Coordinates Page (Dimensioning Wizard)" on page 61) Units Formatting (see "Units Formatting Page (Dimensioning Wizard)" on page 62)

Dimension Format Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

The Dimension Format page of the Dimensioning wizard allows you to specify the format of

dimensioning used.

See also Dimensioning Wizard (on page 55) Drawing Dimensions Object (on page 199) Format (on page 207)



Dimensioning Style Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

The Dimension Style page of the Dimensioning wizard allows you to define the style of

dimensioning.

See also Dimensioning Wizard (on page 55) Drawing Dimensions Object (on page 199) USAStyle (on page 228)



Overall Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

The Overall Dimension page of the Dimensioning wizard allows you to specify overall

dimensioning.

See also Dimensioning Wizard (on page 55) Drawing Dimensions Object (on page 199) Overall (on page 215)



Gasket Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

The Gasket Dimensioning page of the Dimensioning wizard allows you to specify the

dimensioning of gaskets.

See also Dimensioning Wizard (on page 55) Drawing Dimensions Object (on page 199) Gaskets (on page 210)



Elevations/Vertical Dimensions Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

The Elevation/Vertical Dimensions page of the Dimensioning wizard allows you to specify

how elevations and vertical dimensions are shown on the isometric.

See also Dimensioning Wizard (on page 55) Drawing Dimensions Object (on page 199) VertOption (on page 236)



Coordinates Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

The Co-ordinates page of the Dimensioning wizard allows you to specify how coordinates are

shown at elevations and vertical dimensions.

See also Dimensioning Wizard (on page 55) Drawing Dimensions Object (on page 199) CoordOutputBranches (on page 205) CoordOutputBends (on page 204) CoordSupports (on page 205)



Units Formatting Page (Dimensioning Wizard)

The Units Formatting page of the Dimensioning wizard allows you to define how units used

for both dimensions and coordinates.

See also Dimensioning Wizard (on page 55) Drawing Dimensions Object (on page 199) Options (on page 77) ImperialFormat (on page 211) FtInTolerance (on page 209) MetresDimensions (on page 213)

MetresCoordinates (on page 213)



Reports Wizard

You use the Reports wizard is used to customize the various report file outputs available in

SmartPlant I-Configure. The reports selected apply to the current style.

Reports Wizard Toolbar

The following table lists the commands that are available on the Reports Wizard toolbar.

Help

Cancel



Finish

Pan

Zoom Window

Zoom In/Out

Zoom All




Include a Report File (on page 64)

Remove a Report File (on page 64)

See also CutList SummaryFile Object (on page 450) WeldList SummaryFile Object (on page 428) Supplementary Object (on page 456)

Include a Report File

1. Select the report in the Available Report Files list.

2. Click > to move the report to the Report Files in current style list.

For each report file chosen to be output, a separate page is displayed by the Reports

wizard so that you can customize it.

Remove a Report File

1. Select the report in the Available Report Files list.

2. Click < and the report is included in the Report Files in current style list.

Tools Menu

The Tools menu provides access to the following commands:

Preview Drawing (on page 64)

Find (on page 66)

View Isogen Controls (on page 69)

Import Style Settings (on page 73)

Import Style Fragment (on page 75)

Project Access Rights (on page 76)

Options (on page 77)

See also Menus (on page 31) Toolbar (on page 78) Shortcut Menu (on page 24)



Preview Drawing

Exports the current style and runs ISOGEN on a standard PCF to create an isometric drawing so

that you can see the effect of the style's current settings.


Preview the Drawing (on page 65)

View the Drawing (on page 66)

View the Message File (on page 66)

View the Report Output (see "View Report File Output" on page 66)

The default drawing output is DXF.

The default text editor linked to this dialog box is Notepad.

To view any errors reported by ISOGEN, open the message file.

See also Export (on page 35)

Preview the Drawing

Click Tools > Preview Drawing.

Alternatively, you can click Preview Drawing on the toolbar.



ISOGEN executes, and when finished, SmartPlant I-Configure displays the Isogen Preview

dialog box:

View the Drawing

Click DRAWING from the File Type column and then click View.

View the Message File

Click MESSAGE from the File Type column and click View.

View Report File Output

Click the report from the File Type column and click View.



Find

Locates items by Property, Option Switch, and File Section.


Search by Property (on page 67)

Search by Option Switch (on page 67)

Search by File Section (on page 68)

Search by Property

1. Click Tools > Find.

2. Click the Property button, type a text string in the Property box and press Enter.

The software lists all the properties containing the specified text string in the Search results list.

When you double-click a property in the Search results list, the software displays that property in the Properties panel (on page 80).

Search by Option Switch


2. Click the Option switch button.

3. In the Options switch box, type the option switch number,



4. Type the position of the option switch in the Position box.

The software lists all the properties containing the specified option switch criteria in the

Search results list.

When you double-click a property in the Search results list, the software displays that property in the Properties panel (on page 80).

Search by File Section


2. Click the File section button to base the search on a specific section of an input file.

3. Select the file in the list:



View Isogen Controls

Opens the View ISOGEN Controls window in which you can preview the ISOGEN settings for

the style.

1. Click Tools > View Isogen Controls to open the ISOGEN Control Files dialog box.

2. Click OK to close the dialog box.

If you double-click a file in the dialog box, the software opens it using your default text editor. To close the file, click File > Cancel.

Import Project

Imports an existing PipMan, Spoolgen 4 or I-Configure-based projects into SmartPlant I-Configure.



PipMan and Spoolgen 4 projects must be imported into SmartPlant I-Configure before they can be used with any other product that now uses SmartPlant I-Configure to create and manage projects and styles.

After the import is complete, the imported project appears in the Project View panel. You can now edit the project and modify its properties using SmartPlant I-Configure.

Import of project and style settings is intelligent. If a project folder is replicated-- that is,

there is a common structure apart from the drive--then the software modifies the path in the style (OPT or FLS) so that it points to the referenced file in its new location. For example, if you copy a project folder from G:\M5000 to C:\USERS\DATA\COMPANYNAME\MP4000, the software identifies the common root (MP4000). Any file referenced from an OPT file in this path, will have its path modified--G:\MP4000\DATA\CPT.FDF is modified to C:\USERS\DATA\COMPANYNAME\MP4000\DATA\CPT.FDF, provided this file exists.


Import a PipMan Project (on page 70)

Import a Spoolgen 4 Project (on page 71)

Import an I-Configure Project (on page 72)

See also Export Behaviour (on page 126) Import Style Settings (on page 73) Import Style Fragment (on page 75)

Import a PipMan Project

1. Create a new isometric directory (see "Create an Isometric Directory" on page 88) in SmartPlant I-Configure.

2. Click Tools > Import Project.

3. In the Import Project dialog box, click Browse and navigate to the project's *.pip file.



4. Specify the required import options, and then click OK.

5. Select the application to which the project applies in the Application list.

6. Click OK.

7. If required, click Yes to view the log file; otherwise, click No.

Until they're imported, PipMan projects are always shown in magenta in the Project View panel.

After import, the original PipMan project remains on the drive as a backup copy.

Import a Spoolgen 4 Project

1. Create a new isometric directory (see "Create an Isometric Directory" on page 88) in SmartPlant I-Configure.




3. In the Import Project dialog box, click Browse and navigate to the project's *.ini file.

4. Define the required import options and then click OK.

5. Select the application to which the project belongs in the Application list and then click

OK.

6. If necessary, click Yes to view the log file; otherwise, click No.

Existing Spoolgen 4 projects are not shown in the Project View panel.

The imported Spoolgen 4 project is only available for use with Spoolgen 5.

After import, the original Spoolgen 4 project remains on the drive as a backup copy.

Import an I-Configure Project

Import of a SmartPlant I-Configure project involves selecting a Project_Data.xml (on page 13) file. By default, the project settings (project defaults, attributes) and data (all files in the source project folder) are copied to a new project. Optionally, the copying of data files can be suppressed, leaving the new project with the identical structure as the old one but empty.

1. Create a new isometric directory (see "Create an Isometric Directory" on page 88).




3. In the Import Project dialog box, click Browse and navigate to the *.xml file for the project to be imported:

4. Do one of the following:

a. Click OK to accept the defaults.

b. Select Import Project settings only if only the project settings are to be imported and then click OK.

The project and all associated styles--existing drawing files and all files in the source

project folder--are copied to a new project. If you selected Import Project settings only, only the style files are imported. Drawing and report files generated previously are not.



Import Style Settings

Imports existing styles from various sources. You can import any of the following:

I-Configure .xml file

Personal Isogen .fls file

SPOOLGEN .opt file

PDS Isogen .def file

Alias .idf file

In the following example, an existing SPOOLGEN v4 *.opt style is imported.

1. Click Tools > Import Style.

2. Click Browse and navigate to the file you want to import.

3. Select the file type required from the Files of type list, select the file you want to import, and then click Open.



4. Specify the import options required and then click Open.

5. Depending on the current status of the styles within the project, do one of the following:

If the style being imported does not exist in the project, the only option available is to import it as a completely new style.

If the style already exists within the project but will be used as a basis for another new style, click Create a new style (to create a completely new style) and then type a name for the new style.

If the style already exists in the project, to import it into an existing style so that its settings are overwritten, click Import into the current style and clear the Clear style

first checkbox.

To import into an existing style, but clear the contents of the style first, click Import

into the current style and the Clear style first checkbox.

The style is imported and you have an opportunity to view a log file created during the style import process.

After import, the style becomes available under the project into which is was imported, and is shown in the Project View panel

See also Import Project (on page 69) Import Style Fragment (on page 75)

Import Style Fragment

Imports a style "fragment" into the current style. A style fragment is contained in an XML file that specifies a set of properties to be set and/or a set of members for a collection object, such as

a set of TextColumns to be used with MaterialList SummaryFile object.

If a style fragment file exists in the same folder as a template file, with the same name and with an .xml extension, it is automatically loaded. This allows the setting of properties specific to the

template file, such as margins, list locations, and so on.

1. In the Project View panel, select the style to which the style fragment applies, such as

Final-Basic.

2. Click Tools > Import Style Fragment.

3. Browse to the XML file for the style fragment and then click Open.

SmartPlant I-Configure reads the content of the style fragment XML file and applies the new properties to the style.

See also Import Project (on page 69) Import Style Settings (on page 73)



Export Style Fragment

Exports a style "fragment" to a file.

1. In the Project View panel, select the style to which the style fragment applies, such as Final-

Basic.

2. Click Tools > Export Style Fragment.

3. Input style fragment file name and select open.

SmartPlant I-Configure reads the content of the style and creates an XML file.


Import Style Settings (on page 73)

Project Access Rights

Modifies the access rights on a project. Access rights can be password protected--the first person

to set the access rights is able to set a password to prevent other users from modifying it. In this way, a project can be set up in such a way that others can see and use it but cannot save changes to the project or any of the styles contained within it.

To avoid situations where the project cannot be modified, such as when the password

is forgotten, ensure that you make a note of the password used for each project. See our disclaimer.

Once a password is set, the access rights cannot be changed unless the correct password is

supplied.

If the access rights are set to Write, then all users of the project are allowed to save changes to the style and export the style settings.

If set to Read Only, then users may make changes, but these cannot be saved or exported.

When you set project access rights to Write using a valid password, any existing password is cleared.

See also AccessRights (on page 96)



Export (on page 35) LockedBy (on page 96)

Options

Specifies the drawing units to be used for the project and controls how paths are displayed in the Project View panel for network projects.

1. Click Tools > Options.

2. In the Options dialog box, specify the appropriate Drawing units.

Drawing units impacts text positioning of attributes, dimensional properties, such as

CharHeight, CharWidth, and so on, used by several objects in SmartPlant I-Configure. The value entered for a property should be a real number, as illustrated in the following table:

3 or 3.0 for 3mm - When drawing units set to mm.

0.125 for 1/8 inch - When drawing units set to inches.

To use UNC paths, click Use UNC path when creating network isometrics directories.

Alternatively, particularly when setting up a network project (see "Set up a Network Project" on page 16) with long path names that can exceed the current ISOGEN path length limitation, de-select the checkbox, and the path is displayed using a mapped drive.

Help Menu

The Help menu provides access to the following commands:

About SmartPlant I-Configure (on page 78)

SmartPlant I-Configure Help (on page 77)

See also Menus (on page 31) Toolbar (on page 78) Shortcut Menu (on page 24)



SmartPlant I-Configure Help

Displays the online documentation delivered with the software.

About SmartPlant I-Configure

Displays information about the current version of SmartPlant I-Configure. This information can

be useful when support issues arise.

Toolbar

The SmartPlant I-Configure toolbar allows quick and easy access to some of the most frequently

used commands.

Create a new isometric directory

Connect to an existing isometric directory.

Disconnect from an existing isometric directory.

Create a new project.

Create a new style.

Save the current style.

Delete the selected item.

Copy the selected object.

Paste the copied object.

Enable the project for application.

Edit project defaults.

Export the current style.

Add to the collection.

Remove from the collection.

Preview ISOGEN output.

Open the Help file.

See also Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface (on page 29) Menus (on page 31)




Project View Panel

The Project View panel displays all of the available isometric directories, projects and styles in a tree view format.

Clicking the + and - boxes situated directly to the left of the isometric directory, or project expands or collapses the tree structure, allowing you to navigate to the available styles and make

modifications. You can use the Project View panel to create, edit and manage isometric directories, projects, and styles.

As you select any level in the tree view, its properties are displayed in the Properties panel.

Changing the value of each property ultimately determines the appearance of the isometric drawings and report file content produced when using the style in other products, such as SmartPlant Isometrics.

SmartPlant I-Configure shows existing PipMan projects and styles in magenta. PipMan

projects and styles (as read directly from the drive) cannot be modified in the software, but they can be imported.

You can also import projects and styles from other products. For more information, see Import Style (see "Import Style Settings" on page 73).

See also New (on page 31) Copy (on page 25) Paste (on page 25)

Properties (on page 21) Properties Panel (on page 80) Import Project (on page 69)



Properties Panel

The Properties panel displays the values that are defined for each object property or the definitions (in row/spreadsheet format) of a collection.

See also Clear (on page 26) Collections (on page 22) Find (on page 66)

Objects (on page 20) Properties (on page 21) Values (on page 21)



Overview Panel

The Overview panel displays a simplified overview of the key properties of a style, for both the drawing and report output.

When you select any property from those shown, the Properties panel updates to show the location of the property and the object to which it belongs. Correspondingly, when you select the

property in the Overview panel and click the Detail tab, the software automatically navigates to the object that the property belongs to and displays it in the Detail panel.

Wizards Toolbar

The Wizards toolbar provides quick access to the SmartPlant I-Configure wizards (see "Wizards

Menu" on page 38).

Drawing Setup Wizard

Welding Wizard

Dimensioning Wizard

Reports Wizard

See also Project View Panel (on page 79) Properties Panel (on page 80) Detail Panel (on page 82)



Detail Panel

The Detail panel shows all of the objects for the currently selected style in a tree view format.

A style is broken down into the following seven main objects. Each style object is in turn further

broken down into sub objects.

AlternativeTexts Object (on page 163)

Drawing Object (on page 166)

DrawingFrame Object (on page 334)


WeldList Object (on page 412)

CutList Object (on page 435)

Supplementary Object (on page 456)



When you click a style object in the Detail panel, the Properties displays all of its currently defined properties. In the following illustration, the properties of the Drawing Content object are displayed in the Properties panel.

As in Windows Explorer, you can click and to expand and collapse the nodes of the tree in order to navigate the various style objects.

You can modify most of these object properties. Changing the value of each property ultimately

determines the appearance of the isometric drawings and report file content produced when the style is exported for use in other products, such as SmartPlant Isometrics. Using the previous illustration as an example, changing the True/False settings controls whether the feature of the isometric drawing controlled by each of the Properties shown is displayed on the drawing or not.



An object can contain a collection of other objects, which is a set of identical and related objects that are also known as definitions). For example, the MaterialList SummaryFile object can contain a set of TextColumn objects. Each one defines a single column in the SummaryFile

output.

In the previous illustration, the properties (AttributeName, Offset and MaxChars) for the

selected MaterialList UserDefined object are stored in a collection called XYColumns(5). The (5) indicates the number of definitions, or objects, in the collection. The Properties panel shows the corresponding properties.

See also Add to Collection (on page 23) Collections (on page 22) Export (on page 35)




Status Bar

The status bar is situated at the bottom of the SmartPlant I-Configure Main window and displays the following details:

Current Isometric Directory - In the previous illustration, the Current Isometric

Directory is C:\SampleIsoDir. This field updates when another Isometric directory is selected in the Project View panel.

Current Project - In the previous illustration, the Current Project is Tutorial. This field updates when another project is selected in the Project View panel.

Current Style - In the previous illustration, the Current Style is None. This field only shows a valid style name when a style is selected in the Project View panel.

Contents of copy buffer - In the previous illustration, the Contents of the copy buffer is Final-Basic. If the copy buffer is empty, as in after a Paste action, the field displays None.

See also Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure Interface (on page 29) Shortcut Menu (on page 24)

Toolbar (on page 78)


S E C T I O N 4

Isometric Directory Object Properties

The properties for each isometric directory are stored in their own object.

When you click an isometric directory in the Project View panel, the Properties panel updates

to show its corresponding object properties. In the previous illustration, the Properties panel is displaying the object properties of the SampleIsoDir isometric directory.

Object Properties

Path - Displays the isometric directory folder file path. This information is read-only and cannot be modified.

Name - Displays the isometric directory folder name. This information is read-only and cannot be modified.

ChangeProjectList - Specifies whether you can add or delete projects to and from the

isometric directory. If set to True, adding and deleting projects is allowed. If there is not write access to the ProjectList.xml (on page 15), the property value is set to False and no add/delete functions can be completed.

Isometric Directories



ChangeIsoDirList - Specifies whether you can add or delete isometric directories to and from the global list. If set to True, adding and deleting isometric directories is allowed. If there is no write access to the IsoDirList.xml (on page 13) file, the property value is set to

False, and no add/delete functions can be completed. This property is not visible in SmartPlant I-Configure.

See also Project Object Properties (on page 91)

Style Object (see "Style Object Properties" on page 125) Create an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory (on page 89) Delete an Isometric Directory (on page 88)

Create an Isometric Directory

1. Click New Isometric Directory .

Alternatively, you can click File > New > Isometric Directory.

2. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, double-click the drive or specify the network path on which you want to create the new isometric directory.

3. Click New Folder.

4. Edit the name of the new folder to be the name of the new isometric directory and the then click OK.

The new isometric directory appears in the Project View panel.

Isometric directory object properties are shown in the Properties panel .

After you create an isometric directory, you must next create a project (on page 121) to hold styles.

If you select the No Projects level in the Project View panel, Create New Project is unavailable.

In order to create a project, you must first select the isometric directory.

On Windows NT4 systems, New Folder does not appear on the Create Isometric

Directory dialog box. Use Windows Explorer to create a folder with the required isometric directory name before selecting this as the isometric directory to be used.

See also Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory (on page 89) Delete an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Isometric Directory Object Properties (on page 87)



Delete an Isometric Directory

Deleting a remote isometric directory only removes the reference to it from the Project View panel, the folder is not deleted.

You cannot delete remote project and style folders.

1. In the Project View panel, click the isometric directory you want to delete.

2. Click Delete .

Alternatively, you can click Edit > Delete.

You can also right-click the isometric directory in the Project View panel and then click

Delete on the shortcut menu.

Deleting an isometric directory cannot be undone.

See also Delete (on page 36) Create an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory (on page 89) Isometric Directory Object Properties (on page 87)



Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory

1. In the Project View panel, click the isometric directory you want to copy.

2. Click Copy .

Alternatively, you can click Edit > Copy, or you can right-click the isometric directory and then click Copy on the shortcut menu (on page 24).

3. With the isometric directory still selected, click Paste .

Alternatively, you can click Edit > Paste or click Paste on the shortcut menu.

4. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, double-click the drive or specify a network path on

which the copied (new) isometric directory is going to be placed.

5. Click New Folder and then edit the name of the new folder to be the name of the pasted (new) isometric directory.

6. Isometric directories that exist on the same drive cannot have the same name.

7. Click OK.

The Project View panel updates to show the newly pasted isometric directory, including all

the projects and styles that were part of the original isometric directory.

See also Create an Isometric Directory (on page 88) Delete an Isometric Directory (on page 88)


S E C T I O N 5

Project Object Properties

The properties for each project are stored in their own object. The project object controls the following properties:

Name (on page 93)

Path (on page 93)

Source (on page 93)

AppList (on page 93)

AppCount (on page 93)

WeldGaps (on page 94)

ElbowConversion (on page 94)

ChangeStyleList (on page 95)

AccessRights (on page 96)

LockedBy (on page 96)

Projects

Projects


When you select a project in the Project View panel, the software updates the Properties panel to display the properties specific to the selected project. In the following illustration, the Properties panel is showing the properties that have been defined for the SPITutorial project.

Project properties are read only and cannot be modified.

See also Isometric Directory Object Properties (on page 87) Style Object Properties (on page 125) Import Project (on page 69) Create a Project (see "Project" on page 32)

Copy and Paste a Project (on page 121) Delete a Project (on page 122)

Projects


Name

Specifies the project folder name.

Path

Specifies the project folder file path.

Source

Displays the vendor-specific string that was defined when the project was created. For example,

a project created by an Intergraph product, such as SmartPlant Isometrics, has the Source set to Intergraph. The Source string is controlled by the SetSource method as described in the ProjectConfig_application.xml file.

The Source property allows a vendor to judge whether its software can use the project, and

allows the user to identify which projects are created by which vendor software products.

Products such as SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen can share a project.

This is a read only property and cannot be modified.

See also Create a Project (on page 121) Enable Project (on page 34) ProjectConfig_application.xml (see "ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml" on page 13)

AppList

Displays the names of the enabled products in a semi-colon delimited list, such as Spoolgen;SmartPlant Isometrics.

AppCount

Displays the number of software products enabled (see "Enable Project" on page 34) on the project.

Projects


WeldGaps

Contains an XML-formatted text string, which defines the rules for ISOGEN to allow for weld gaps, weld shrinkage, connection gaps and connection insertion lengths, when dimensioning and adjusting cut piece lengths.

Initially the WeldGaps property value is empty. To populate, you must double-click the property value box and then click File > Update in the WeldGaps window.

If any data is present in the WeldGaps property, you can set the UseWeldGapData

property on the MaterialList CutList object to True so that so that data is written to the ISOGEN Welding Definition File (WDF).

When you import a style, if the WDF contains a WELD-GAPS entry, the WeldGaps and MaterialList.CutList.UseWeldGapData properties are both set to True.

See also CutList Object (on page 435) Import Style Settings (on page 73) UseWeldGapData (on page 439)

ElbowConversion

Contains an XML format text string. The ElbowConversion property defines the rules for the following:

Conversion of elbows to pulled bends for products such as SmartPlant Spoolgen.

Cut length adjustments that ISOGEN makes make to the length of cut pieces to allow for extra lengths of pipe to satisfy the requirements of particular bending machines.

Projects


If any data is present in ElbowConversion property, it is used by SmartPlant Spoolgen for converting elbows to bends. Also, if data is present, then all styles which output cut list information must set the UseTangentData property on the MaterialList CutList object to True

to make sure that the cut list values are correct.

Initally, the ElbowConversion property value is empty. Double-click the property value box and then click File > Update in the ElbowConversion window.

When you import a style, if the DDF contains a STANDARD-BEND-LENGTHS entry, the ElbowConversion and MaterialList.CutList.UseTangentData properties are both set to True. The following is an example of a file for elbow to bend conversion:

See also CutList Object (on page 435) Import Style Settings (on page 73) UseTangentData (on page 439)

ChangeStyleList

Specifies whether or not you add and delete styles from the project. If set to True, you can add and delete styles. If there is no write access to the ProjectList.xml file in the isometric directory on a network project, the ChangeListStyle property is set to False and add/delete functions are

prohibited.

If the project AccessRights property is set to ReadOnly, the ChangeStyleList property is also set to False.

See also AccessRights (on page 96) ProjectList.xml (on page 15) Set Up a Network Project (on page 16)

Projects


AccessRights

Indicates the level of access to the project. The AccessRights property is either Write or ReadOnly.

To change the access rights on a project, you must use the Project Access Rights (on page 76) command.

You can lock the style files against unwanted modification in two ways:

1. Set the file system access control on the Style XML file or Style folder.

2. Set a password in the Project Access Rights dialog box.

The style CanWrite and CanExport properties indicate whether the user has rights to save the style or export the style to ISOGEN control files.

The AccessRights property is set to ReadOnly if the user does not have write access to the Project_data.xml file in the project folder. In this case, no changes can be saved to project

properties.

See also CanExport (on page 127) CanWrite (on page 127) Export (on page 35) LockedBy (on page 96)

Set Up a Network Project (on page 16)

LockedBy

Displays the name of the individual who locked the project, presuming that the AccessRights

property is set to ReadOnly. Otherwise, the property is blank.

See also AccessRights (on page 96) Project Access Rights (on page 76)

Project Defaults

1. In the Project View panel, select a project.



The software displays the Project Defaults dialog box.

3. Define values for the properties as required.

The project defaults that the software displays are product-specific. Consequently, not all properties display for all products.

Material Database (on page 97)

Repeat Style (on page 98)

Projects


Imported Weld Numbers (on page 98)

Imported Part Numbers (on page 99)

Imported Split Points (on page 100)

Imported Spool Ids (on page 100)

Import Directory (on page 101)

PreProcessor (on page 102)

GED Configuration (on page 102)

Project Work Folder (on page 103)

Straight Length (on page 103)

Project ID Type (on page 104)

SmartPlant Integration (on page 104)

Default Support Category (on page 105)

In the case of the default application, such as I-Run, no project defaults are displayed.

You can click the Attributes tab to display pipeline, component, weld and bolt attribute information.

See also Attributes (on page 105) ProjectConfig_application.xml (see "ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml" on page 13)

Application

Specifies the software product, such as SmartPlant Spoolgen, to which the project defaults apply.

See also


Material Database

Defines the path to the Material database used for additional material. You can create and

modify the Material database using SmartPlant Material Editor.


2. Alternatively, you can click Edit > Project Defaults.

Projects


3. Click in the Value box for Material Database and then click .

4. In the Specify File dialog box, navigate to the required folder and then click Open.

See also


Repeat Style

Defines the style in the set of project styles that is used for drawing level Repeatability.


2. Alternatively, you can click Edit > Project Defaults.

3. Click in the Value box Repeat Style and then click .

4. Click a style in the list.

See also


Imported Weld Numbers

Specifies how imported weld numbers are handled. The following settings are available:

Keep - Any weld numbers present in the PCF or IDF are kept. If none exist, then weld numbers are assigned by ISOGEN during import and kept. Weld numbers assigned on import use the SGImport style settings.

Clear - Any weld numbers present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are be cleared.

Equivalent to the Tools > Weld Numbers > Clear command in SmartPlant

Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen.

Projects


Assign - Any weld numbers present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import, are cleared and new weld numbers assigned. Weld numbers assigned are per pipeline with all welds having one sequence.

Equivalent to the Tools > Weld Numbers > Assign command in SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen.

Assign Repeat Data - The action depends upon whether it is the first time the pipeline has been processed or if it is a subsequent processing of the same pipeline.

Pipeline processed for the first time - Any weld numbers present in the PCF, IDF, or

assigned by ISOGEN during import are cleared and new weld numbers assigned using the style specified by the Repeat Style property. If the Repeat Style match those used in the design phase, then consistency is maintained between the design and fabrication phase.

Subsequent processing of same pipeline - Any weld numbers present in the PCF, IDF,

or assigned by ISOGEN during import are cleared. Weld numbers assigned during the initial run, which are stored in the pipeline object data (POD) file, are reinstated. Any new weld numbers are assigned using the style specified by the Repeat Style property. If the Repeat Style settings match those used in the design phase, then consistency is maintained between the design and fabrication phase.

In all of the previously mentioned cases, when a revised pipeline data file is received, the weld numbers may not necessarily match those previously created.

See also Repeat Style (on page 98)


Imported Part Numbers

Specifies how imported part numbers are handled. The following settings are available:

Keep - Any part numbers present in the PCF or IDF are kept. If none exist, then part

numbers are assigned by ISOGEN during import and kept. Part numbers assigned on import use the SGImport style settings.

Clear - Any weld numbers present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are be cleared.

Equivalent to the Tools > Part Numbers > Clear command in SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen.

Assign - Any part numbers present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import, are cleared and new part numbers assigned. Part numbers assigned are per pipeline.

Equivalent to the Tools > Part Numbers > Assign command in SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen.


Pipeline processed for the first time - Any part numbers present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are cleared and new part numbers assigned using the style specified by the Repeat Style property. If the Repeat Style match those used in

Projects


the design phase, then consistency is maintained between the design and fabrication phase.

Subsequent processing of same pipeline - Any part numbers present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are cleared. Part numbers assigned during the initial run, which are stored in the pipeline object data (POD) file, are reinstated. Any new part numbers are assigned using the style specified by the Repeat Style property. If

the Repeat Style settings match those used in the design phase, then consistency is maintained between the design and fabrication phase.

In all of the previously mentioned cases, when a revised pipeline data file is received, the part numbers may not necessarily match those previously created.

See also Repeat Style (on page 98) Project Defaults (on page 37)

Imported Split Points

Specifies how imported split points are handled. The following settings are available:

Keep - Any split points present in the PCF or IDF are kept. If none exist, then split points are assigned by ISOGEN during import and kept.

Clear - Any split points present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are be cleared.

Equivalent to the Tools > Clear Split Points command in SmartPlant Spoolgen.


Pipeline processed for the first time - Any split points present in the PCF, IDF, or

assigned by ISOGEN during import are cleared and new split points assigned using the style specified by the Repeat Style property. If the Repeat Style match those used in the design phase, then consistency is maintained between the design and fabrication phase.

Subsequent processing of same pipeline - Any split points present in the PCF, IDF, or

assigned by ISOGEN during import are cleared. Split points assigned during the initial run, which are stored in the pipeline object data (POD) file, are reinstated. Any new split points will be assigned using the style specified by the Repeat Style property. If the Repeat Style settings match those used in the design phase, then consistency is maintained between the design and fabrication phase.

In all of the previously mentioned cases, when a revised pipeline data file is received, the split points may not necessarily match those previously created.


Projects


Imported Spool IDs

Specifies how imported spool IDs are handled. The following settings are available:

Keep - Any spool IDs present in the PCF or IDF are kept. If none exist, then spool IDs are assigned by ISOGEN during import and kept.

Clear - Any spool IDs present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are be cleared.

Equivalent to the Tools > Clear Spool IDs command in SmartPlant Spoolgen.


Pipeline processed for the first time - Any spool IDs present in the PCF, IDF, or assigned by ISOGEN during import are cleared and new spool IDs assigned using the

style specified by the Repeat Style property. If the Repeat Style match those used in the design phase, then consistency is maintained between the design and fabrication phase.

Subsequent processing of same pipeline - Any spool IDs present in the PCF, IDF, or

assigned by ISOGEN during import are cleared. Spool IDs assigned during the initial run, which are stored in the pipeline object data (POD) file, are reinstated. Any new spool IDs are assigned using the style specified by the Repeat Style property. If the Repeat Style settings match those used in the design phase, then consistency is maintained between the design and fabrication phase.

In all of the previously mentioned cases, when a revised pipeline data file is received, the split points may not necessarily match those previously created.


Import Directory

Defines the path to where the import files are stored.



Projects


2. Click in the Value box for Import Directory and then click .

3. In the Browse for Folder dialog box, navigate to the required folder and then click OK.

See also


PreProcessor

The two PreProcessor project defaults control the use of the Piping Data Processor utility in the

piping work flow.

PreProcessor Configuration - Specifies the path to the .ppc configuration file.

PreProcessor on Import - If set to True, the software executes PipingDataProcessor.exe file to pre-process piping data input files on import into the project. If set to False, the PipingDataProcessor.exe file is not executed on import.

For more information, see the online documentation delivered with the Piping Data Processor utility.

See also


GED Configuration

Controls execution of the Get External Data functionality at various stages of the piping work

flow. For each use of Get External Data, the content of the configuration file can be different.

GED Configuration (Import) - Specifies the path to the External Data Configuration file used on import of piping data into the project.

External Data on Import - If set to True, the Get External Data function is executed on import of piping data. If set to False, the Get External Data function is not executed on import.

Projects


GED Configuration (Interactive) - Specifies the path to the External Data Configuration file used during the editing of piping data when you use the Tools > Get External Data command in SmartPlant Isometrics or SmartPlant Spoolgen.

GED Configuration (Generate) - Specifies the path to the External Data Configuration file executed just prior to drawing generation.

External Data on Generate Drawing - If set to True, the Get External Data function is

executed prior to drawing generation. If set to False, the Get External Data function is not executed prior to drawing generation.

See also External data (on page 565) XML Configuration File (on page 567) Project Defaults (on page 37)

Project Work Folder

Specifies the project Work folder where the user data is stored when checked out.

See also


Straight Length

Specifies the length of pipe to be used as the default for splitting long pipelines in SmartPlant Spoolgen.

See also


Projects


Project ID Type

Specifies what the SmartPlant Spoolgen project uses for files in the project: Pipeline Reference, File Name, or Reference and File Name. You define the Project ID Type when you create the project.

See also Create a Project (on page 121) Project Defaults (on page 37)

SmartPlant Integration

A project must be registered before you can connect to the integrated environment to publish materials data. To register an isometric project with a SmartPlant Foundation plant, you use the

SmartPlant Registration Wizard to define the following integration-specific project defaults:

SmartPlant Foundation URL - Specifies the node name and virtual directory of the

SmartPlant Foundation database with which you want to register your isometric project. Use the following format: http://SPFServer/VirtualDirectory.

SmartPlant Foundation Plant - Specifies the SmartPlant Foundation plant with which you want to associate your isometric project.

SmartPlant Foundation Signature - Unique 4-character code assigned to an authoring tool when it registers with SmartPlant Foundation.

Register a Project with a SmartPlant Foundation Plant

1. In the Project View panel, click the name of the isometric project you want to register.

2. Click Edit > Project Defaults.

3. Scroll down to SmartPlant Foundation URL in the Application list, and click in the

Value cell to open the SmartPlant Registration Wizard.

You can also click in the Value cell for SmartPlant Foundation Plant or SmartPlant Foundation Signature to open the SmartPlant Foundation Wizard.

Projects


4. On the SmartPlant Foundation URL page of the SmartPlant Registration Wizard, type the node name and virtual directory of the SmartPlant Foundation database with which you want to register. Use the following format: http://SPFServer/VirtualDirectory.

5. On the SmartPlant Foundation Plant page of the SmartPlant Registration Wizard, select the plant in the Plant name list with which you want to register and click Finish.

6. Click OK.

The three SmartPlant Foundation project defaults are updated with the defined values.

You must first configure the software to work in an integrated environment by installing the Schema Component and the SmartPlant Client, which are both delivered with SmartPlant Foundation, on your SmartPlant Isometrics or your SmartPlant Spoolgen workstation. For more information, see the Integration Setup Guide, which delivered on the

SmartPlant Foundation product DVD.

See also


Default Support Category

Specifies the default category for new supports: None, Fabrication, Erection, or Offshore.

See also


Projects


Attributes

You can use the Attributes tab on the Project Defaults dialog box to define names and default values for user attributes. You can also edit values to be taken by system attributes, such as Pipe Spec, Revision, and so on.

DisplayName - Define the name required. In the following example, Weld Prefix (Fab) has been defined.

You can also use this field in external data configuration (see "GED Configuration" on page 102).

DefaultValue - A value that can be set on Import, depending on the setting of the Set Value data field.

Allowable Values - Displays the allowable values for this data field.

Isogen Att - Displays the ISOGEN attribute to which the data field name is mapped.

Attributes 1 to 99 map to ISOGEN -601 to -699.

Attributes 100 to 199 map to ISOGEN -900 to -999.

Projects


The following example shows a new attribute with a display name of P+ID-From as Attribute101 which is ISOGEN attribute -901.

Source - Indicates that the attribute is either a System or User attribute.

Set Value - Displays one of the following:

ISOGEN - if no DefaultValue is defined, in which case, the attribute cannot be

modified.

ISOGEN then Default - if there is a DefaultValue set, then SmartPlant Spoolgen uses the value in the ISOGEN input file if there is one; if not, it uses the DefaultValue.

Default - SmartPlant Spoolgen uses the DefaultValue setting for the attribute regardless of whether there is a value in the input piping data file.

Units - Units applicable to the attribute, if required

Visible - Controls whether the attribute is shown when the pipeline attributes are displayed in SmartPlant Spoolgen

Editable - Controls whether the value can be changed in SmartPlant Spoolgen.

Expression - For more information, see Attribute Expressions (on page 115).

You can only delete user-defined attributes.

The Attributes tab allows you to manage attributes in any one of the following four attribute

groups:

Pipeline (see "Pipeline Attributes" on page 108)

Component (see "Component Attributes" on page 110)

Welds (see "Weld Attributes" on page 110)

Bolts (see "Bolt Attributes" on page 111)

Spool (see "Spool Attributes" on page 111)

Material (see "Material Attributes" on page 112)

Projects


The Context list organizes the attribute groups.

See also Project Defaults (on page 37) Add a New Attribute (on page 112) Edit an Attribute (on page 113) Delete an Attribute (on page 114) Attribute Expressions (on page 115)

Pipeline Attributes

This tab shows all the attributes currently allowed for the pipeline in SmartPlant I-Configure.

Pipeline Header Attribute Description

AREA data Identifies part of a project.

ATTRIBUTE1data

to

ATTRIBUTE199 data

Provides up to 199 user-defined pipe header attributes

that can be used for any purpose.

BATCH data Identifies part of a project.

BEND-RADIUS data Standard pulled bend radius.

DATE-DMY data D=Day M=Month Y=Year, such as 21/09/99.

Specify in any order.

HIGHEST-ASSEMBLY-NUMBER

data

Highest Assembly Number generated on the previous

run of the pipeline.

HIGHEST-PART-NUMBER data Highest Material List Part Number generated on the

previous run of the pipeline.

HIGHEST-SPOOL-NUMBER data Highest Spool Number generated on the previous run

of the pipeline.

Projects


Pipeline Header Attribute Description

HIGHEST-SUPPORT-WELD-NUMBER data

Highest Pipe Support Weld Number generated on the previous run of the pipeline.

HIGHEST-UNIQUE-PART-IDENTIFIER data

Highest Unique Part Identifier generated on the previous run of the pipeline.

HIGHEST-WELD-NUMBER data Highest Weld Number generated on the previous run of the pipeline.

INSULATION-SPEC data Insulation Spec reference.

ITEM-ATTRIBUTE0 data

to

ITEM-ATTRIBUTE9 data

Provides up to 10 User defined material Attributes for use where component material descriptions are broken

down into a series of short elements where data is defined in dynamic keywords like MATL RATING SPEC THKS etc. This provides an alternative method to having a single long material description in a component DESCRIPTION attribute.

MISC-SPEC1 data User defined Miscellaneous Specification Reference.





NOMINAL-CLASS data Identifies pipeline design class.

NOMINAL-RATING data Identifies pipeline design class.

OFFSET-IMPERIAL data Offset in feet from Datum point.

OFFSET-METRIC data Offset in meters from Datum point.

OUTPUT-FILE-NAME data Name to be used for drawing output file.

PAINTING-SPEC data Painting specification.

PIPELINE-REFERENCE data Pipeline name.

PIPELINE-TEMP data Pipeline operating temperature.

PIPELINE-TYPE data Type of Pipeline construction.

PIPING-SPEC data Pipeline specification reference.

PROJECT-IDENTIFIER data Project number or name.

REPLOT Single isometric re-plot request.

REVISION data Revision identifier.

SPECIFIC-GRAVITY data Specific gravity of pipeline contents.

Projects


SPOOL-PREFIX data Prefix to be used on spool identifiers.

START-CO-ORDS data Indicator to ensure IDF is generated with same start

point on replot.

SUPPORT-WELD-PREFIX-

ERECTION data

Prefix to be used for the identification of all erection

pipe support welds.


FABRICATION data

Prefix to be used for the identification of all

fabrication pipe support welds.


OFFSHORE data

Prefix to be used for the identification of all offshore

pipe support welds.

SYSTEM-ISOMETRIC-

REFERENCE data

System isometric name.

TRACING-SPEC data Tracing Specification reference.

WELD-PREFIX-ERECTION data Prefix to be used for the identification of all erection

welds.

WELD-PREFIX-FABRICATION

data

Prefix to be used for the identification of all

fabrication welds

WELD-PREFIX-GENERAL data General prefix to be used for the identification of all

welds.

WELD-PREFIX-OFFSHORE data Prefix to be used for the identification of all offshore

welds.

Component Attributes

This tab shows all the attributes currently allowed for components--pipes, flanges, valves, and so on--in SmartPlant I-Configure.

ISOGEN supports a set of attributes that are available for all components, including a set of 10 user-definable ones. In addition, certain components have specific attributes. For example, a valve has a SPINDLE-DIRECTION attribute not used by other components.

The Component Attributes tab shows the attributes available to all components.

The following table shows the ISOGEN user-defined attributes:

Pipeline Data File Format Attributes

IDF –190 to -199 records

PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 to COMPONENT-

ATTRIBUTE10

Projects


Weld Attributes

This tab shows all the attributes currently allowed for welds in SmartPlant I-Configure.

ISOGEN supports a set of attributes that are available for all welds, including a set of 10 user-

definable attributes.

Weld attributes are attached to welds in the 3D design system model, and it is recommended that

you refer to your Design System Administrator for information on how to set them up. They are then passed to ISOGEN in extracted Piping Data files, either in IDF or PCF format.

The following table lists the ISOGEN user-defined attributes:



PCF WELD-ATTRIBUTE1 to WELD- ATTRIBUTE10

In ISOGEN, in addition to being output on the isometric drawing, they can also be output to the Weld Summary file.

Bolt Attributes

This tab shows all the attributes currently allowed for bolts in SmartPlant I-Configure.

ISOGEN supports a set of attributes that are available for all bolts, including a set of 10 user-definable attributes.




PCF ASSEMBLY-ATTRIBUTE1 to ASSEMBLY-

ATTRIBUTE10

In the case of bolts, ASSEMBLY-ATTRIBUTES are not included in the tab, but can be

added clicking .

Projects


Spool Attributes

This tab shows all the attributes currently allowed for Spools in SmartPlant I-Configure.



-28

IDF -91 record

-170 to -179 record

PCF SPOOL-IDENTIFIER

SPOL-DRAWING-SEQUENCE- NUMBER

SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE1 to SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE10

Material Attributes

This tab shows all the attributes currently allowed for materials in SmartPlant I-Configure.

The following table lists ISOGEN user-defined attributes:


IDF -80 to -89 records

PCF MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE1 to MATERIAL-

ATTRIBUTE10

Add a New Attribute

1. Click Project Defaults and then click the Attributes tab.

2. Click New.

3. In the New Attribute dialog box, use the Isogen attribute list to select the attribute you want to add.

Projects


Isogen attribute is the name used in the PCF.

4. Define the attribute properties as required and then click OK.

The new attribute is displayed in its group on the Attributes tab of the Project Defaults

dialog box.

See also Project Defaults (on page 37)

Edit an Attribute (on page 113) Delete an Attribute (on page 114) Attribute Expressions (on page 115)

Edit an Attribute


2. Double-click the attribute you want to edit.

Projects


3. In the Attribute dialog box, edit the data as needed and then click OK.

Delete an Attribute


2. Select the attribute you want to delete and then click Remove.

You can only delete user-defined attributes.

Remove is only available when a user-defined attribute is selected.

See also Project Defaults (on page 37) Add a New Attribute (on page 112) Edit an Attribute (on page 113)

Projects


Import PipeHeader Attributes

You can import project attributes from the PIPEHEADER-ATTRIBUTES section of a DDF or from the Personal ISOGEN .PIP file used in Project Manager (PipMan) projects.


2. Click Import on the Attributes tab.

3. In the Browse for Project Data dialog box, select the required input file format from the Files of type list.

4. Navigate to the required file, select it, and then click Open to import.

If the Pipe Header attributes are imported, use care when using the External Pipeline attributes file.

Attribute Expressions

You can define an attribute as containing an expression that references other attributes in the same collection and can contain functions. The value of the attribute is then the result of evaluating the expression.

ATTRIBUTE1 = P-100-ABC

ATTRIBUTE2 = Left(“$ATTRIBUTE1$”,1) & Right(“$ATTRIBUTE1$”,3)

In the previous example, ATTRIBUTE2 contains an expression. Its value (as seen in the properties dialog box in SmartPlant Spoolgen) is reported as PABC (the left most character plus the three right-hand characters from the string “P-100-ABC”).

A good analogy is a spreadsheet, where a cell can reference the contents of another cell and built in spreadsheet functions. Cells can contain both values and formulas.

Expression Building Rules

References can be made only to other attributes in the same collection of attributes. That is, you cannot reference a pipeline attribute from a component.

References to other attributes are made using the $ATTRIBUTE_NAME$ syntax. The ATTRIBUTE_NAME must be the underlying unique name for the attribute, not the DisplayName, which can be redefined by the user. The Expression Builder is used to help build correctly-defined expressions.

Expressions are evaluated using the VBScript engine. That is, the syntax of the attribute expression must be valid VBScript syntax and can contain any function supported by that language. If an expression cannot be evaluated, regardless of the reason, the value reported is the original expression.

ATTRIBUTE2 = Left(“$ATTRIBUTE1$”,1) :

ATTRIBUTE2 would display “P”

ATTRIBUTE2 = Lft(“$ATTRIBUTE1$”,1)

ATTRIBUTE2 would display “Lft(“$ATTRIBUTE1$”,1)”

[Lft is not a valid VBScript function]

Projects


If the expression is expecting a string-- for example, the Left function takes a string value for its

first argument--then the double quote (“) must be used around the attribute reference, whether or not the referenced attribute is defined as a string is irrelevant.

Valid - Left(“$ATTRIBUTE1$”,1)

Invalid - Left($ATTRIBUTE1$,1)

The attribute containing the expression must be defined as a string. All the POD user-defined attributes (ATTRIBUTE1..ATTRIBUTE200, COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1..COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10) are suitable for use as expressions.

Specifying That an Attribute Contains an Expression

1. Create a new attribute (see "Add a New Attribute" on page 112) (or edit an existing one) from the project defaults.

2. Select Evaluate Expression

Build becomes available on the dialog box.

Although you can type an attribute expression directly into the Default value box, clicking

Build displays the Expression Builder.

Projects


Expression Builder

The Expression Builder is divided into the following areas:

Attributes - Lists all available (defined) attributes.

Functions - Lists the functions that can be executed as part of expression.

Expression - Type the expression

Result -Displays the result when the expression is executed.

Projects


1. To add a new attribute reference, double-click the row containing the attribute you wish to add.

2. To add a function reference, select a function from the tree view on the right-hand side of the Expression Builder and then double-click it.

The function is inserted in the Expression edit box at the cursor position. The tree view

shows the function name and a one line help string.

3. To test the expression, type a value for any referenced expression in the grid on the left-hand side and click Test.

Projects


The expression is evaluated using the values entered for the referenced attributes and the result displayed in the lower text box. In the event that the expression cannot be evaluated, an error message appears in the Result text box, indicating the cause.

In the previous illustration, the following errors are causing the Expression Builder to fail to evaluate:

The right bracket on the Left function must be after the $PIPELINE-REFERENCE$.

The Left function needs a parameter specifying how many characters to extract from the left most end of the string.

The $PIPELINE-REFERENCE$ must be enclosed in quotes.

Projects


When you correct the errors and re-run Expression Builder the result is C, the left-most character from the string CS150.

New Workflow Attributes

SmartPlant I-Configure is aware of the new work flow attributes that are added to the POD by

SmartPlant Spoolgen when files are imported. These attributes are available in the Expression Builder for SmartPlant Spoolgen projects.

Expressions in the Alias Attribute Editor

The Attribute Editor control (AttributeEditor.ocx, 1.4 or later) supports the editing of

expressions (using the Expression Builder defined in the previous section). Clicking an attribute that contains an expression displays the standard edit button:

Projects


When you click , the software displays the Expression Builder. The dialog box is populated with current values of the attributes. Operation of the dialog box is the same as described in the previous sections.

Editing an expression in SmartPlant Spoolgen only affects the current POD file. In order to change the expression for all future POD files in the project, the expression must be changed in SmartPlant I-Configure project defaults as previously described.

Copy and Paste a Project

1. In the Project View panel, click the project you want to copy.

2. Click Copy .

Alternatively, you can click Edit > Copy, or you can right-click the project and then click Copy on the shortcut menu (on page 24).

3. In the Project View panel, click the isometric directory in which you want to paste the project.

4. Click Paste .

The project and all of its associated styles are pasted into the Isometric directory.

You can repeat steps 1-4 to copy and paste multiple projects.

Create a Project


Create a new isometric directory (see "Create an Isometric Directory" on page 88)

Select an existing isometric directory in the Project View panel.

2. Click Create New Project .

Alternatively, you can click File > New > Project.

3. On the Create New Project dialog box, type a name for the new project in the New Project

Name box.

4. In the Application list, click the name of the product to which the new project applies.

5. In the Available Styles list, select the styles required for the new project.

You can include and exclude styles by checking and un-checking their check boxes.

6. Click OK.

The software creates the project and its associated styles.

A project must be created for use with a specific product. However, it is possible to enable a project for use with other products.

The styles that are available in the Available Styles list depends on which product is selected from the Application list..

Projects


By default, all styles suitable for use with the selected product are shown as checked. If any styles are not required, simply un-check them, and they are excluded when the project is created.

When you create a project for SmartPlant Spoolgen, you must also initialize the project attributes by specifying the value for the Project ID Type.

See also Enable Project (on page 34)

Import Project (on page 69) ProjectConfig_application.xml (see "ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml" on page 13) Project Defaults (on page 37) Project ID Type (on page 104)

Delete a Project

Deleting a project cannot be undone.

1. In the Project View panel, click the project you want to delete.

2. Click Delete .


You can also right-click the project in the Project View panel and then click Delete on the shortcut menu.

Projects



S E C T I O N 6

Style Object Properties

The style object contains the controlling properties of a style. The style can be displayed as an overview (see "Overview Panel" on page 81), or in detail (see "Detail Panel" on page 82). The style object controls the following properties:

Name (on page 126)

Path (on page 126)

ExportBehavior (on page 126)

StyleState (on page 126)

StyleType (on page 127)

CanWrite (on page 127)

CanExport (on page 127)

When you select a style in the Project View panel, the software updates the Properties panel to display the properties specific to the selected style. In the following illustration, the Properties

panel is showing the properties that have been defined for the Final-Basic style.

Styles

Styles


You can modify each of the properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value.

See also Isometric Directory Object Properties (on page 87) Project Object Properties (on page 91) Import Style (see "Import Style Settings" on page 73) Import Style Fragment (on page 75) Create a Style (on page 559)

Copy and Paste a Style (on page 558) Delete a Style (on page 560) Select a Style (on page 561) Export a Style (on page 560) Save a Style (on page 561)

Name

Displays the name of the style.

Path

Displays the file path to the style directory. The Options file and the Data Definition file are

located in the style directory.

ExportBehavior

Controls the behavior of the File > Export command.

Always Export - Style property is exported to the ISOGEN control files.

Export if Pending - Style property is only exported if the StyleState property is defined as Export Pending or Export and Save Pending.

Never Export - Style property is not exported.

See also Export (on page 35) StyleState (on page 126)

StyleState

StyleState is a read only property that reports whether the style has been changed. If the style

has been changed, StyleState also indicates whether it has been saved and/or exported since the last change was made.

Unchanged - No changes have been made.

Export Pending - Changes have been saved but not exported.

Save Pending - Changes have been exported but not saved.

Export and Save Pending - Changes have not been saved or exported.

Styles


StyleType

Indicates whether the style is a system one, such as the special purpose SGImport style (used by SmartPlant Spoolgen) or a general purpose user one. The property is read only and has no effect on SmartPlant I-Configure behavior.

CanWrite

Controls whether the changes can be written back to the Style.xml file. To do so, requires write

access to the Style.xml file. By default, the CanWrite property is set to False if the project AccessRights property is set to Read.

See also AccessRights (on page 96) Style.xml (on page 15)

CanExport

Controls whether the style can be exported. Exporting a style requires write access to the style

folder.

Detail Panel

The Detail panel shows all of the objects for the currently selected style in a tree view format.

A style is broken down into the following seven main objects. Each style object is in turn further

broken down into sub objects.

AlternativeTexts Object (on page 163)

Drawing Object (on page 166)

Styles


DrawingFrame Object (on page 334)



CutList Object (on page 435)

Supplementary Object (on page 456)

When you click a style object in the Detail panel, the Properties displays all of its currently defined properties. In the following illustration, the properties of the Drawing Content object are displayed in the Properties panel.

As in Windows Explorer, you can click and to expand and collapse the nodes of the tree in order to navigate the various style objects.

You can modify most of these object properties. Changing the value of each property ultimately

determines the appearance of the isometric drawings and report file content produced when the style is exported for use in other products, such as SmartPlant Isometrics. Using the previous

Styles


illustration as an example, changing the True/False settings controls whether the feature of the isometric drawing controlled by each of the Properties shown is displayed on the drawing or not.

An object can contain a collection of other objects, which is a set of identical and related objects that are also known as definitions). For example, the MaterialList SummaryFile object can contain a set of TextColumn objects. Each one defines a single column in the SummaryFile

output.

In the previous illustration, the properties (AttributeName, Offset and MaxChars) for the selected MaterialList UserDefined object are stored in a collection called XYColumns(5). The (5) indicates the number of definitions, or objects, in the collection. The Properties panel shows the corresponding properties.

See also Add to Collection (on page 23) Collections (on page 22)

Styles


Export (on page 35) Remove from Collection (on page 23)

AlternativeTexts

Alternative Text, or AText has it is often called, is a powerful ISOGEN feature that enables any text on the isometric drawing to be easily changed or removed.

The feature operates by assigning a unique identification number to each standard text string. The ID number is then referred to whenever a change needs to be done to the text string that the number represents.

For a complete list of available ATexts and their default values, see Grouping of AText Listings (on page 133).

By definition, a standard text string can either be a single character, a single word, or a group of

words. However, some ATexts are, by default, set to an all blank word. The total number of separate standard text strings held by the software in this way is in excess of 300.

Identification Number Format

Because identification numbers are always negative, they are must be preceded by a minus sign.

For example, AText -249 (see "The Isometric Drawing Area" on page 133) represents the default word WEST, which is used in the main isometric drawing area.

See also Examples (on page 132)

Specify Alternative Texts (on page 162) Using Alternative Text (on page 130)

Using Alternative Text

AText allows you to substitute your own text terminology or language in place of the standard

ISOGEN words on the isometric. To make a word change, you do not have to replace all the standard AText--you can change as little as just one word if that is all is required.

Although the AText feature has a considerable degree of built-in flexibility, you must exercise a

certain amount of care when defining your own words, particularly in terms of word lengths. As a general rule, newly defined words or word strings should be about equal in length or shorter than the text that is being replaced. Obvious exceptions to this are the cases of the single line headings in the material list region. In this respect, you must take full responsibility for word definition. ISOGEN does not warn you in cases where words are too long and cannot be accommodated in the standard space provided on the isometric. Badly designed AText can lead to undesirable results, such as over-writing or incorrectly positioned text.

Special Characters

The following special characters further extend the functionality of ATexts:

The Dollar ($) Sign - The $ character, which is used in ISOGEN to force a new line in regular isometric message text, can also be used with ATexts. However, when using the $ character, it is recommended that you carefully check the output results of each occurrence.

Styles


The Question Mark (?) - The ? character has the following two different uses:

In ATexts -210, -211 and -212 (see "The Isometric Drawing Area" on page 133) to suppress the plotting of the single characters normally associated with these ATexts, without switching off their associated facility, as would normally happen when an AText is set to blank. For example, setting AText -210 ? suppresses the F that is normally plotted. It does not completely suppress the plotting of the flange material list part

number as would normally happen when an AText item is set to blank. Using the ? character is particularly advantageous on spool isometrics.

In some special ATexts at points where the software dynamically inserts information. By

default, AText -456 (see "The Isometric Drawing Area" on page 133) is set to DETAIL

?. As a result, the software inserts either a letter or a number, depending upon which system you have specified at the position of the ? character.

The "At" (@) Sign - You can use the @ character to pad out an AText string with trailing

blanks. As a result, the text that follows the AText has a series blanks between it and the AText.

Foreign Language Use

AText is particularly beneficial to foreign language users who want to produce isometrics

containing text in their native language. However, there are restrictions governing which characters are permissible. Those restrictions are outlined in The Usable Character Set.

The Usable Character Set

You can only use the following standard English and special purpose characters in AText

definitions:

Upper- or lower-case letters in the range A to Z.

Numeric characters in the range 0 to 9 inclusive.

A blank space character.

The following special purpose symbols: * + - . , : [ ] ( ) # ' < > = | & %

Other foreign language characters, such as those used in the Cyrillic, Greek, or Chinese alphabets are excluded, as are specially accentuated characters, such as à, á, â, and so on.

AText and the Drawing Frame Symbols

The AText feature goes further than just controlling text characters. The standard symbols appearing in the line summary area across the bottom of the standard ISOGEN drawing frame, viz. for shop weld, field weld, and so on through traced pipe, can all be suppressed when they

are not required by setting their associated ATexts to blank.

Composite Text Messages

Composite text messages are made up of more than one text item and the composition is done by ISOGEN automatically. Such messages can be composed in either of the following two ways:-

By combining two or more related ATexts

By combining AText and an associated design database attribute value

Styles


Generally, in those cases where AText operates together with design database attribute information to form a composite message, setting the AText part to blank to suppress the plotting of it causes suppression of the attribute text also. For example, if the composite message

BATCH REF: 12/100A/C in the title block area needs to be completely suppressed, then setting AText -252, which contains the words BATCH REF, to blank causes both this and the attribute part, 12/100A/C, not to be plotted.

See also Examples (on page 132) Grouping of ATexts Listings (see "Grouping of AText Listings" on page 133)

Examples

The following are some examples of standard ATexts:

The material list heading ERECTION MATERIALS.

The isometric connection messages CONN. TO and CONT. ON in the main drawing area.

The BATCH REF and PIPING SPEC headings in the title block area.

Each of these are default AText words that are programmed in by ISOGEN but which you can

re-program, if required, as explained in the following examples.

Example 1: ERECTION MATERIALS

You can find ERECTION MATERIALS as AText -310 (see "The Plotted Material and Cut Pipe List Heading Texts" on page 142). To change the default heading (ERECTION

MATERIALS) to CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, the entry - 310 CONSTRUCTION

MATERIALS must appear in the appropriate data input file.

Example 2: CONN.TO

CONN TO. is an example of a composite message that is used at locations where pipelines are

connected to equipment nozzles. You can find it as AText -208 (see "The Isometric Drawing Area" on page 133).

To change the message CONN. TO to JOIN TO, the entry -208 JOIN TO must appear in the

appropriate data input file. Information regarding the joined to component, that is, the nozzle name as extracted from the design database, is automatically appended to the AText by ISOGEN to form a composite message, such as JOIN TO D45-NZ12.

Example 3: BATCH REF

BATCH REF is another composite message example--AText -252 (see "The Title

Block/Drawing Frame Areas" on page 150). The message is used to convey plant zone or area information in the title block area of the isometric where the contents of the BATCH (AREA) type record in the pipeline input data file is automatically appended by ISOGEN. An example of this kind of message is BATCH REF : AR-A/TF/N12.

To remove the batch reference entry from the isometric, set the AText entry in the input data file (IDF) to blank, thus: -252

Styles


Doing so removes the entire composite message from the isometric, both the AText BATCH

REF : part and the following design database attribute that holds the batch reference information.

Grouping of AText Listings

All the AText listings are logically grouped into the following isometric drawing regions:

The main Isometric Drawing Area (see "The Isometric Drawing Area" on page 133)

Plotted Material List and Cut List (see "The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List Heading Texts" on page 142)

Specification Change indication (on page 149)

Title Block/Drawing Frame (see "The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas" on page 150)

Line Summary Area (see "The Line Summary Area" on page 152)

Printed Material List (see "The Printed Material List" on page 154)

Weld Box Summary (see "The Weld Box Summary" on page 154)

Flat Spools and Flange Rotation text (see "Flat Spools and Flange Rotation" on page 156)

Compipe Material Control link (see "The COMPIPE Material Control Links" on page 157)

SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display (on page 157)

Reference Plane System (on page 161)

The Isometric Drawing Area

-201 E Denotes East at east coordinates.

-202 N Denotes North at north coordinates.

-203 W Denotes West at west coordinates.

-204 S Denotes South at south coordinates.

-205 EL + Denotes a positive Elevation at elevation coordinates.

-206 EL - Denotes a negative Elevation at elevation coordinates.

-207 ? NS Denotes the pipe nominal size. By setting the AText to blank, the

nominal size message is suppressed. Using a ? symbol determines the format used for outputting the nominal size message.

-208 CONN. TO Denotes CONNected TO - where a pipeline/branch end is connected to a nozzle.

-209 CONT. ON Denotes CONTinued ON at the point where a pipeline/branch end

is continued onto another pipeline. It is used in conjunction with END-CONNECTION type record. Is also used with AText -255

to create a CONT. ON DRG 2 type message when a pipeline is split into multiple drawings. (Isometric drawing area and Material List overflow).

Styles


-210 F Denotes flange--the letter used with the material list cross-

reference pointer for flanges.

-211 G Denotes gaskets--the letter used with the material list cross-

reference pointer for gaskets.

-212 B Denotes bolts--the letter used with the material list cross-

reference pointer for bolts.

-213 SPINDLE Used to indicate the direction of an operating spindle on a valve

when it is not pointing in a primary direction.

-214 MM Denotes millimeters. Used with arrowed dimensions on angle and

multi-way valves to indicate leg length.

-215 REDUCING

FLANGE

An identification message that points at a reducing flange.

-216 OFFSET This message is used where a dimensional offset occurs, such as

eccentric reducer, offset reducing flange, all forms of offset blocks.

You can use a ? symbol to determine format used for outputting

the offset messages. By setting this AText to blank, the offset message is suppressed.

-217 MITRE This message is used on mitered bends. (It is used in conjunction

with AText -231 BEND).

-218 LOBSTER This message is used on lobster back bends. (It is used in

conjunction with AText -231'BEND).

-219 REINFORCED An identification message that points to a reinforced tee or cross

when the symbol key is TERF or CRRF and no reinforcement pad component is called for.

-220 LEFT LOOSE A distinguishing message that points to a flange where the

LOOSE indicator is set.

-221 FFW Distinguishing message that points to a field fit weld.

-222 FALL Used in conjunction with the Fall symbol to denote a FALLing

line. You can use a ? symbol to determine the format used for outputting the falling line messages. By setting this AText to blank, the falling line message is now suppressed, but the fall indication symbol is still ,shown.

-223 (Normally blank) Produces a program generated degree symbol (°) which is output

at all angle indicators requiring a degree symbol (bends, Falls, and so on).

-224 : This symbol is used for falling lines specified with a ratio, such as

1:10.

-225 (Normally blank) Produces a system-generated % symbol used on falling pipelines

Styles


specified with a percentage indication

-226 GRAD Used where a falling line is specified in gradiens.

-227 PER M Used where a falling line is specified as an incline in Metric units,

such as millimeters per meter.

-228 PER FT Used where a falling line is specified as an incline in Imperial

units, such as inches per foot).

-229 SCREWED END The message points to a pipe end that has been set to screwed in

the pipeline input data file.

-230 VENT The message points to a vent position at any open ended pipe. It is

used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-VENT type record.

-231 BEND Used in conjunction with AText -217 and AText -218 to identify

miter and lobster back type bends.

-232 SPEC Identification message points to any place in the pipe where the

piping specification changes. The name of the new specification is automatically indicated.

-233 C Identifies a connector as part of a material list cross-reference,

such as C13 in a box.

-234 (Normally blank) Used to prefix liners and nut material part numbers that are output

on the isometric drawing. Clamps use AText -233 to prefix their part number.

-236 S Identifies a support as part of a material list cross-reference, such

as S22 in a box.

-237 " Is the inch sign indicator used in imperial dimensions coordinates

and nominal size outputs.

-238 ' Is the feet sign indicator used in imperial dimensions and

coordinates.

-239 DRAIN The message points to a drain position any open-ended pipe. It is used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-DRAIN type record

-240 (Normally blank) This AText is blank by default but can be used to produce a message at any open-ended pipe. It is used in conjunction with an

END-POSITION-OPEN type record.

-241 (Normally blank) This AText is blank by default but can be used to produce a message at any closed- ended pipe. It is used in conjunction with

an END-POSITION-CLOSED type record.

-242 (Normally blank) This AText is blank by default but can be used to produce a

message at any miscellaneous pipe end. It is used in conjunction with an END-POSITION-NULL type record.

Styles


-243 (Normally blank) This AText has no default text, but if you set it to a word, such as

FLAT, then that text acts as a trigger to output the flat direction of eccentric reducers that have their flat side pointing in a primary

direction. (Is used in conjunction with ATexts -244 to -249

inclusive).

The following six ATexts (-244, -245, -246, -247, -248, and -249) are used to output directions in conjunction with other ATexts on items that carry a direction setting on the component record in the pipeline input data file.

-244 UP Used in conjunction with ATexts -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282

to append a primary direction as part of a composite message.

-245 DOWN Used in conjunction with ATexts -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282


-246 NORTH Used in conjunction with ATexts -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282


-247 SOUTH Used in conjunction with ATexts -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282


-248 EAST Used in conjunction with ATexts -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282


-249 WEST Used in conjunction with ATexts -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282


-275 SWEPT TEE This message points to a tee whose symbol key starts with the

characters TS.

-276 CONT. FROM Denotes CONTinued FROM. This message is plotted when a

pipeline is split onto two or more drawings, such as CONT.

FROM DRG 1. (The text DRG comes from AText -255. For more information about this AText, see The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas) (see "The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas" on page 150).

-277 ORIFICE

FLANGE

This text points to orifice flanges.

-278 DIAL FACE This text points to instruments dials whose symbol key starts with

the characters ID and is followed by a relevant direction letter. See the following Notes for more information.

-279 L Denotes lap joint stub end the letter used with the material list

cross-reference pointer for LJSE's.

-280 TAPPING This text points to orifice plates and is followed by a relevant

direction letter. See the following Notes for more information.

Styles


-281 TAIL This text points to spectacle blinds and slip plates and is followed

a by relevant direction letter. See the following Notes for more information.

-282 WINDOW This text points to a site glass and is followed by a relevant direction letter. See the following Notes for more information.

-283 FLAT Used to identify non primary flat directions on eccentric reducers.

The contents of this AText is output in front of the contents of a DIRECTION record containing the flat skew direction

AText Numbers -243, -278, -280, -281 and -282 are only output if a primary direction is set

in the component record in the pipeline input data file.

The appropriate direction (as defined by ATexts -244 to -249) is appended to the specific fitting text to make a composite message--such as DIAL FACE WEST. Alternatively, the content of any DIRECTION (Compound Directions) record can be appended.

-284 TEE BEND This text is plotted at bends that have an off-line leg.

-285 RATING

FLANGE This text is a part of a facility that provides an extra message at a flange that has a different pressure rating to standard. This is

achieved by giving the mating gasket a symbol key of the required rating (such as. 300#) in the Intermediate Data File (IDF). The facility is only used on fixed length piping.

-286 (Normally blank) This AText is blank by default but if set it will output the text as

a message on screwed erection (construction) fittings.

-287 ORIENTATION

DIRECTION

Is used to identify the direction of skewed branches in cases

where skew box indication has been suppressed. A program generated direction will be appended to this text to form a complete message.

-288 PIPE Is used on system Isometrics to denote the position(s) of a

change in the pipeline reference.

-298 TEE ELBOW Is used to identify a tee elbow fitting.

-337 D BEND

RADIUS

Is used to output the text D bend radius on individual pulled

bends where the bend radius is expressed in terms of a number of pipe diameters. The bend radius value is extracted from a BEND-RADIUS type record in the pipeline input data file and used as a prefix to this AText.

Styles


-338 BEND RADIUS Is used to output the text bend radius on individual pulled bends

where the bend radius is expressed in terms of the dimensional units in use. The bend radius value is extracted from a BEND-

RADIUS type record in the pipeline input data file and used as a prefix to this AText.

-346 GEARBOX

ORIENTATION

Is used in conjunction with directional information taken from a

GEARBOX type record in the pipeline input data file and which is appended to this AText.

-349 PP Is used to indicate Personal Protection type insulation on

Insulation Indication symbols having the symbol key 'INPP'.

-350 REDUCING

ELBOW

Is used to indicate a reducing elbow on fittings having the

symbol key ER**.

-356 U Special ATEXT used only to identify special type pulled bends.

Is used both on the isometric area and on the material list.

-357 B Special ATEXT used only to identify special type erection

welds. Is used both on the isometric area and on the material list.

-358 W Special ATEXT used only to identify special type fabrication welds. Is used both on the isometric area and on the material list.

-362 END$ONE Used in special circumstances when it is necessary to identify a specific end on a spool isometric. (It also appears in the cut pipe

list section for use as a column heading on the cut pipe list).

-388 TANGENTIAL

CONNECTION Used to identify tangential / offset connections. In cases where the tapping point method is used the existing TAPPING

CONNECTION (AText No. -451) message will not be output.

-389 OFFSET

CONNECTION

Used to identify tangential / offset connections. In cases where

the tapping point method is used the existing TAPPING CONNECTION (AText No. -451) message will not be output.

-390 FROM ?

ORIGIN

Used to identify tangential / offset connections. In cases where


-391 (Normally Blank) Used to identify tangential / offset connections. In cases where


-392 MULTIPLE Used where multiple components attributes are present for a

particular material entry.

-394 TOT Used to distinguish an accumulated pipe sub-total from an individual pipe entry.

-395 ? Default is ?. Used to output a modified heat tracing component

part number.

Styles


-396 ? INC ANGLE Default is blank. If OS 67 set to 1 and this AText set ? character

is substituted by angle value and combined with INC ANGLE text to indicate that angles displayed for elbows and bends on

isometric are included (not deflected) angles.

-399 N or U Used to label the viewpoint direction arrow. N denotes north and U denotes up. The default label for combined, fabrication,

erection and normal spool isometrics is N, while U is the default label for flat spool isometrics. If set to Blank, the viewpoint direction arrow is suppressed.

-425 SEAL WELD Used to indicate the weld type for seal welds on the isometric

drawing.

-433 (Normally blank) Distinguishing message that points to a user-positioned set on

connections.

434 STUB IN Distinguishing message that points to a user-positioned set in

connections.

-243 (Normally blank) This AText has no default text but if it is set to a word (such as

FLAT) by the user then that text acts as a trigger to output the flat direction of eccentric reducers that have their flat side pointing in a primary direction. (Is used in conjunction with ATexts -244 to -249 inclusive).

-437 (Normally blank) Used to allow metric dimensions to have their dimensional units

output on the isometric drawing.

-439 (EOP) Used to show edge of pipe dimensions.

-451 TAPPING

CONNECTION

Is output along with coordinate values at the tapping point on a

user-defined fitting. Requires Option Switch 122 to be set to 1 for tapping coordinates output on the isometric drawing.

-452 UNACCEPTABL

E SPLIT

Indicates that an unacceptable drawing split point has been found

in tube. When used, the message is output in the top left-hand corner of each affected drawing.

-454 CONNECTION

ORIENTATION

Used at un-developed set-on tees and olets (which have no

branch leg and are indicated in dotted form on the pipeline) where the intended branch connection is in a skewed direction. A system-generated direction word is appended to this text to form a composite message.

Styles


-455 (Normally blank) Used at flange positions in vertical pipe legs to optionally

indicate the elevation coordinate of the flange connection face. The special characters ? and $ can be combined with this AText

to allow you to control the final form of the output text. ? is used to cause the insertion of elevation value, and $ forces a new line of text. For example, a setting of ?$FLANGE FACE produces EL +22613 FLANGE FACE. Note that here the EL characters are obtained by the software also using AText -205 automatically.

-456 SEE DETAIL ? Used to provide a cross-reference message for detail sketches.

This AText appears on the drawing part of the isometric. The sketch identifying number or letter is edited in by the software at the ? position.

-457 MITRE ? Used to identify miter welds. The software edits in the miter angle into the text string at the ? position which can be

positioned anywhere in the string.

-458 (Normally Blank) Used to indicate the nominal size for metric bore units. For example, if set to mm the output is 32mm NS; if set to Blank,

then 32NS is output.

-459 ?THK Used to show thickness of a penetration plate on the drawing.

-469 REFERENCE

POINT Used to identify a reference dimension Item coordinates.

-470 SUPPORT

LOCATION

Used to identify pipe support coordinates.

-477 CUT OUT ? Used on the drawing to show the location of where material

should be removed.

The following nine ATexts are all used for the identification of external Reference Items when using the Reference Dimension facility. Any associated text elements will be automatically pre-fixed or appended, as appropriate, to the specified AText element.

In all these ATexts, the $ character causes a new line to be plotted, and a ? character is

where the software edits in the element name (from any -37, 70, 71 or 72 type record) to derive the full text string.

-460 BEAM$? Identifies horizontal steel-work element (SKEY HST*).

-461 COLUMN$? Identifies vertical steel-work element (SKEY VST*).

-462 ?$BUILDING CL Identifies center-line of building (SKEY BLD*).

Styles


-463 CL

EQUIPMENT$?

Identifies center-line of equipment (SKEY EQU*).

-464 CL PIPELINE$? Identifies center-line of pipeline (SKEY PIP*).

-465 ?$FLOOR LEVEL Identifies specified floor level (SKEY FLR*).

-466 ?$WALL Identifies specified wall position (SKEY WAL*).

-467 GRID LINE$? Identifies project grid line (SKEY GRD*).

-468 ? Used for miscellaneous user-defined elements (SKEY XXX*).

The default ? character causes any identification name associated with the miscellaneous reference to be used when no other AText setting is made.

-471 LOCATION-

POINT?

Is used to indicate a location point position on the plotted

isometric. If more than one is included on any single isometric, a simple ID number is generated and output in the position

indicated by the ?.

-475 (Normally blank) Used in SmartPlant Spoolgen - Probing module. If set, it is used

to indicate the position of any location points that are included in an incoming pipeline data file.

-476 (Normally blank) Used in SmartPlant Spoolgen to trigger the indication of drawing

identifiers.

-498 (Normally blank) If user-defined, the text points to a site weld.

-499 SHOP TEST

WELD Points to either a site weld or a field fit weld that requires a shop test weld to be performed at the same location. (That is welds with the key WSST or WFST).

-501 (Normally blank) Used to point to an offshore weld if user-defined.

-502 SUPPORT Used to indicate the orientation of a pipe support. Content of

associated DIRECTION record (containing compound directions for skewed support) is appended to AText.

-512 TACK WELD Distinguishing message that points to a user-positioned tack

weld.

-533 FI Used to identify field Items on an erection type isometric

whenever a new style operations box is requested ( Option Switch 53 Position 2 set to 2).

-534 RL Used to identify a random length on an erection type isometric

whenever a new style operations box is requested ( Option Switch. 53 Position 2 set to 2).

-535 SU Used to identify a pipe support on an erection type isometric whenever a new style operations box is requested ( Option Switch. 53 Position 2 set to 2).

Styles


-536 VL Used to identify a valve on an erection type isometric whenever

a new style operations box is requested ( Option Switch 53 Position 2 set to 2).

-539 . Used as a delimiter between the material list cross-reference identifier and the suffix that is added as a unique component identifier in the new style of Identifier ( 3.1, 3.2, 3.3 as opposed

to 3).

-541 _N Used as delimiter/identifier in general note names.

-542 _S Used as delimiter/identifier in general note names.

-543 (Normally blank) Used in SmartPlant Spoolgen probing module. If set, is used to

indicate the position of any special note names that are included in an incoming pipeline data file.

-544 (Normally blank) Used in SmartPlant Spoolgen probing module. If set, is used to

indicate the position of any additional materials that are included in an incoming pipeline data file.

-545 / Used as a separator between part numbers when outputting dual numbers for associated additional material identification on the plotted isometric.

-546 I (Default) Used as the first character of the drawing output file extension (used in conjunction with Option Switch 71 Pos. 7).

-547 _ (Default) Underline character.

-548 HOR ? Used to distinguish horizontal skew angles from vertical skew

angles on isometric drawings.

-549 ? VER Used to distinguish vertical skew angles from horizontal skew

angles on isometric drawings.

-550 (Normally Blank) Used to output a nominal size message on reducing tees, such as

TEE RED.

-551 (Normally Blank) Used to output a nominal size message on equal tees, such as

TEE EQU.

-552 (Normally Blank) Used to output a nominal size message on concentric reducers,

such as CONC RED.

-553 (Normally Blank) Used to output a nominal size message on eccentric reducers,

such as ECC RED.

-885 - FFISYS AText for FF isometric continuation message delimiter.

Styles


The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List Heading Texts

-274 (Normally blank) If set, is used as a separator between the pipeline

reference and the spool identifier in the spool isometric drawing identifier.

-300 FABRICATION MATERIALS Is the category heading under which components

required for SHOP Fabrication are listed.

-301 PT Is the part number heading used in conjunction

with AText -302 to form a composite message.

-302 NO Used in conjunction with AText -301 to form a

composite message.

-303 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION Is the heading in the material listing under which

components are described according to their catalog component description.

-304 N.S. Is the heading under which the nominal size of

each item is listed. Is used in conjunction with AText -330 or AText -331 to form a composite message.

-305 ITEM CODE Is the heading under which component

identification codes are listed.

-306 QTY Is the heading under which the required quantities

are listed.

-307 PIPE Is the group sub-heading under which pipe is

listed.

-308 FITTINGS Is the group sub-heading under which pipe fittings

are listed, such as elbows tees, and so.

-309 FLANGES Is the group sub-heading under which all flanges

are listed.

-310 ERECTION MATERIALS Is the category heading under which components

required for SITE Erection--or Construction--are listed.

-311 GASKETS Is the group sub-heading under which all gaskets

are listed

-312 BOLTS Is the group sub-heading under which all bolts are

listed.

-313 VALVES / IN-LINE ITEMS Is the group sub-heading under which all valves

and in-line Items are listed.

-314 INSTRUMENTS Is the group sub-heading under which all instruments are listed.

Styles


-315 SUPPORTS Is the group sub-heading under which all supports

are listed.

-316 PIPE SPOOLS Is the sub-heading under which all spool numbers

are listed.

-319 CUT PIPE LENGTH Is the heading under which all the cut pipe lengths

are listed.

-320 PIECE Is the sub-heading to AText -319 under which the

cut pipe piece numbers are listed. This AText is used in conjunction with AText -321 to form a composite heading.

-321 NO Used in conjunction with AText -320 to form a

composite heading.

-322 CUT Is the sub-heading to AText -319 under which the

actual cut pipe lengths are listed. This AText is used in conjunction with AText -323 to form a

composite heading.

-323 LENGTH Used in conjunction with AText -322 to form a composite heading.

-324 REMARKS Is the sub-heading to AText -319 under which one of the ATexts -326, -327, -328, or -500, if

applicable, is listed.

-325 (Normally blank) Used for spool number separator on the material list.

-326 PLD BEND Used for a pulled bend remark, which is listed under AText -324 if a cut pipe length contains a

pulled bend.

-327 LOOSE FLG Is a remark which will be listed under AText -324 if a cut pipe length has a loose flange requirement.

-328 FF WELD Is the field fit weld remark which is listed under AText -324 if a cut pipe length contains a field fit

weld.

-329 M Used to denote lengths of pipe are in meters. Also used to indicate unit type Meters in center-line

length summary.

-330 INS Used to denote nominal sizes are in inches. It is

used in conjunction with AText -304 and AText -317.

Styles


-331 MM Denotes the nominal sizes are in millimeters. Also

used to indicate unit type Millimeters in center-line length summary. It is used in conjunction

with AText -304 and AText -317.

-334 S Is used only on fixed length piping. The contents of this AText is appended to the item code to form

a composite code when one or more ends of the fixed length spool has a special flange.

-335 WITH SPECIAL RATING

FLANGE(S) (SEE ISO)

Is used only on fixed length piping. The contents

of the AText are appended to the item description to form a composite message. Is used whenever AText -334 is used.

-339 MISCELLANEOUS

COMPONENTS

Is the group sub-heading under which all non-

categorized components are listed.

-340 INDUCTION BEND ID - Used to identify pipe required in the fabrication of

induction bends. The induction bend tag is appended to the AText to form a complete text string.

-341 EQUIPMENT TRIM

MATERIALS

Is the sub-heading under which all equipment trim

materials are listed.

-342 NOZZLE REF - Is the sub-heading under which all materials

associated with an individual nozzle are listed. The content of the related NOZZLE-REFERENCE is appended to the AText to form a complete text string. Used on equipment trim

drawings only.

-343 CONTINUED Used with AText -342 to identify situations where the listing of components for a nozzle is being

continued from a previous drawing. Used on equipment trim drawings only.

-344 END CONNECTORS Is the group sub-heading under which all

materials for end connectors for hygienic type piping are listed (liners, nuts, clamps, and so on.).

-345 AND Used with AText -342 to form a sub-heading

under which all components associated with interconnected nozzles are output on the material list for an equipment trim drawing. The resultant heading is of the form NOZZLE REF - N22 AND N23.

Styles


-347 (Normally blank) This has no default AText but is available as an

alternative to the AText used when generating a material list overflow message at the bottom of

the master drawing material list (an AText -209 and AText -255 combination). Any AText set by the user has a program generated cross-reference drawing number appended to it to form a composite message.

-348 (Normally blank) This has no default AText but is available as an

alternative to the AText used when generating a material list overflow message at the top of overflow material list drawings ( AText -276 and AText -255 combination). Any AText set by the

user has a program generated cross reference drawing number appended.

-351 FABRICATED (PULLED) BEND Used to identify fabricated bends when listed as

separate items on the material list.

-352 WEIGHT Column heading for weight.

-353 KGS Units indicator for kilogram weights. Used as part of Weight column heading and in pipeline weight

summary area at bottom of material list.

-354 LBS Units indicator for pound weights. Used as part of Weight column heading and in pipeline weight

summary area at bottom of material list

-355 TOTAL WEIGHT-THIS DRG Identification text for total pipeline weight in

Weight column and also in weight summary area at bottom of material list.

-356 U Special ATEXT used only to identify special type

pulled bends. Is used both on the material list and on the isometric area as a prefix to the part number.

-357 B Special ATEXT used only to identify special type

erection welds. Is used both on the material list and on the isometric area as a prefix to the part number.

-358 W Special ATEXT only to identify special type

fabrication welds. Is used both on the material list and on the isometric area as a prefix to the part number.

-359 (Normally blank) Used for bolt units sub-heading. ISOGEN outputs

in DIA x LENGTH sequence.

Styles


-362 END$ONE Column heading on cut pipe list. (Also appears in

the isometric drawing area section when it is necessary to identify a specific end of a cut piece).

-363 END$TWO Column heading on cut pipe list.

-364 ITEM$CODE Last column heading on cut pipe list when item

code heading is required. (See also AText -365).

-365 (Normally blank) Alternative last column heading on cut pipe list.

(See also AText -364). If part number is required on the cut list instead of item code, then AText -364 should be set to blank, and AText -365 set to the required alternative heading, such as part no.

-366 SQ.CUT Used for square cut in End Condition columns on cut pipe list.

-367 BEVEL Used for bevel in End Condition columns on cut pipe list.

-368 SCREWED Used for screwed in End Condition columns on cut pipe list.

-369 SHAPED Used for shaped in End Condition columns on cut

pipe list.

-370 MITRED Used for mitered in End Condition columns on cut

pipe list.

-371 OFFSHORE MATERIALS Is the category heading under which components

required for OFFSHORE erection are listed.

-372 REMARKS Remarks region heading at bottom of material list

where remarks text is collectively listed.

-373 REM Remarks column heading in material list. Remark

reference numbers are listed in this column.

-374 ANGLE Used on special type pulled bends where angle

information is appended to the item Description field on the material list.

-375 WELDS Is the group sub-heading under which all welds

are listed.

-376 FAB Used to identify Fabrication material when

category is used as a data item on a Style 2 or 3 material list.

-377 EREC Used to identify Erection material when category

is used as a data item on a Style 2 or 3 material list.

Styles


-378 OFF Used to identify Offshore material when category

is used as a data item on a Style 2 or 3 material list.

-379 TOTAL FABRICATION

WEIGHT Identification text for total fabrication weight in Weight column and also in weight summary area at bottom of material list.

-380 TOTAL ERECTION WEIGHT Identification text for total erection weight in Weight column and also in weight summary area

at bottom of material list.

-381 TOTAL OFFSHORE WEIGHT Identification text for total offshore weight in Weight column and also in weight summary area

at bottom of material list.

-382 TOTAL WEIGHT UNLISTED

ITEMS

Identification text for the total weight of unlisted

items in the Weight column and also in the weight summary area at the bottom of the material list.

-383 * Missing weight indicator. The * is a special

marker that is used on both weight and C Of G outputs to indicate that component(s) with zero weight were encountered.

-384 TANGENT+ Used in the REMARKS column of the cut list to

indicate where extra material has been added to a cut piece length in order to provide a minimum tangent length for either a start or finish bend leg.

-385 CUT/WELD Used in the cut piece remarks section against cut

pieces that have additional material added between adjacent bends.

-426 GROOVED Used to indicate grooved end preparation for

Victaulic pipe connections on the cut pipe list/report.

-427 FLARED Used to indicate a flared end preparation on the

cut pipe list/report.

-428 SCREWED Used to indicate a female screwed end preparation

on the cut pipe list/report.

-431 SOCKET Used to indicate a female socket

weld/compression/glued/push fit end preparation on the cut pipe list/report.

-472 No.? Used to output a location point ID number on the

drawing frame. Is only output when multiple location points are included on a single isometric.

-473 OF Used as part of a location point position on the

drawing frame.

Styles


-474 ABOVE Used as part of a location point position on the

drawing frame.

-500 SHOP TEST Used on the cut list to identify cut pieces that need

to have an additional shop test allowance. (That is welds with the SKEY WSST or WFST).

-503 SPOOL ID Used as either a header or column identifier on the

following printed output whenever spool identifiers are listed.

i) Printed material list (Style 1 or 2).

ii) Printed material control file.

iii) Printed weld summary.

-514 REINFPAD Used as the item code for a reinforcement pad whenever automatic item code generation is

requested.

-515 REINFORCEMENT PAD FOR @ Used as the first part of a description for a

reinforcement pad whenever automatic description generation is requested. The second part of the pad description is the description of the main pipeline tube to which the pad is welded.

-537 (Normally blank) If set, is used as an alternative units indication on

any length output on any style of material list. (Overrules any length units setting in Option Switch. 24 ).

-538 (Normally blank) If set, is used to offer an alternative form of bolt

diameter/length output on any style of material list.

-540 (Normally blank) If set, is used as an optional column heading for

bolt diameter where the bolt units are different to the normal pipeline units.

-554 (Normally blank) If set, outputs text to supplement scalar quantities

output to the material list on the drawing and material control file.

-555 SPOOL - If set, identifies materials belonging to spools on

the material list.

Styles


Specification Change Indication

The following ATexts are used for the indication of specification changes on the isometric drawing.

-289 MATL Used to indicate a piping material specification change. The

content of the PIPING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

-290 INSUL Used to indicate an insulation specification change. The

content of the INSULATION-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

-291 TRACE Used to indicate a tracing specification change. The content of

the TRACING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

-292 PAINT Used to indicate a PAINTING specification change. The

content of the PAINTING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

-293 (Normally blank) Reserved for user-defined AText. The contents of a MISC-SPEC1 type record in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

-294 (Normally blank) Reserved for user-defined AText. The contents of a MISC-SPEC2 type record in the pipeline input data file is appended

to the AText to form a composite message.

-295 (Normally blank) Reserved for user-defined AText. The contents of a MISC-

SPEC3 type record in the pipeline input data file is appended to the AText to form a composite message.





Styles


The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas

-250 DATE The date is taken from the DATE type record in the

pipeline input data file and automatically appended in the required format (UK, EUR or USA) to the AText.

If the date format is set to UK (see Option Switch 6 for details) this AText also uses ATexts -258, -259, -260, -261, -262, -263, -264, -265, -266, -267, -268 and - 269 to form the month part of the date output text.

-251 PROJECT NO. This is used in the title block if the project number has

been set in a PROJECT-IDENTIFIER type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

-252 BATCH REF This is used in the title block area if a batch reference has been set in a BATCH type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the

AText to form a composite message.

-253 PIPING SPEC Used in the title block if a piping specification has been

set in a PIPING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

-254 ISS Used in the title block if an issue (also known as

Revision) identifier has been set in a REVISION type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

-255 DRG Used in conjunction with AText -256 to generate a

drawing identifier of the form - DRG n OF n - in cases where a pipeline is split into multiple isometrics.

This AText is used in conjunction with AText -209 and AText -276 to form a composite message.

-256 OF Used in conjunction with AText -255.

Styles


-257 SPL Used on spool isometric drawings for the identification

of individual spool pieces. A program generated spool number is appended to the AText to form a composite

message. This AText is not used if either a spool prefix (SPOOL-PREFIX type record) or spool identifiers (SPOOL-IDENTIFIER type records) are included in the pipeline input data file.

-258 JAN Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-259 FEB Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-260 MAR Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-261 APR Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-262 MAY Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-263 JUN Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-264 JUL Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-265 AUG Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-266 SEP Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-267 OCT Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-268 NOV Used in conjunction with AText -250.

-269 DEC Used in conjunction with AText -250 .

-270 THERMAL

INSULATION SPEC

Used in the title block if an insulation specification

identifier has been set in a INSULATION-SPEC record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

-271 TRACING SPEC Used in the title block if a tracing specification identifier

has been set in a TRACING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

-272 PAINTING SPEC Used in the title block if a painting specification

identifier has been set in a PAINTING-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

-436 JACKET SPEC Used in the title block if a jacket specification identifier

has been set in a JACKET-SPEC type record in the pipeline input data file. The content of this record is appended to the AText to form a composite message.

Styles


The Line Summary Area

The ATexts that are used in the line summary area along the bottom of the isometric drawing can either have their ATexts changed or made blank. If the AText is changed, then its associated

symbol is drawn. If it is set to blank, then the symbol is not drawn.

In these ATexts, the inclusion of a $ character creates a forced line feed causing the text to be plotted over two lines.

-400 TRACED$PIPE

-401 LAGGED$PIPE

-402 PIPE$SUPPORT

-403 COMPN$JOINT

-404 SCREWED$JOINT

-405 SOCKET$WELD

-406 FIELD$WELD

-407 SHOP$WELD

-408

& -

409

These two ATexts have no default text but can be used

for any user-specified general information on the drawing frame. A typical example is PULLED BEND RADIUS IS 3X NOMINAL PIPE BORE.

-410 [1] DENOTES PIPE

SPOOL NO$

1 DENOTES PARTS

LIST NO

This is a general note to signify how spool numbers and

material list part numbers are shown on the isometric.

If only the bottom line is required, the records in the pipeline input data file should be as shown below:-

-410 $ 1 DENOTES PARTS

LIST NO

-411 SITE$CONNECTION

The following ATexts appear in the line summary area along the bottom of both the plotted and printed Material Lists.

-317 PIPE NS Is used in conjunction with AText -318 to which the total center line

length per bore is automatically computed and listed. Also uses AText -

330 or AText -331 to indicate units.

Styles


-318 CL

LENGTH

Is used in conjunction with AText -317 . Also uses AText -329 or AText

-331 or AText -360 or AText -361 depending on units being used

-360 FT Used to indicate unit type feet in pipe center-line length region.

-361 FT-INS Used to indicate unit type feet-inches in pipe center-line length region.

-386 Blank is the default. used to control output of insulation length.

-387 Blank is the default. used to control output of heat trace length.

The Printed Material List

The following ATexts are used on the printed material list, in addition to those ATexts listed for

the plotted material and cut pipe lists.

-332 PAGE This has a page number automatically appended.

-333 PIPELINE REF This has the pipeline reference automatically appended.

-336 SYSTEM REF This is used as an alternative to AText -333 when producing

material list or system isometrics. The contents of a SYSTEM-ISOMETRIC-REFERENCE record in the pipeline input data file is automatically appended to the AText.

The Weld Box Summary

Standard Weld Summary Box

Weld Box header details (line 1):

-412 WE

LD SH

OP WEL

D WELD

ER VISU

AL N

D

T

HA

RD S.

R FAB.

QA

Continuation of Weld Box header details. (line 2):

-413 NO /FL

D

PRO

C

ID ACCE

PT

N

O

NO ACCE

PT

The first column of this Weld Summary box is used for the software-generated weld number and optional prefix. The second column is for Weld category and contains the Shop /

Field / Offshore indicators. This must be taken into account when making any changes to either of these two ATexts.

-414 S Weld category identification - Shop.

-415 F Weld category identification - Field.

-416 O Weld category identification - Offshore.

One of the above characters is plotted in the Weld Category column (column 2), depending upon the type of weld.

Styles


User-Defined Weld Summary Box

-417 BW Used for weld type identifier butt weld.

-418 SW Used for weld type identifier socket weld.

-419 MW Used for weld type identifier miter weld.

-420 LUG Used for weld type identifier LUGG.

-421 SOF Used for weld type identifier slip-on flange.

-422 SOB Used for weld type identifier set-on branch.

-423 LET Used for weld type identifier LET, such as olet, latrolet, half coupling..

-424 SLW Used to indicate the weld type for seal welds in welding lists and reports.

-438 SEAM Weld type identifier for a seam weld.

-504 (Normally

blank)

Can be user-defined and used to identify field fit welds only when the

weld category attribute is output.

-507 RPD Used for weld type identifier for a basic reinforcing pad weld, when

one extra weld number is requested.

-508 LF Used for weld type identifier for a reinforcing pad to main pipeline

weld, when two extra weld numbers are requested. (Used together with AText -509).

-509 L4 Used for weld type identifier for a reinforcing pad to branch weld,

when two extra weld numbers are requested. (Used together with

AText -508).

-510 (Normally

blank)

If set, it is used as the delimiter between the two material list Identifiers

in the Location column of the operations box.

-511 PAD Used as a part identifier in the Location column of the operations box

in cases where a reinforcement pad has not been included on the material list.

-513 TW Weld type identifier for a tack weld.

-516 TRN Weld type identifier for a trunnion weld (The weld that connects the

trunnion to the main pipeline).

-517 5 Used for weld action identification for a manual weld on the operations

list.

-518 1 Used for weld action identification for an automatic weld on the

operations list.

-519 EB Used for pulled bend identification on the operations list.

-520 RL Used for random length identification on the operations list.

-521 FW. Used for weld type identifier for a fillet weld. (The basic weld used for connecting pipe supports to the pipeline).

Styles


-522 (Normally

blank)

If set, it is used as an alternative to AText -422 to identify the branch

connection weld(s) for a reinforced tee or cross.

-523 (Normally

blank)


connection weld(s) for an angled (not 90°) reinforced tee or cross.

-524 (Normally

blank)


connection weld(s) for an angled (not 90°) set-on tee or cross.

-525 (Normally

blank)

If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for any olet type component

with an SKEY of HCSC or HCSW.

-526 (Normally

blank)

If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for a reinforcement pad to

main pipeline weld on an angled branch when two extra weld numbers are requested. (Used together with AText -527).

-527 (Normally

blank)

If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for a reinforcement pad to

branch weld on an angled branch - when two extra weld numbers are requested. (Used together with AText -526).

-528 (Normally

blank)

If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for a trunnion to elbow /

bend connection.

-529 (Normally

blank)

If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for a 90° non-reinforced

trunnion to main pipeline weld.

-530 (Normally

blank)

If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for an angled non-reinforced


-531 (Normally

blank)

If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for a 90° reinforced trunnion

to main pipeline weld.

-532 (Normally

blank)

If set, it is used for the weld type identifier for an angled reinforced


Flat Spools and Flange Rotation

The following six ATexts are used in DIRECTION records in the pipeline input data file when indicating compound directions for certain components in skewed Pipelines. Also used when ISOGEN is generating ORIENTATION and CONNECTION DIRECTION messages on flat spools.

-481 E Denotes East.

-482 N Denotes North.

-483 W Denotes West.

-484 S Denotes South.

-485 U Denotes Up.

-486 D Denotes Down.

-487 *** REFERENCE FLAT *** Used to identify which eccentric reducer flat direction is used as a reference for a given flange rotation.

Styles


-488 *** REFERENCE SPINDLE

***

Used to identify which spindle is used as a

reference for a given flange rotation.

-489 *** REFERENCE SUPPORT

***

Used to identify which support is used as a


-490 *** REFERENCE BRANCH

***

Used to identify which branch is used as a


-491 *** REFERENCE WINDOW

***

Used to identify which window is used as a


-492 FLAT DIRECTION Used to point to 2D and 3D skew enclosure

triangles at eccentric reducers to indicate a flat direction on flat spools.

-493 SPINDLE DIRECTION Used to point to 2D and 3D skew enclosure

triangles located at spindles on flat spools.

-494 SUPPORT DIRECTION Used to point to 2D and 3D skew enclosure

triangles located at supports on flat spools.

-495 BRANCH DIRECTION Used to point to 2D and 3D skew enclosure triangles located at undeveloped set-on branches

or single olets on flat spools.

-496 WINDOW DIRECTION Used to point to 2D and 3D skew enclosure

triangles located at sight glasses on flat spools.

-497 FLANGE ROTATION ? Used to identify flange rotations on flat spools. (The calculated angle is edited in by the program

at the position of the ? character).

The COMPIPE Material Control Links

-299 / Single character delimiter used between the three data items that are required to be in each ITEM-CODE record when using the COMPIPE link facility.

-453 MM- Used to separate nominal size and pipeline reference when ISOGEN generates a drawing number for use in the

COMPIPE.MTO file.

Styles


SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display

The following -800 series ATexts are used in SPOOLGEN probing and the FFISYS.

-800 series ATexts are applicable only for SPOOLGEN 4 and earlier versions of the software. They are not used for SmartPlant Spoolgen.

-800 BEND Identification of BEND when probing.

-801 ELBOW Identification of ELBOW when probing.

-802 OLET Identification of OLET when probing.

-803 TEE Identification of TEE when probing.

-804 CROSS Identification of CROSS when probing.

-805 REDUCER Identification of REDUCER when probing.

-806 TEE REDUCER Identification of TEE REDUCER when probing.

-807 REDUCING FLANGE Identification of REDUCING FLANGE when

probing.

-808 TEE BEND/ELBOW Identification of TEE BEND/ELBOW when

probing.

-809 ANGLE VALVE Identification of ANGLE VALVE when probing.

-810 3 WAY VALVE Identification of 3 WAY VALVE when probing.

-811 4 WAY VALVE Identification of 4 WAY VALVE when probing.

-812 INSTRUMENT Identification of INSTRUMENT when probing.

-813 MISC COMPONENT Identification of MISC COMPONENT when

probing.

-814 PIPE (TUBE) Identification of PIPE (TUBE) when probing.

-815 FIXED PIPE Identification of FIXED PIPE when probing.

-816 PIPE BLOCK Identification of PIPE BLOCK when probing.

-817 FLANGE Identification of FLANGE when probing.

-818 LJSE FLANGE Identification of LJSE FLANGE when probing.

-819 BLIND FLANGE Identification of BLIND FLANGE when probing.

-820 CONNECTOR Identification of CONNECTOR when probing.

-821 BACKING NUT Identification of BACKING NUT when probing.

-822 CLAMP Identification of CLAMP when probing.

-823 MISC HYGENIC

COMPONENT

Identification of MISC HYGENIC COMPONENT

when probing.

-824 CAP Identification of CAP when probing.

-825 COUPLING Identification of COUPLING when probing.

Styles


-826 UNION Identification of UNION when probing.

-827 VALVE Identification of VALVE when probing.

-828 TRAP Identification of TRAP when probing.

-829 VENT Identification of VENT when probing.

-830 FILTER Identification of FILTER when probing.

-831 SUPPORT Identification of SUPPORT when probing.

-832 INSTRUMENT TEE Identification of INSTRUMENT TEE when

probing.

-833 WELD Identification of WELD when Probing.

-834 NONE Indication that NO component was located successfully when probing.

-835 (Not Used) Unused AText

-836 (Not Used) Unused AText.




-840 Changed to Bend `Probing Action' message - Elbow changed to bend.

-841 Flange set to Loose `Probing Action' message - Flange set to loose.

-842 Detail Sketch ? `Probing Action' message - Detail Sketch added.

-843 Support changed to

Fabrication

`Probing Action' message - Support changed to

Fabrication.

-844 Support changed to Erection `Probing Action' message - Support changed to

Erection.

-845 Support changed to Offshore `Probing Action' message - Support changed to

Offshore.

-846 Tack Weld `Probing Action' message - Tack Weld added.

-847 Support(s) added `Probing Action' message - Support Welds added.

-848 Automatic Weld `Probing Action' message - Automatic Weld added.

-849 Shop Test `Probing Action' message - Shop Test Weld added.

-850 REDUCING-

CONCENTRIC

Flange type REDUCING-CONCENTRIC selected

when probing.

-851 REDUCING ECCENTRIC Flange type REDUCING-ECCENTRIC selected

when probing.

-852 STUB/BACKING PAIR Flange type STUB/BACKING PAIR selected when

probing.

Styles


-853 SCREWED Flange type SCREWED selected when probing.

-854 SLIP-ON J TYPE Flange type SLIP-ON J TYPE selected when

probing.

-855 SLIP-ON Flange type SLIP-ON selected when probing.

-856 SOCKET-WELD Flange type SOCKET-WELD selected when probing.

-857 WELD-NECK Flange type WELD-NECK selected when probing.

-858 SLIP-ON ORIFICE Flange type SLIP-ON ORIFICE selected when

probing.

-859 WELD-NECK ORIFICE Flange type WELD-NECK ORIFICE selected when

probing.

-860 LAP-JOINT RING Flange type LAP-JOINT RING selected when

probing.

-861 LAP-JOINT STUB END Flange type LAP-JOINT STUB END selected when

probing.

-862 UNKNOWN Flange type UNKNOWN selected when probing.

-863 Material added `Probing Action' message - Indication of additional

materials added to pipeline.

-864 General Information Note - ? `Probing Action' message - General information

note added.

-865 Specific Information Note - ? `Probing Action' message - Specific information

note added.

-866 Weld deleted `Probing Action' message - Weld deleted.

-867 Support Weld(s) deleted `Probing Action' message - Support welds deleted.

-868 Spool Name deleted `Probing Action' message - Spool same deleted.

-869 Flow Arrow deleted `Probing Action' message - Flow arrow deleted.

-870 Message deleted `Probing Action' message - Message deleted.

-871 Detail Sketch deleted `Probing Action' message - Detail Sketch deleted.

-872 Information Note deleted `Probing Action' message - Information Note deleted.

-873 Additional Material deleted `Probing Action' message - Additional material deleted.

-874 Loose Flange un-set `Probing Action' message - Loose flange un-set.

-875 Location point added `Probing Action' message - Location point added.

-876 Location point deleted `Probing Action' message - Location point deleted.

-877 FLOOR/WALL

PENETRATION

`Probing Action' message - Identification of

FLOOR/WALL PENETRATION when probing.

Styles


-878 FLOW ARROW `Probing Action' message - Identification of FLOW

ARROW when probing.

-879 INSULATION SYMBOL `Probing Action' message - Identification of

INSULATION SYMBOL when probing.

-880 MESSAGE `Probing Action' message - Identification of

MESSAGE when probing.

-881 Drawing Identifier deleted `Probing Action' message - Identification of

Drawing Identifier deleted.

-882 Default Start `Probing Action' message - Identification of Default

Start positioned.

-883 Pipeline Start In Probing - Indication of default pipeline start

point.

-884 Default Bypass Closure In Probing - Indication of default bypass closure

point.

-886 Bypass Closure `Probing Action' message - Redefined bypass

closure point.

-887 Pipe Support added `Probing Action' message - Pipe support added.

-888 Pipe Support deleted `Probing Action' message - Pipe support deleted.

-889 Properties Changed `Probing Action' message - Category change for

gaskets and bolts.

-890 Coupling Added `Probing Action' message - Label showing where a

coupling has been added.

-891 Coupling Deleted `Probing Action' message - Label showing where an

existing coupling has been removed.

-892 Pipe Support Changed `Probing Action' message - Label showing where an

existing pipe support has been changed.

Reference Plane System

The following ATexts are used to output the relative directions associated with reference planes.

^ is substituted with the reference plane name.

? is substituted with the distance from the reference plane.

-398 VOL ? Default is blank. Controls the output of sub-volume names at

co-ordinate positions on the isometric.

-443 ^ + ? Used for positive relative position in E/W plane.

-444 ^ - ? Used for negative relative position in E/W plane.

-445 ^ + ? Used for positive relative position in N/S plane.

Styles


-446 ^ - ? Used for negative relative position in N/S plane.

-447 ^ + ? Used for positive relative position in U/D plane.

-448 ^ - ? Used for negative relative position in U/D plane.

-449 ^ + ? Set to blank. Only outputs the relative position.

Specify Alternative Texts

1. Add a definition to the collection (see "Add to Collection" on page 23).

2. Double-click the ISOGENTextID property to display a list of all available ATexts.

3. In the list, select the AText you want to use.

4. Click the AlternateText box to place the cursor and type the new Alternate Text to replace the text shown in the DefaultText box.

For a complete list of available ATexts and their default values. see Grouping of ATexts Listings (see "Grouping of AText Listings" on page 133).

See also AlternateText (on page 164) DefaultText (on page 165) ISOGENTextID (on page 165)

Styles


AlternativeTexts Object

The AlternativeTexts object contains a collection called ATexts, which is used to store the

definitions of changes to ISOGEN standard text. The object has one property, Count, which defines the number of definitions in the AlternativeTexts collection. The Count property is defined by the software.

See also Alternative Texts ATexts Collection (on page 164) Count (on page 163)

Styles


Count

Displays the number of ATexts stored in the ATexts collection.

See also Alternative Texts ATexts Collection (on page 164)

Alternative Texts ATexts Collection

The AternativeTexts ATexts collection is used to store the definitions of changes to ISOGEN standard text. The value that the software displays after the name is a count of how many definitions are stored in the collection, as indicated in the following illustration by ATexts(13) in

the Detail panel and again in the Value column of the Properties panel.

See also

Add to Collection (on page 23) Remove from Collection (on page 23)

Styles


AlternateText

Stores the text to be used to replace the standard ISOGEN text.

ISOGENTextID

Stores the number used by ISOGEN to identify a standard text string.

DefaultText

Displays the standard text that ISOGEN outputs if you choose not to use an Alternative Text.

Styles


Drawing

Drawing Object

The Drawing object contains several sub-objects whose properties can be set to control the format and appearance of the isometric that is generated by ISOGEN.

Content object (see "Drawing Content Object" on page 167)

Controls object (see "Drawing Controls Object" on page 178)

Definitions object (see "Drawing Definitions Object" on page 194)

Dimensions object (see "Drawing Dimensions Object" on page 199)

Format object (see "Drawing Format Object" on page 239)

Layers object (see "Drawing Layers Object" on page 298)

Welds object (see "Drawing Welds Object" on page 301)

The Drawing object itself has just one property - Visible (on page 166).

Styles


Visible

Controls whether the drawing is generated.

True - Generates the drawing.

False - Does not generate the drawing.

Defines

OS 21, Pos 1

Styles


Drawing Content Object

The Drawing Content object controls what is shown on the isometric drawing. When you click

the Drawing Content object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.

You can modify any of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list

that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value.

ShowBIP (on page 169)

ShowClosedEnd (on page 169)

ShowCoordAtRefItem (on page 169)

ShowContAtSplitPoint (on page 170)

ShowCoordAtSplitPts (on page 170)

ShowCptFlowArrows (on page 171)

ShowDrainPosition (on page 171)

ShowEquipConn (on page 171)

ShowFlangeRotation (on page 171)

ShowIsometricSpindles (on page 172)

ShowMiscPosition (on page 173)

Styles


ShowNozzles (on page 173)

ShowNSUnitsOnDrg (on page 173)

ShowNSUnitsInReports (on page 174)

ShowOpenEnd (on page 175)

ShowPipeLineCont (on page 175)

ShowReferenceDims (on page 175)

ShowRPads (on page 175)

ShowSiteAssemblyTable (on page 176)

ShowSupports (on page 176)

ShowTapBrnchCoords (on page 177)

ShowVentPosition (on page 177)

ShowBIP

Controls whether the coordinate information for break in points is shown on the isometric

drawing.

True - Shows the coordinates. This is the default setting.

False – Suppresses the display of coordinates on the isometric drawing.

Defines

OS 5 Pos 8

ShowClosedEnd

Controls whether the coordinate information for closed end of pipe work and ISO TEXT are

shown on the isometric drawing.

True - Shows the coordinates. This is the default setting.

False – Suppresses the display of coordinates on the isometric drawing coordinates.

The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for closed end is -241; the default is Blank.

Defines

OS 5 Pos 4

See also Specify Alternative Texts (on page 162)

ShowCoordAtRefItem

Controls whether the co-ordinate information for referenced Items is shown on the isometric.

True - Shows the coordinates.

False - Does not show the coordinates. This is the default setting.

Defines

OS 66 Pos 5

Styles


ShowContAtSplitPoint

Controls the location of drawing continuation messages on the isometric drawing at drawing

split points.

True - If ShowCoordsAtSplitPts is True, full set of coordinates output and message points

to drawing split point. If ShowCoordsAtSplitPts is False, coordinates not output and message points to drawing split point.

False - Coordinates not output – message points to end of continuation components.

Defines

OS 66 Pos 4

See also ShowCoordAtSplitPts (on page 170)

ShowCoordAtSplitPts

Controls whether the coordinate information at split points and ISO TEXT are shown on the isometric.

True - ISOGEN displays a full set of coordinates in both drawings when a user-defined split point is used.

False - Does not show coordinate information. This is the default setting.

Defines

OS 66 Pos 4

Styles


ShowCptFlowArrows

Controls the use of flow arrows that are plotted alongside certain types of in-line components.

Their purpose is to show the fluid or gas flow direction in a pipeline.

True - Shows flow arrows. This is the default setting.

False - Does not show flow arrows.

Defines

OS 17 Pos 1

ShowDrainPosition

Controls whether the coordinate information at drain positions and ISO TEXT are shown on the

isometric.

True - Shows the coordinate information. This is the default setting.

False - Does not show the coordinate information.

The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for Drain Position is -239; the default text is DRAIN.

Defines

OS 5 Pos 6


ShowEquipConn

Controls whether the coordinate information at connection to equipment nozzles and ISO TEXT are shown on the isometric.

True - Shows coordinate information. This is the default setting.

False - Does not show coordinate information.

Note: The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for connections to equipment nozzles is -208;

the default is CONN. TO.

Defines

OS 5 Pos 2


Styles


ShowFlangeRotation

Controls the output of flange rotation angles that are used by the fabricator when welding on flanges that have to be rotated away from the normal off-center axes. Although the facility can

be used on all types of isometrics, it is of particularly benefit on spool isometrics.

There are a variety of enclosure box styles that can be used for the output of flange rotation angles on the isometric controlled by FlangeRotationStyle property.

True - Shows flange rotation angles.

False - Does not show flange rotation angles.

Defines

OS 124 Pos 1

See also FlangeRotationStyle (on page 255) Flange Rotation (on page 584)

ShowIsometricSpindles

Controls display of valve and instrument spindles in isometric projection.

True - Shows valve and instrument spindles in isometric projection.

False - Shows valve and instrument spindles as flat.

Defines

OS 95 Pos 6

Styles


ShowMiscPosition

Controls the whether the coordinate information at miscellaneous positions and ISO TEXT is

shown on the isometric.

True - Shows the coordinate information. This is the default setting.

False - Does not show the coordinate information.

The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for miscellaneous positions is -242; the default is Blank.

Defines

OS 5 Pos 7

See also Specify Alternate Texts (see "Specify Alternative Texts" on page 162)

ShowNozzles

Controls whether or not equipment nozzle indicators are plotted (in dotted line style) on the isometric.

True - Shows equipment nozzle indicators.

False - Does not show equipment nozzle indicators. This is the default setting.

Defines

OS 111 Pos 1

ShowNSUnitsOnDrg

Controls how nominal size information is output in a number of tables and lists appearing on the isometric drawing.

ISOGEN, however, does not have an option when outputting the nominal size on whether the units (typically the “ character) is appended to the output text. To give you control over the output of the nominal size units, SmartPlant I-Configure adds keywords to the appropriate

control files.

True - The keyword OUTPUT-UNITS is appended to N.S, N.S.SEC and N.S.THIRD when this appears in the control files for tables and lists appearing on the isometric drawing.

False - The keyword SUPPRESS-UNITS is appended to N.S, N.S.SEC and N.S.THIRD when this appears in the control files for tables and lists appearing on the isometric drawing.

You can control nominal size units for the following output tables and report files:

Material List – Style 2



Material Control File

Cut Pipe List

Styles


Cut Pipe Report File

Weld List

Welding Report File

Site Welding Report File

Operations List (default – units output)

Site Assembly Report File (default – units output)


PRINTED-M/C-DATA-ITEMS

'PIPELINE-REFERENCE' 1 L

'REVISION' 18 L

'ITEM-CODE' 24 L

'N.S.' 41 L OUTPUT-UNITS

'QTY' 57 N

'GROUP' 64 L

'WEIGHT' 77 N

ShowNSUnitsInReports

Controls how nominal size information is output in a number of summary report files.

ISOGEN, however, does not have an option when outputting the nominal size on whether the

units (typically the “ character) is appended to the output text. To give you control over the output of the nominal size units, SmartPlant I-Configure adds keywords to the appropriate control files.

True - The keyword OUTPUT-UNITS is appended to N.S, N.S.SEC and N.S.THIRD when this appears in the control files for summary report files.

False - The keyword SUPPRESS-UNITS is appended to N.S, N.S.SEC and N.S.THIRD

when this appears in the control files for Operations List and Site Assembly Report File (these reports have units output by default).

You can now control nominal size units for the following output tables and report files:




Material Control File

Cut Pipe List

Cut Pipe Report File

Weld List

Welding Report File

Site Welding Report File

Operations List (default – units output)

Site Assembly Report File (default – units output)

Styles



PRINTED-M/C-DATA-ITEMS


'REVISION' 18 L

'ITEM-CODE' 24 L

'N.S.' 41 L OUTPUT-UNITS

'QTY' 57 N

'GROUP' 64 L

'WEIGHT' 77 N

ShowOpenEnd

Controls whether the coordinate information at open end of pipe work and ISO TEXT are shown

on the isometric.

True - Shows coordinate information. This is the default setting,


Note: The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for open end is - 240; the default is Blank.

Defines

OS 5 Pos 3


ShowPipeLineCont

Controls whether the coordinate information for pipeline continuations and ISO TEXT are

shown on the isometric.



Note: The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for pipeline continuation is -209; the default is CONT. ON.

Defines

OS 5 Pos 1


ShowReferenceDims

Controls whether reference dimensions are displayed.

True - Outputs reference dimensions.

False - Suppresses reference dimensions.

Defines

OS 119 Pos 3

Styles


ShowRPads

Controls the automatic generation of an item code and material description on the material list and a plotted shape for the pad on the isometric.

True - Generates item code / material description and plotted pad shape to be shown on isometric.

False - No generation of item code / material description and no plotted pad shape. This is the default setting.

Defines

OS 77 Pos 3

ShowSiteAssemblyTable

Controls the display of the site assembly table is displayed on the isometric.

True - Shows the site assembly table.

False - Does not show the site assembly table.

Defines

OS 79 Pos 4

Styles


ShowSupports

Controls the display of pipe supports.

True - Shows pipe supports on the isometric and the material list.

False - Suppresses pipe supports from the isometric and the material list.

Defines

OS 40 Pos 1

ShowTapBrnchCoords

Controls the output of coordinates at tapped branch connection points-- the point on the host component where the tapped branch is connected.

True - Shows the coordinates.

False - Does not show the coordinates.

Defines

OS 122 Pos 1

Styles


ShowVentPosition

Controls the display of coordinate information at vent positions and ISO TEXT on the isometric.



Note: The AText number for the ISO TEXT used for connections to vent positions is -230; the

default text is VENT.

Defines

OS 5 Pos 5


Styles


Drawing Controls Object

The Drawing Controls object defines the drawing controls for the isometric.

When you click the Drawing Controls object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows

the properties that are currently defined for that object.

AppendStandardExts (on page 180)

AutoDrawingSplit (on page 181)

DateFormat (on page 181)

DateSource (on page 181)

DiagnosticLevel (on page 182)

DisconnectionMessage (on page 182)

DrawingSize (on page 182)

FourDigitYear (on page 183)

HeatTracingOptions (on page 183)

IgnoreUserSplitPoints (on page 184)

IsometricType (on page 184)

IsoScale (on page 184)

MinAngleOffset (on page 185)

NoOfDrawings (on page 185)

Styles


NorthDirection (on page 185)

DrawingsPerFile (on page 186)

OutputFormat (on page 186)

OverwritePlotFile (on page 187)

PipeLineScale (on page 187)

PipeLineSplitting (on page 187)

PipeLineSplittingInTube (on page 188)

PipeNameInContMessages (on page 188)

PipeNameStyle (on page 188)

PlotFileLength (on page 189)

PlotFilePath (on page 189)

PostScriptSize (on page 189)

PrintedOutputPageLen (on page 190)

SetPipeLineDisconnected (on page 190)

ShowIsogenVer (on page 190)

StartDrawingNumber (on page 191)

SupportAdditionsWeight (on page 191)

TrueScale (on page 191)

Units (on page 191)

UseI01TypeExts (on page 192)

WeightOutput (on page 193)

LinearWeightDenominator (on page 193)

ContinuationGraphicsOnSpoolIsos (on page 194)

You can modify each of the properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that

which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value.

AppendStandardExts

True - Appends plot file output format extension to the I01 type file name extension on all

plot files generated that do not use a user-defined plot file prefix. The UseI01TypeExts property must also be set to True.

False - Does not append plot file output format extension to the I01 type file name extension on all plot files generated that do not use a user-defined plot file prefix.

Defines

OS 71 Pos 7

See also UseI01TypeExts (on page 192)

Styles


AutoDrawingSplit

True - The software calculates the volume of pipeline graphics that can be satisfactorily

displayed on the selected drawing size, and generates the required number of isometrics to contain the complete pipeline.

False - Uses the NoOfDrawings property to specify a fixed number of drawings. With this method, you are able to directly dictate how many isometric drawings are to be produced for a pipeline.

Unless IgnoreUserSplitPoints is set to True, this property is ignored if you manually added pipeline split points are present in the pipeline data file,

Only set the number of drawings in special cases, such as for single pipeline runs, since the setting is applied to all the pipelines in a run.

Defines

OS 7 Pos 1, 2

See also NoOfDrawings (on page 185) IgnoreUserSplitPoints (on page 184)

PipeLineSplitting (on page 187) PipeLineSplittingInTube (on page 188) ShowCoordAtSplitPts (on page 170)

DateFormat

Controls the format of the date that is to be output on the isometric and in summary files.

None - Displays no date.

British - Displays the date in British format (dd/mm/yy)

European - Displays the date in European format (dd/mm/yy).

American - Displays the date in American format (mm/dd/yy).

Defines

OS 6 Pos 1

See also DateSource (on page 181) FourDigitYear (on page 183)

Styles


DateSource

Takes the actual date that is output from either the pipeline data file that has been created by the host 3D design system, or the computer system date at run time.

DataFile - Uses the date contained in the pipeline data file.

System - Uses the system clock date.

Defines

OS 6 Pos 2

See also DateFormat (on page 181) FourDigitYear (on page 183)

DiagnosticLevel

Controls the amount of information written to the Message file.

Low - Minimum of information written to the message file. ISOGEN program version identification and plot file generation messages are output.

Medium - As for low with the addition of ISODAT and ISOPLOT module running messages.

High - As for medium with the addition of information related to the progress of the isometric through the ISOPLOT module.

Defines

OS 55 Pos 1

DisconnectionMessage

Controls output of Disconnection messages on isometric.

True - Outputs Disconnection message local to pipeline break where increased tolerance used to connect pipeline.

False - Suppresses local Disconnection message where increased tolerance used to connect pipeline.

Defines

OS 55 Pos 2

Styles


DrawingSize

Controls the size of drawing. Use the DrawingSize list to select the appropriate size of drawing.

A0 - For European A0 paper size (841 x 1189 mm).

A1 - For European A1 paper size (594 x 841mm).




ANSI "A" - For ANSI 'A' paper size (8.1/2" x 11").

ANSI "B" - For ANSI 'B' paper size(11" x 17").

ANSI "C" - For ANSI 'C' paper size (17" x 22").

ANSI "D" - For ANSI 'D' paper size (22" x 34").

ANSI "E" - For ANSI 'E' paper size (34" x 44").

Custom - If set to Custom, then you must also set the CustomHeight and CustomWidth

properties on the Drawing Frame Object.

Defines

OS 14 Pos 1, 2

See also CustomHeight (on page 336) CustomWidth (on page 336)

FourDigitYear

Controls whether the year portion of the date is output as two or four digits.

True - Outputs four-digit year, such as 2009.

False - Outputs two-digit year, such as 09.

Defines

OS 6 Pos 3

See also DateFormat (on page 181) DateSource (on page 181)

HeatTracingOptions

Controls heat tracing options.

On - Use heat tracing options.

Off - Do not use heat tracing options.

Defines

OS 21 Pos 4

Styles


IgnoreUserSplitPoints

True - Ignores user-defined drawing split points present in the piping data file.

False - Processes user-defined drawing split points present in the piping data file.

Defines

OS 7 Pos 3

IsometricType

Sets the style of isometric to be produced.

Combined - For a combined isometric a combination of Fabrication, Erection and Offshore information as appropriate.

Erection/Offshore - For an erection/offshore type isometric.

Fabrication Only - For a fabrication only isometric.

Flat Spool (Flat) - For individual flat spool isometrics. (maximum legs flat).

Flat Spool (Parallel) - For individual flat spool isometrics. (maximum legs parallel).

Spool - For individual spool isometrics - as-built orientation.

Material List Only - For isometrics suppression - no isometric drawings generated.

Combined Material - For a combined material list only, without pipeline graphics.

Erection Material - For an erection material list only, without pipeline graphics.

Fabrication Material - For a fabrication material list only, without pipeline graphics.

Spool Material - For spool material list only, without spool graphics.

Defines

OS 21 Position 1 & 2

IsoScale

Allows the increase or decrease of the final plotted isometric size, changing it from that defined

by the DrawingSize property or the CustomHeight and CustomWidth properties .

0 or 100 - No scaling change (100% of set size). The software generates isometrics at the

size defined by the DrawingSize property or the CustomHeight and CustomWidth properties .

n - Scales the drawing to increase or decrease the final isometric size by n%. For example, n

= 71 generates a reduced size drawing at 71% of the set size, such as A2 reduced to A3. Whereas n = 120 generates an increased size drawing at 120% of the set size.

Defines

OS 32

See also CustomHeight (on page 336) CustomWidth (on page 336)

Styles


DrawingSize (on page 182)

MinAngleOffset

Controls how small, angular deviations detected in the input pipeline data file are to be

interpreted and acted upon. These deviations can lead to small unwanted skews being generated on the isometric. You can define an angular cut-off value with this property whereby any skew that is found to have an angular deviation below this value is ignored by the software and not treated as a skew.

0 - Default for no angular offset tolerance is set.

Value - Where value is set to the required angle tolerance in degrees, such as. 0.5 for 0.5 degrees.

Defines

OS 115

NoOfDrawings

Controls the number of drawings notation shown on the isometric, such as 1 of 2.

0 - Automatic control of drawing numbers.

Value - User-defined number of drawings.

Unless IgnoreUserSplitPoints is set to True, this property setting is ignored if manually placed pipeline split points are present in the pipeline data file,

Only set the number of drawings in special cases for single pipeline runs, since this setting applies to all the pipelines in a run.

Defines

OS 7 Pos 1 & 2

See also IgnoreUserSplitPoints (on page 184)

Styles


NorthDirection

Controls the viewing direction (isometric orientation). There are four orientation options you can choose:

1. Top Left

2. Top Right

3. Bottom Left

4. Bottom Right

The option you select is indicated on the isometric by the direction the North Arrow is pointing. You can specify that the arrow be displayed in a box with the NorthArrowBox property on the Drawing Format object.

Defines

OS 42

See also NorthArrowBox (on page 265)

DrawingsPerFile

Controls how and where any isometric drawings are to be output.

All On Same Sheet - Outputs isometric drawings generated during a run to either a single plot file or a series of plot files, depending upon the PlotFileLenth property

One Per File - Generates an individual plot file for each isometric drawing.

One Per Sheet - Plots each ISOGEN drawing sheet to a separate sheet within a single drawing file.

Only applies to SmartSketch (IGR) and SmartPlant Shape2D (SHA) formats.

Defines

OS 31 Pos 1

See also PlotFileLength (on page 189)

OutputFormat

Controls the 2D CAD file format that ISOGEN creates. Use the OutputFormat list to select the

required output format.

AutoCAD DXF (DXF)

MicroStation (DGN)

Smart DWG (DWG)

Smart DGN (DGN)

Smart DGN v8 (DGN)

SmartSketch (IGR)

Styles


Shape2d (SHA)

POD2

POD3

ISOGEN

Postscript

In the case of Smart DGN v8 output, template backing sheets (supplied by Alias) are suffixed with .dg8.

To use .dg8 templates:

a. Rename the .dgn v5 template backing sheets to .dg5.

b. Rename the .dg8 templates to .dgn.

Defines

OS 71 Pos 1

OverwritePlotFile

Controls whether or not plot files previously created can be overwritten if their names match

those currently being created.

True - Allocate plot file name using selected sequence method after deleting previously generated files.

False - Allocate next available plot file, generate name using selected sequence method.

Defines

OS 31 Pos 2

PipeLineScale

Increases or decreases the scale of the pipeline picture part of the isometric only, while leaving all other parts, such as the drawing frame, material list, title block and line summary areas, un-altered.

When using PipeLineScale, the whole of the pipeline picture and all text pointing to it can be re-scaled to make it larger or smaller.

0 or 100 - Default scale.

Value - Increase or decreases the scaling effect as a percentage.

Defines

OS 34

Styles


PipeLineSplitting

Controls automatic pipeline splitting. The amount of piping information that can be accommodated on a single drawing is limited. Once the limit is exceeded, then pipeline splitting

automatically occurs. When using PipeLineSplitting, you can either increase the information content on each drawing, or alternatively, reduce the content.

0 or 100 - Default for what ISOGEN considers to be the limit for drawing information content. This limit is set within the software and varies for each size of drawing.

Value - Increases or decreases the drawing information content as a percentage.

Defines

OS 38

PipeLineSplittingInTube

Allows you to control the actions taken by the software whenever the ISOGEN automatic

pipeline split facility selects a split point that is located in a straight length of pipe.

Normal - Default for pipeline splitting to function as normal when the split point occurs

along a section of pipe. The relevant split point information is passed back to the 3D design system using the isometric repeatability file, if it is being used.

Reject - If a pipeline split occurs along a section of pipe, the warning message, UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT, is written to the message file. No plots are produced and no information is written to the isometric repeatability file for the pipeline.

Message - If a pipeline split occurs along a section of pipe, the warning message,

UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT, is written to the message file. Plots are produced with the message, UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT plotted at the top of each affected drawing. No information is written to the isometric repeatability file for the pipeline.

Defines

OS 108

PipeNameInContMessages

Controls whether the pipeline name is output as part of the drawing continuation message on the isometric.

True - Drawing continuation message includes pipeline name.

False - Standard drawing message.

Defines

OS 38 Pos 4

Styles


PipeNameStyle

Controls the style of pipeline name output for drawing continuation messages.

If PipeNameInContMessage is True.

Blank - Standard drawing continuation message.

Drawing Identifier - Drawing continuation message includes CLIENT-DRAWING-IDENTIFIER.

Pipe Reference - Drawing continuation message includes pipeline name.

Sequence Number - Drawing continuation message includes PIPELINE-DRAWING-

SEQUENCE-NUMBER.

Spool Drawing Sequence Number - Drawing continuation message includes SPOOL-DRAWING-SEQUENCE-NUMBER.

Defines

OS 38 Pos 4

See also PipeNameInContMessages (on page 188)

PlotFileLength

Controls the physical length of the plot file that is generated by the ISOGEN program.

It is only necessary to set this property when the OneFilePerDrawing property is set to False,

and the required PlotfileLength is different to the built-in default value of 3275 mm.

0 - Default for plot file length of 3275mm.

Value - The required plot file length in whole mm's.

The maximum length is limited to 3350mm.

Defines

OS 1

See also DrawingsPerFile (on page 186)

PlotFilePath

Directory into which drawings are written.

Double-click in the PlotFilePath box and use the Browse for file dialog box to navigate to the required folder.

Styles


PostScriptSize

Use the PostScriptSize list to select the appropriate size.

A0 - For European A0 paper size (841 x 1189 mm).





ANSI "A" - For ANSI 'A' paper size (8.1/2" x 11").

ANSI "B" - For ANSI 'B' paper size(11" x 17").

ANSI "C" - For ANSI 'C' paper size (17" x 22").

ANSI "D" - For ANSI 'D' paper size (22" x 34").

ANSI "E" - For ANSI 'E' paper size (34" x 44").

Defines

OS 14 Pos 3 & 4

PrintedOutputPageLen

Controls the number of lines per page on any printed output (reports) generated by the ISOGEN system.

0 - Default for 55 per page.

Value - Specifies the required number of lines to be output per page.

Defines

OS 63

SetPipeLineDisconnected

True - Sets pipeline to disconnected when increased tolerance used connect pipeline. Outputs a Disconnected Pipeline message at top of drawing.

False - Suppresses Disconnected Pipeline message at top of drawing if pipeline has

connected using the increased tolerance. Message is always output if pipeline does not connect using increased tolerance.

Defines

OS 55 Pos 3

Styles


ShowIsogenVer

Controls the optional plotting of the ISOGEN program version banner, together with the run date and generation time of the isometric. The information is plotted on a single line located at the

bottom left-hand corner of the isometric, but inside any cut marks that can be present.

True - Plots the banner.

False - Does not plot the banner.

Defines

OS 127

StartDrawingNumber

Allows the first sheet to start at an alternative number instead of starting with drawing number 1

0 - Starts first sheet at drawing number 1.

x - Starts first sheet at x+1.

Defines

OS 31, Pos 3-5

SupportAdditionsWeight

Controls inclusion of the weight of additional material associated with supports when performing center of gravity calculations.

Include - Includes the weight of additional materials (default).

Ignore - Ignores the weight of additional materials.

Defines

OS 40 Pos 6

TrueScale

Attempts to adjust the length of sections of pipe to be proportional to their actual physical length.

True - Uses true scaling of isometrics (proportional pipe lengths).

False - Uses normal scaling of isometrics (variable pipe lengths).

Defines

OS 95 Pos 3

Styles


Units

Defines the style of units used throughout - Metric or Imperial.

Metric / MM Bores - Millimeter lengths and millimeter pipe bores.

Metric / Inch Bores - Millimeter lengths and inch pipe bores.

Imperial / Inch Bores - Inch lengths and inch pipe bores.

You can specify the change over point from where lengths are reported in inches only, to feet and inches.

Imperial / MM Bores - Inch pipe bores with lengths in feet and inches.

Defines

OS 41 Pos 1

See also FtInTolerance (on page 209)

Styles


UseI01TypeExts

Controls the use of I01 type extensions.

True - Uses I01 type filename extensions on all plot files generated that do not use a user defined plot file prefix.

False - Uses normal filenames / extensions.

Defines

OS 71 Pos 7

WeightOutput

Controls how component weights are displayed.

None - Outputs no weight information. Applies to all outputs, including such things as material lists, weight output on drawing frame, and material control files. This is the default setting.

Kg - Inputs and outputs all weights in kilograms (Kgs).

Lb - Inputs and outputs all weights in pounds (Lbs.)

The LinearWeightDenominator property specifies the units used for the linear weight denominator, irrespective of the units used for weights.

Defines

OS 41 Pos 4

See also LinearWeightDenominator (on page 193)

Styles


LinearWeightDenominator

Allows you to specify the units used for linear weight denominator, irrespective of the units used for weights.

None - By default, for the linear denominator, the program uses Lbs/Ft for linear weights where the weight is in Lbs., and Kgs/M for linear weights when the weight is in Kgs.

m - The linear denominator is in Meters--Lbs/M when weight is in Lbs,, and Kgs/M when weight is in Kgs.

ft - The linear denominator is in Feet--Lbs/Ft when weight is in Lbs,, and Kgs/Ft when weight is in Kgs.

The weight unit is specified in the WeightOutput property .

Defines

OS 41 Pos 4

See also WeightOutput (on page 193)

ContinuationGraphicsOnSpoolIsos

Controls the display of continuation graphics at the ends of spool isometric drawings. Where a

spool continues on another spool, an appropriate continuation message is also output on the isometric drawing.

False - Shows continuation graphics on spool isometrics.

True - Does not show continuation graphics on spool isometrics.

Defines

OS 38 Pos 5

Styles


Drawing Definitions Object

The Drawing Definitions object has a collection called Definitions, which is used to define how

to represent pipeline components or facilities on the drawing. For example, you can specify that valves be drawn 1.5 times normal size with a line thickness of 1 on layer 5, and display in the color blue.

The Count property, defined by the software, displays the number of definitions in the Definitions collection.

When you click the Drawing Definitions object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel

displays its two properties:

LineStyleTable (on page 195)

Count (on page 196)

You can modify the LineStyleTable property by double-clicking in the Value box.

See also Drawing Definitions Definitions Collection (on page 196)

Styles


LineStyleTable

A free format text field that allows you to enter a list of names that correspond to numbers used in the Definition Collection's LineStyle property, such as:

1. Dotted

2. Dash-dot

The entry must be the name of a line style defined in the output CAD system.

Only those entries that appear in this table are available in the Definition Collection's LineStyle property.

See also LineStyle (on page 199)

Count

Displays the number of definitions stored in the Drawing Definitions collection.

Styles


Drawing Definitions Definitions Collection

The Drawing Definitions Definitions collection defines how to represent pipeline components or facilities on the drawing. For example, you can specify that valves are to be drawn 1.5 times

normal size with a line thickness of 1 on layer 5, and appear in the color blue. This collection is used to construct the corresponding Drawing definition file. The value that appears in parentheses after the collection name is a count of how many definitions are stored in the collection.

You can define the following properties:

AppliesTo (on page 198)

LowerBore (on page 198)

UpperBore (on page 198)

Category (on page 198)

Color (on page 199)

Layer (on page 199)

DScale (on page 199)

ThicknessActual (on page 199)

ThicknessLogical (on page 199)

LineStyle (on page 199)

Styles



See also Add to Collection (on page 23) Count (on page 196) Remove from Collection (on page 23)

AppliesTo

Defines the pipeline, pipeline component or facility, the definition will be applied to. This is set

using a list, which includes the allowable settings for this property.

LowerBore

Specify an integer or real number that represents the minimum bore to which the definition

applies. When there are two or more definitions with the same AppliesTo, you can use a zero (0) in the first of the lower bore positions to signal there is no lower bore.


AppliesTo LowerBore UpperBore

Pipeline 0 2

Pipeline 2.5 6

Pipeline 8 0

SmartPlant I-Configure displays the LowerBore/UpperBore parameter together, rather than separated as they are currently.

See also AppliesTo (on page 198)

UpperBore

Specify an integer or real number that represents the minimum bore to which the definition applies. When there are two or more definitions with the same AppliesTo, you can use a zero (0)

in the last maximum bore position to signal there is no maximum bore limit.


AppliesTo LowerBore UpperBore

Pipeline 0 2

Pipeline 2.5 6

Pipeline 8 0

SmartPlant I-Configure displays the LowerBore/UpperBore parameter together, rather than separated as they are currently.

See also

AppliesTo (on page 198)

Styles


Category

Specifies the category. Use the Category list to select the appropriate one: Fabrication, Erection, Offshore or All.

Color

Type the integer number that represent the color number as defined in the output drawing system (MicroStation or AutoCAD).

Layer

Specify the integer number that identifies the required layer to which the definition is applied.

DScale

An integer number (two or three digits) that represents an increase or decrease to the basic 100% standard symbol size for all types of fitting.

ThicknessActual

Specifies the actual thickness (width) of plotted line in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.

See also Options (on page 77)

ThicknessLogical

Integer number representing the required thickness, depending on the drawing output format (see

"OutputFormat" on page 186) .

LineStyle

An integer that contains the user-specified line style number, which is displayed as a list

containing any entries in the LineStyleTable plus any of the 12 supported ISOGEN styles.

See also LineStyleTable (on page 195)

Styles


Drawing Dimensions Object

The Drawing Dimensions object controls how the dimensioning on the isometric is displayed.

When you click the Drawing Dimension object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows

the properties that are currently defined for that object.

You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value.

AdditionalAllowanceFormat (on page 202)

AddRoundOff (on page 202)

BranchBoreLimit (on page 202)

BranchCptLimit (on page 203)

CoordOutputBends (on page 204)

CoordOutputBranches (on page 205)

CoordOutputHTCpts (on page 205)

CoordSupports (on page 205)

Coordtype (on page 205)

DoubleUnits (on page 206)

FabWeldsInPipe (on page 206)

Styles


Format (on page 207)

FtInTolerance (on page 209)

Gaskets (on page 210)

GasketDimPrecision (on page 211)

ImperialFormat (on page 211)

JacketDimensioning (on page 212)

Inches (on page 212)

IsometricText (on page 213)

MetresCoordinates (on page 213)

MetresDimensions (on page 213)

MinOffset (on page 213)

NominalSize (on page 214)

NonLinearValves (on page 214)

Overall (on page 215)

SeparatePulledBend (on page 217)

StandOutComposite (on page 217)

StandOutOverall (on page 219)

StandOutVertical (on page 220)

SuppDimAsDim (on page 220)

SuppFormat (on page 221)

SuppOptions (on page 223)

SuppStandOut (on page 224)

TapOnCpt (on page 224)

TapOnPipe (on page 225)

TapBranchDimension (on page 227)

USAStyle (on page 228)

ValveBW (on page 229)

ValveCP (on page 231)

ValveFL (on page 232)

ValveHY (on page 232)

ValveLimit (on page 233)

ValvePL (on page 233)

ValveSC (on page 234)

ValveSW (on page 235)

VertOption (on page 236)

PipesThroughPenetrationPlates (on page 238)

IdfgenConnectionTolerance (on page 238)

Styles


TapOnPipeFittings (on page 239)

CurvedPipeDimensioning (on page 239)

AdditionalAllowanceFormat

Controls how additional allowances are displayed alongside or as part of dimensions.

Suppress - Displays no additional allowances.

Dim + Allowance -Displays dimension + allowance.

Dim includes Allowance - Adds allowance to dimension.

Defines

OS 9 Pos 5

AddRoundOff

Controls the Dimension Round Off Carry-Over function, which is used to control how

remainders are handled when dimensions are calculated and output on the isometric. At branch locations, or components, this permits the remainder part of a dimension either to be carried over and added to the next dimension, or discarded.

Normal - Rounds off dimensions to + or - 1mm, or 1/16th-inch, and carries over any reminder to the next dimension.

Branch Intersect - Rounds off dimensions to + or - 1mm or 1/16th-inch with no carry-over of the remainder beyond a branch intersection.

Current Component - Rounds off dimensions to + or - 1mm or 1/16th-inch with no carry-over of the remainder beyond current component.

Defines

OS 117

Styles


BranchBoreLimit

Controls the dimensioning of branch legs based on a minimum bore. Works in conjunction with the BranchCptLimit property , if set.

0 - Dimensions all pipe.

Value - For branches having a bore equal to or less than value to have dimensions

suppressed. Value is in 1/16ths of an inch or mm, depending on the bore units. For example, the branch in the following illustration has a pipe bore of less than the value stated in BranchBoreLimit , and so it is not dimensioned.

Any branch containing pipe (100 record), fixed length pipe (101 record) or pipe block (103 record) does not have branch dimension suppression applied to it.

Branch dimension suppression using this property does not apply to tapped branches.

The BranchBoreLimit and BranchCptLimit properties work either independently of each other or together, depending upon your requirements.

Defines

OS 81 Pos 4,5,6

See also BranchCptLimit (on page 203)

Styles


BranchCptLimit

Controls the dimensioning of branches based on the number of components. Works in conjunction with the BranchBoreLimit property, if set.

Branches with a specified number of components are un-dimensioned.

Blank - Dimensions all branches.

Value - For branches having a number of components equal to or less than value to have

dimensions suppressed. Gasket and bolt entries are counted as components. For example, the branch in the following illustration has six components: a weldolet, a weld neck flange, two gaskets, a valve and a blind flange. In this example, BranchCptLimit has been set to 7, so the branch has not been dimensioned.

Any branch containing pipe (100 record), fixed length pipe (101 record) or pipe block (103 record) does not have branch dimension suppression applied to it.

Branch dimension suppression using this property does not apply to tapped branches.

The BranchBoreLimit and BranchCptLimit properties work either independently of each other or together, depending upon your requirements.

Defines

OS 81 Pos 7 & 8

See also BranchBoreLimit (on page 202)

Styles


CoordOutputBends

Controls whether co-ordinates and elevations are printed at bends and elbows.

None - Outputs no elevation coordinates.

Elev at changes - Outputs elevations when changed.

Elev and coords at changes - Outputs elevations and co-ordinates that have changed.

Full - Outputs a full set of coordinates.

Defines

OS 66 Pos 2

CoordOutputBranches

Controls whether coordinates and elevations are output on branch intersection points.

None - Outputs no elevation coordinates.

Elev at changes - Outputs elevations when changed.

Elev and coords at changes - Outputs elevations and co-ordinates that have changed.

Full - Outputs a full set of coordinates.

Defines

OS 66 Pos 3

CoordOutputHTCpts

Controls whether coordinates are output on heat traced components.

On - Outputs coordinates on heat traced components.

Off - Suppresses coordinates on heat traced components.

CoordSupports

Controls whether coordinates are output at supports.

None - Does not output coordinates on pipe supports.

Fabrication - Outputs coordinates at Fabrication pipe supports only.

Erection - Outputs coordinates at Erection pipe supports only.

Offshore - Outputs coordinates at Offshore pipe supports only.

All - Outputs coordinates at all pipe supports.

Defines

OS 66 Pos 6

Styles


CoordType

Controls whether coordinates and elevations are output as arrowed-out messages, or on witness lines at bend and tee intersection points on the isometric.

Arrowed - Outputs coordinates and elevations as arrowed-out message type. This is the default.

Witness Lines - Outputs coordinates and elevations along witness lines.

Defines

OS 66 Pos 1

DoubleUnits

Controls whether measurements are output in both Imperial and Metric units, or just one.

True - Outputs measurements in both Imperial and Metric units.

False - Outputs measurements in one type of unit only.

Defines

OS 9 Pos 7

Styles


FabWeldsInPipe

Controls dimensioning of fabrication welds in pipe.

True - Shows dimension to fabrication weld.

False - Suppresses dimension to fabrication weld.

Defines

OS 119 Pos 4

Styles


Format

Controls style of dimensioning used on the isometric.

Basic - Plots basic string dimensions, support / message dimensions, and reference dimensions.

String/Composite - Same as Basic except composite dimensions are output instead of string.

Support/Comment - Only support / message and reference location dimensions only.

Styles


Reference Location - Plots only reference dimensions.

Full String - Same as Basic except full string dimensions are output instead of ordinary string dimensions. That is, all components are individually dimensioned.

Defines

OS 9 Pos 1

FtInTolerance

Controls imperial dimension output format (Inches or Feet-Inches).

Type a value to set the number of whole inches at which output style changes from inches to feet-inches. This value must be greater than 12.

In the following example, the 19.9/16" long pipe is dimensioned as 1' 7.9/16", as FtInTolerance

is set at 19.

Styles


In this example, the same pipe is dimensioned as 19.9/16", as FtInTolerance is set at 20.

Defines

OS 41 Pos 6 & 7

Gaskets

Controls how gaskets are dimensioned.

None - Does not include gaskets.

Gasket thicknesses are not included. The component dimension is indicated by the presence of two leader lines.

Included - For component dimensions to include gaskets.

Gasket thicknesses are included. The component dimension is indicated by the presence of only single leader lines.

The length of the valve has now increased by the thickness of the gaskets (2mm in this case) either side.

Styles


Separate - For separate dimensioning of gaskets.

Defines

OS 9 Pos 2

See also GasketDimPrecision (on page 211)

GasketDimPrecision

Controls precise dimensioning of gaskets.

True - Outputs gasket dimensions to the nearest 10th mm.

False - Outputs gasket dimensions to the nearest mm.

Defines

OS 119 Pos 5

See also Gaskets (on page 210)

Styles


ImperialFormat

Controls the style of Imperial dimensioning used on the isometric.

Standard - Standard output of Feet. Inch dimensions - of the form 6' 10.3/4".

Standard dash - Same as Standard but with an added dash (-) between the Feet and Inches of the form 6' - 10.3/4".

Space dash - Same as Standard dash but with a blank space instead of a dot (.) between Inches and fractions of an Inch - of the form 6' - 10 3/4".

Stacked fractions with dash - Stacked fractions with a dash (-) of the form 6' - 10¾".

Stacked fractions without dash - Stacked fractions without a dash (-) of the form 6' 10¾".

1DecimalPlace - Output decimal inches to 1 decimal place.

2DecimalPlace - Output decimal inches to 2 decimal places.



The Stacked fraction options only apply to MicroStation DGN output when a special font (supplied by Alias) is needed.

Defines

OS 41 Pos 3

JacketDimensioning

Dimensioning used for jacketed pipe work has two settings.

Full - Full jacket dimensioning.

Minimal - Minimal detail.

Defines

OS 9 Pos 9

Inches

Controls whether pipes are dimensioned in Inches only or in feet and inches.

True - Outputs dimensions in inches.

False - Outputs dimesnions in feet/inches for any dimensions greater than 24-inches.

If the FtInTolerance property is set, it supercedes this property.

Defines

OS 41 Pos 6

See also FtInTolerance (on page 209)

Styles


IsometricText

Dimension text and messages placed along a section of pipe in isometric projection (oblique

angle \ slanted text). Text oblique angle is adjusted to be parallel to the dimension standout direction. ISOGEN attempts to set a vertical dimension standout for horizontal sections of pipeline wherever practical.

True - Text is isometric.

False - Text is not isometric.

This feature is only available for DXF format output styles generated using the POD interface.

Defines

OS 8 Pos 3

MetresCoordinates

Controls the output of coordinates in either mm or M.mm format.

Defines

OS 41 Pos 2

See also MetresDimensions (on page 213)

MetresDimensions

Controls the output of dimensions in either mm or M.mm format.

Defines

OS 41 Pos 2

See also MetresCoordinates (on page 213)

Styles


MinOffset

Controls how small dimensional deviations detected in the input Pipeline data file are to be interpreted and acted upon. These deviations can lead to small unwanted skews being generated

on the isometric. You can use MinOffset to define a dimensional cut-off value, whereby any offset coordinate numerically below this value is ignored by the software and hence does not generate a Skew at this point.

0 - Default for no dimensional offset tolerance to be set.

Value - Where value (real number) is set to the required dimensional tolerance in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. For example, you can type 1.0 mm or 0.04 inch.

Defines

OS 116 Pos 1-3

See also IdfgenConnectionTolerance (on page 238)

NominalSize

Controls whether nominal size (N.S.) is output at branch (tee/olet/cross) and reducer locations.

True - Outputs nominal size information at branches and reducers as normal.

False - Suppresses nominal size information at branches and reducers.

Defines

OS 41 Pos 8

Styles


NonLinearValves

Controls dimensioning of angle/3-way/4-way valves and Instruments.

True - Angle/3-way/4-way valve and instruments dimensioned normally.

False - Angle/3-way/4-way valve and instruments dimensioned using message.

Defines

OS 9 Pos 8

Styles


Overall

Controls the use of overall dimensions. You can specify whether overall dimensions are plotted, and if they are, which type.

None - For no overall dimensions.

Across Branches - For Overall dimensions on - going across branches, such as tees, olets and crosses).

Stop At Branches - For Overall dimensions on - stopping at branches, such as tees, olets and crosses).

Styles


Valves / Across Branches - For Overall dimensions on-going to Valve centres and going across branches, such as tees, olets and crosses).

Valves / Stop At Branches - For Overall dimensions on-going to Valve centres but stopping at branches, such as tees, olets and crosses).

Overall dimensions to valve centers are only available to valves that have a spindle.

Defines

OS 118 Pos 1

SeparatePulledBend

Controls how bends are dimensioned.

True - Separate pipe and bend dimensions.

False - Combined pipe and bend dimensions.

Defines

OS 9 Pos 6

Styles


StandOutComposite

Controls dimension line standout distances for the following:

1. String and composite dimensions that are normally plotted as the middle layer of multi-layer dimensions.

2. Dimensioned messages, support dimensions and reference dimensions on the inner layer, but

only when the SuppStandOut property is not set.

3. Overall dimensions on the outer layer, but only when the StandOutOverall property is not set.

In the StandOutComposite box, type one of the following:

0 - If the value is set to 0 (zero), the default, then the following Standard dimension line standouts are used:

When TextSize property is set to

Small

String / Composite Dimension Standout = 12mm.

Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout - 6mm.

Overall Dimension Standout = 18mm.

Medium


Messages / Support & Reference Dimension Standout = 7mm.


Large




XLarge




XXLarge




Styles


XXXLarge

String / Composite Dimension standout = 22mm.



Value - Set a value in the data field, where value (real number) equals the required standout

distance for string and composite dimensions on the middle layer in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. In the following illustration, StandOutComposite is set to 18, so all dimension lines are 18mm away from the pipe.

Values set to < = 11 mm are ignored by the software and substituted by the appropriate standard dimension line standout distance.

When the value is set > 11 mm, that value is used by the software to set the dimension line

standout distance for string and composite dimensions on the middle layer. The inner dimension layer for dimensioned messages, Support dimensions and reference dimensions are then be set to 0.5 X this distance, while the outer layer overall dimensions is set to 1.5 X this distance.

Defines

OS 8 Pos 1,2

See also SuppStandOut (on page 224) StandOutOverall (on page 219)

Styles


StandOutOverall

Controls the standout distance for overall dimensions.

0 - No overall dimension standout is set. This is the software default and is used for all overall dimensions.

Value - Value (real number) is set to the user-specified overall dimension standout distance

in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. For example, you can type 40 to set the Value at 40mm.

Defines

OS 118 Pos 2,3

StandOutVertical

True - Vertical dimension standout wherever possible.

False - Normal selection criteria used to determine directional standout.

Defines

OS 8 Pos 4

Styles


SuppDimAsDim

Controls which side of the pipeline the supports are drawn.

True - Draws support dimensions on the same side of pipe as the normal dimensions.

False - Draws support dimensions on the opposite side of the pipe to the normal dimensions.

This causes any support dimension line stand-out distance set by the SuppStandOut property to be ignored.

Defines

OS 40 Pos 2

See also SuppStandOut

Styles


SuppFormat

Controls how dimensions are shown for supports.

Included - Pipe supports drawn on the isometric - support dimensions included as part of pipeline dimensions.

None - Pipe supports drawn on the isometric - no support dimensions shown.

String - Pipe supports drawn on the isometric - no support dimensions shown.

Styles


Overall - Pipe supports drawn on the isometric - dimensioned in overall form

Suppress - Pipe supports not drawn on isometric or output on the material list.

Defines

OS 40 Pos 1

See also SuppDimAsDim (on page 220) SuppOptions (on page 223) SuppStandOut (on page 224)

SuppOptions

Controls which supports are dimensioned.

All - Dimension all supports.

Fabrication - Dimension Fabrication type supports only.

Styles


Erection - Dimension Erection type supports only. The following example shows only one of two supports dimensioned. The support that is dimensioned has its category set to Erection.

Offshore - Dimension Offshore type supports only.

Erection and Offshore - Dimension Erection and Offshore type supports only.

Defines

OS 40 Pos 5

SuppStandOut

Controls the value for the support dimension stand out distance.

0 - No support dimension line stand-out distance set. The software default is used for all support dimensions.

Value - Value (real number) equals the required support dimension line stand-out distance in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box

Defines

OS 40 Pos 3,4

See also SuppDimAsDim (on page 220)

SuppFormat (on page 221) SuppOptions (on page 223)

Styles


TapOnCpt

Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on actual fitting components, such as valves and flanges

A tapped branch is a collection of components attached to a connection tapping point.

None - For tapped branch dimensions off.

Full - For tapped branch dimensions on - as set for the main pipeline.

Pipe Only - For tapped branch dimensions off expect for those on pipe and pipe type components.

Defines

121 Pos 1

See also TapOnPipe (on page 225)

Styles


TapOnPipe

Controls the dimensioning of tapped branches on pipe-type components, such as elbows, tees, and pipe. A tapped branch is a collection of components attached to a connection tapping point.

None - Default for tapped branch dimensions off.

Full - Tapped dimensions on.

Pipe Only - For tapped branch dimensions off except for those on pipe and pipe-type components.

Defines

OS 121 Pos 2

Styles


TapBranchDimension

Controls the dimensioning of tee and tap branches where you now have the option of

dimensioning to the edge of pipe.

Centerline- Dimensions originate from the center lines of the main run.

TapAndSetOnStartPoint - Dimensions to the edge of pipe

Styles


TapStartPoint - Defines tap dimensions only.

Defines

OS 81 Pos 9.

See also TapOnCpt (on page 224)

TeeBendBranchDimension

Controls the dimensioning of tee bend/elbows.

Connection - Dimensioned from connection point.

Centre-line Intersection - Dimensioned from center-line intersection point.

Defines

OS 119 Pos 2

Styles


USAStyle

Controls whether or not the dimension line is broken to make space for the dimension characters.

True - USA dimensioning style-- positioned on top of dimension line.

False - Regular dimensioning style--inserted into dimension line.

Defines

OS 9 Pos 3

Styles


ValveBW

Butt weld valves and straight through Instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite

dimensions.

The ValveBW property can operate in conjunction with the ValveLimit property, which adds bore selectivity.

True - For components with butt weld ends to have centerline dimensions.

False - Default for components with butt weld ends to be dimensioned across their length.

Defines

OS 80 Pos 1

See also ValveLimit (on page 233)

Styles


ValveCP

Compression type valves and straight through Instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally

be dimensioned to their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions.

ValveCP can operate in conjunction with the ValveLimit property , which adds bore selectivity.

True - For components with compression ends to have centerline dimensions.

False - Default for components with compression ends to be dimensioned across their length.

Defines

OS 80 Pos 2


Styles


ValveFL

Flanged valves and straight through Instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be

dimensioned to their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite dimensions.

ValveFL can operate in conjunction with the ValveLimit property, which adds bore selectivity.

True - For components with flanged ends to have centerline dimensions.

False - For components with flanged ends to be dimensioned across their length.

Defines

OS 80 Pos 5

Styles


ValveHY

Hygienic type valves and straight through Instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite

dimensions.

ValveHY can operate in conjunction with the ValveLimit property , which adds bore selectivity.

True - For components with hygienic ends to have centerline dimensions.

False - Default for components with hygienic ends to be dimensioned across their length.

Defines

OS 80 Pos 7


ValveLimit

0 - Default for valves/instruments that have their end type set in ValveBW, ValveCP, and so on, to be dimensioned to their center point.

Value - For valves/instruments that have their end type set in ValveBW, ValveCP, and so on, and have a bore equal to or less than the value set to be dimensioned to their center point.

Value is in 1/16th of an Inch or mm, depending on the bore units. For example, 32 x 1/16th is equivalent to 2” bore.

Defines

OS 81 Pos 1,2,3

Styles


ValvePL

Plain-ended valves and straight through Instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite

dimensions.

ValvePL can operate in conjunction with the ValveLimit property, which adds bore selectivity.

True - For components with plain ends to have centerline dimensions.

False - For components with plain ends to be dimensioned across their length.

Defines

OS 80 Pos 6


Styles


ValveSC

Screwed valves and straight through instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite

dimensions.

ValveSC can operate in conjunction with the ValveLimit property, which adds bore selectivity.

True - For components with screwed ends to have centerline dimensions.

False - For components with screwed ends to be dimensioned across their length.

Defines

OS 80 Pos 3


Styles


ValveSW

Socket weld valves and straight through Instruments, which have a spindle, can optionally be dimensioned to their center points rather than to their ends, using either string or composite

dimensions.

ValveSW can operate in conjunction with the ValveLimit property, which adds bore selectivity.

True - For components with socket weld ends to have centerline dimensions.

False - Default for components with socket weld ends to be dimensioned across their length.

Defines

OS 80 Pos 4


Styles


VertOption

Controls how vertical pipe positions are indicated on the isometric.

Normal - For normal vertical pipe dimensions, elevations are also indicated at intersection points when the level changes.

Suppressed - For all vertical pipe dimensions to be suppressed and replaced by elevations in the form of text messages at all positions where dimensions would normally be output.

Styles


Elevation - For vertical dimensions and elevations output at all normal dimensioning positions.

Defines

OS 119

PipesThroughPenetrationPlates

Controls the dimensioning of pipes passing through penetration plates.

Dimension From Adjacent Plate Face - Pipes passing through penetration plates dimensioned from adjacent plate face.

Dimension From Same Plate Face - Pipes passing through penetration plates dimensioned from same plate face.

Defines

119 Pos 6

IdfgenConnectionTolerance

Controls the tolerance to be used when connecting components in IDFGEN (set in 100th mms).

Backward Compatibility

To avoid problems where this control is set as a single value--no tolerance is set in Option

Switch 116, Positions 4-6--IDFGEN continues to use positions 1-3 to determine the connection tolerance.

Defines

116 Pos 4-6

Styles


See also MinOffSet (on page 213)

TapOnPipeFittings

Controls the dimensioning of tapping points on pipe type components, such as elbows/teed elbows, bends/teed bends, tees, and crosses.


None - Tapped branches on pipe fittings not dimensioned.

Full - Tapped branches on pipe fittings dimensioned.

Defines

OS 121 Pos 3

CurvedPipeDimensioning

Controls the dimensioning of curved pipe.

Message - Output curved pipe dimensions as a message.

Standard - Output curved pipe dimensions as a standard dimension.

Suppress - Suppress curved pipe dimensions.

Defines

OS 84 Pos 1

Styles


Drawing Format Object

The Drawing Format object controls the format of the information on the isometric.

When you click the Drawing Format object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the

properties that are currently defined for that object.


AngleAccuracy (on page 243)

AngleStyle (on page 243)

AngleType (on page 243)

CptAttributesEnclStyle (on page 245)

AdditionalEnclosureStyle (on page 245)

AdditionalWeldEnclosure (on page 248)

AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces (on page 248)

BendRadius (on page 249)

BendRepresentation (on page 249)

ComponentLegLength (on page 250)

ComputeNozzleAxis (on page 250)

Styles


CptTagEnclStyle (on page 251)

CptTagsStyle (on page 251)

CutPieceNoLength (on page 252)

CutPieceEnclosureStyle (on page 252)

ElbowRadius (on page 253)

ElbowRepresentation (on page 253)

FallCutOff (on page 254)

FallRepresentation (on page 255)

FlangeRotationStyle (on page 255)

FlowArrowScale (on page 256)

GhostGapDimension (on page 256)

InstIDEnclosureSize (on page 256)

InstIDEnclosureStyle (on page 257)

InstIdentification (on page 259)

InsulationStyle (on page 260)

MessageCircleEnclosure (on page 260)

MessageDiamondEnclosure (on page 261)

MessagePointedEnclosure (on page 262)

MessageRoundEnclosure (on page 262)

MessageSquareEnclosure (on page 263)

MessageTriangleEnclosure (on page 264)

MultiPortConnections (on page 265)

NorthArrowBox (on page 265)

OletBranchOrientationMessage (on page 265)

OrientationFrom (on page 265)

PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 266)

PartNoEnclSize (on page 268)

PartNoSpaces (on page 269)

PartNoLength (on page 269)

PartNoVisible (on page 269)

SeparateSpoolUnion (on page 270)

ShowFlowArrows (on page 270)

SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure (on page 270)

SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize (on page 272)

SiteAssemblyIDs (on page 273)

SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing (on page 274)

SiteWeldsNotAssignedToSpools (on page 274)

Styles


SkewDimStandout (on page 274)

SkewDimStyle (on page 275)

SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276)

SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276)

SkewHatchDimText (on page 277)

skewHatching (on page 277)

SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278)

SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278)

SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279)

SkewMinCpts (on page 280)

SkewMixed (on page 280)

SkewOverall (on page 281)

SkewRepresentation (on page 281)

SkewAngleStyle (on page 282)

SpecBrkEnclosure (on page 282)

SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)

SpoolIDAllocation (on page 283)

SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283)

SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284)

SpoolIDSize (on page 286)

SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287)

SpoolIDLength (on page 288)

SpoolDrawingID (on page 288)

SpoolIDType (on page 290)

SpoolPrefix (on page 290)

SupportIdentification (on page 291)

SupportTagEnclStyle (on page 291)

TapBranchInlineScale (on page 292)

TapBranchPipeScale (on page 292)

TapBranchSuppression (on page 292)

TeeCrossNS (on page 293)

TestIso (on page 294)

TextFont (on page 294)

TextSize (on page 294)

UserTextSize (on page 295)

TextWeight (on page 295)

TextWidth (on page 296)

Styles


TracingStyle (on page 296)

ReferenceNameStyle (on page 296)

CurvedPipeAngleStyle (on page 298)

CurvedPipeRadiusStyle (on page 298)

AngleAccuracy

Controls the accuracy at which angle information is output on the isometric drawing.

Default - Outputs all angles to ISOGEN default accuracy of 0.5-degrees.

Nearest Degree - Outputs angles to the nearest degree.

Nearest 10th

Degree (1 decimal place) - Outputs angles to the nearest 0.1-degrees.

Nearest 100th

Degree (2 decimal places) - Outputs angles to the nearest 0.01-degrees.

Defines

OS 67 Pos 4

AngleStyle

Controls the output of angle information for bends and elbows in the pipeline.

All - Outputs all angle information on the isometric (including angles that are exactly 90- and 180-degrees.)

All except 90/180 deg - Outputs all angle information on the isometric drawing except angles that are within 0.5-degrees of 90- and 180-degrees.

All except within 10th

degree of 90/180 - Outputs angle information on the isometric drawing unless when rounded angles are within .1-degree of 90- and 180-degrees.

None - Suppresses angle information on the isometric drawing.

Defines

OS 67 Pos 2

See also AngleType (on page 243)

Styles


AngleType

Controls whether the angles output for bends and elbows are the included or deflected angle.

Deflected

Included

If set, AText -396 is combined with the angle information and displayed on the isometric

drawing.

If not set (default), only the angle information is output.

Defines

OS 67 Pos 3

See also AngleStyle (on page 243)

Styles


CptAttributesEnclStyle

Contains the text output to the data definition file for the component attribute enclosure. Adheres

to the following format:

Message-Type Attribute

Message-Types:

MESSAGE-POINTED

MESSAGE-ROUND

MESSAGE-TRIANGLE

MESSAGE-DIAMOND

MESSAGE-SQUARE

MESSAGE-CIRCLE

MESSAGE-UNBOXED

Attributes:

COMPONENT-NAME

COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 to COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10

You can output attributes to the following:

Material list (Variable and UserDefined)

Printed material list

Material control file

Cut list report

Cut list file

Styles


AdditionalEnclosureStyle

Allows the normal enclosure styles to have either an additional box output below the part number box, or extend the part number box by a specified number of blank spaces.

Type 1:

None - No additional enclosure style.

Type 1 Square

Type 1 Round

Type 1 Diamond

Type 2:

Uses the PartNoEnclosureStyle property to define the style of end used with Type 2 additional

enclosure.

Styles


Type 2 Square

Type 2 Round

Type 2 Diamond

The PartNoSpaces property needs to be set to control the number of blank spaces used.

For Type 2, the enclosure style for the box with the part numbers in it is defined using the PartNoEnclosureStyle property.

If the PartNoEnclosureStyle property is set to Circle, Double Circle or Ellipse, then Type 2 AdditionalEnclosureStyle is switched off, as this uses the same setting.

All pipe part numbers, which are usually output as messages along the pipe, are converted to arrowed out type messages.

Styles


Defines

OS 73 Pos 5

OS 76 Pos1

See also PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 266) PartNoSpaces (on page 269)

AdditionalWeldEnclosure

Controls special part number box for welds.

True - Special part number box for welds are displayed size of box controlled by AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces property.

False - Special part number box for welds are not displayed.

Welds must have part numbers and descriptions, and the MLType property must be set to

Special.

Defines

OS 73 Pos 6,7

See also AdditionalEnclosureStyle (on page 245) AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces (on page 248) PartNoEnclSize (on page 268) PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 266) PartNoSpaces (on page 269) PartNovisible (on page 269)

Styles


AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces

Sets the number of spaces used when AdditionalWeldEnclosure is set to True.

Value - Specifies the number of spaces to be used. A default value of 2 is used if no value is set.

Defines

OS 73 Pos 6,7

See also AdditionalEnclosureStyle (on page 245) AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces (on page 248) PartNoEnclSize (on page 268) PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 266) PartNoSpaces (on page 269) PartNovisible (on page 269)

BendRadius

Controls the radius depiction on the isometric for bends, if BendRepresentation is set to

Round.

Value - Type a real value in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units on

the Options dialog box. Minimum 3mm radius, maximum 9mm radius. In the following example, the BendRadius is 8mm.

The default radius used for bends is 3mm.

See also BendRepresentation (on page 249)

Styles


BendRepresentation

Controls the representation of bends on the isometric.

Square

Round

ComponentLegLength

Controls the plotted component leg lengths of elbows and fitting tees and crosses. This leg length control facility does not apply to fabricated (pulled) bends or set-on (stub-in) type tees or crosses.

Value - Set to the required leg length in whole mms. For example, for a 12mm leg length, type 12. If you set the Value to 0, the software uses a default value of 9mm. The maximum value allowed is 18mm; the minimum value allowed is 6mm.

Use the ComponentLegLength control with care. Long leg lengths take up more space on the drawing and can sometimes have an adverse effect on the finished isometric

Defines

OS 95 Pos 1

Styles


ComputeNozzleAxis

Controls the calculation of Nozzle axes directions and insertion of this information into the PCF (Piping Component File) when using the Pcfgen program.

True - Nozzle axis direction calculated and inserted into the PCF.

False - No calculation of Nozzle axis direction calculated or output to the PCF.

Currently not in use - leave set at False.

Defines

OS 111 Pos 2

CptTagEnclStyle

Controls the enclosure shapes used for components if CptTagsStyle is set to Boxed.

Square Ended Box

Diamond Ended Box

Round Ended Box

Triangular

Diamond

Square Ended Box

Circular

Elliptical

Hexagonal

Defines

OS 60 Pos 3

See also CptTagsStyle (on page 251)

Styles


CptTagsStyle

Controls the plotting of tags/names on most pipeline components.

None - Does not plot tags/names.

Boxed - Plots and boxes in tags/names.

Unboxed - Plots tags/names without boxing in.

Tagging of pipe and pipeline elements made from pipe is not supported.

For instruments, see InstIDEnclosureStyle (on page 257).

Defines

OS 60 Pos 1

See also CptTagEnclStyle (on page 251)

CutPieceNoLength

Sets a fixed (1-9 characters or variable) length for part numbers.

Value - Specify from 1-9 to set the number of characters or set as variable.

Defines

OS 72 Pos 2

See also CutPieceEnclosureStyle (on page 252)

Styles


CutPieceEnclosureStyle

Controls the shape of the enclosure used to surround the cut piece numbers on the isometric.

<n> Default

Circle

Diamond

Diamond Ends

Double Circle

Double Ellipse

Hexagon Ends

Round Ends

Square Ends

Triangle

Defines

OS 2 Pos 7, 8.

See also

CutPieceNoLength (on page 252)

ElbowRadius

Controls the radius depiction on the isometric for elbows, if ElbowRrepresentation is Round.

Value - Type a real value in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in

the Options dialog box. Minimum 3mm radius, maximum 9mm radius. In the following illustration, the ElbowRadius is 45mm.

The default radius used for elbows is 3 mm.

See also ElbowRepresentation (on page 253)

Styles


ElbowRepresentation

Controls the representation of elbows on the isometric.

Square

Round

FallCutOff

Controls the cut-off value used when determining what steepness of slope is treated as a fall. Slopes steeper than the cut-off value are shown with a 2D or 3D box or triangle skew indication as appropriate.

0 - Default for 5° angle cut-off or its equivalent depending upon the type of indication selected by the FallRepresentation property .

Value - Where value is set to a cut-off number to suit the type of indication selected by the FallRepresentation property.

For fall cut off of 5 Degrees, type 5 or 0.

For fall cut off of 1:11 Ratio, type 11.

For fall cut off of 9 Percent, type 9.

For fall cut off of 5 Grads, type 5.

For fall cut off of 1" Per foot, type 1.

For fall cut off of 88 mm per meter, type 88.

Always set FallCutOff to 0 when sloping pipeline indication has been suppressed by the FallRepresentation property .

Defines

OS 20

See also FallRepresentation (on page 255)

Styles


FallRepresentation

Controls how sections of falling pipelines (downward slopes) are to be indicated on the

isometric. It determines the method of how the fall value is to be indicated numerically on the isometric, as specified by one of the options shown below.

None - suppress falling line indication.

D deg - Angle output to nearest degree.

D.d deg - Angle output to nearest 1/10th degree.

D.dd deg - Angle output to nearest 1/100th degree.

deg.min - Angle output in degrees and minutes.

Ratio~5 (>1:30) - Ratio output to nearest 5 when greater than 1:30.

Ratio~5 (>1:100) - Ratio output to nearest 5 when greater than 1:100.

Ratio~1 - Ratio always output to nearest 1.

G grad - Gradient output to nearest grad.

G.g grad - Gradient output to nearest 1/10th grad.

G.gg grad1 - Gradient output to nearest 1/100th grad.

P% - Percentage output to nearest whole value.

P.p% - Percentage output to nearest 1 decimal place.

P.pp% - Percentage output to nearest 2 decimal place.

Incline~1/16th"/ft - Incline output to nearest 16th of an inch per foot.

Incline~1/100"/ft - Incline output to nearest 100th of an inch per foot.

Incline~1mm/m - Incline output to nearest mm per metre.

Incline~5mm/m - Incline output to nearest 5 mm per metre.

Incline~10mm/m - Incline output to nearest 10 mm per metre.

Defines

OS 19

See also FallCutOff (on page 254)

FlangeRotationStyle

Controls the enclosure box styles that can be used for the output of flange rotation angles on the isometric, when ShowFlangeRotation is set to True.

No box - For un-boxed angle output.

Diamond ends - For diamond-ended enclosure box.

Styles


Round ends - For round-ended enclosure box.

Square ends - For square- ended enclosure box.

Defines

OS 124 Pos 2

See also ShowFlangeRotation (on page 171)

FlowArrowScale

Controls the scale of flow arrows that are plotted directly on the pipe. Their purpose is to show the flow direction of fluid or gas in the pipeline.

Value - Plots pipeline flow arrows at an alternative scale factor (default 8) in the range value 5 to 15 inclusive (value 5 gives smaller arrows, 15 larger).

This type of flow arrow can only be generated if the relevant information is included in the input Pipeline data file.

You can also use a separate type of flow arrow--which is plotted alongside in-line fittings--either as well as or instead of, the flow arrow annotation output on pipe.

Defines

OS 112 Pos 1,2

See also ShowCptFlowArrows (on page 171)

GhostGapDimension

Controls the plotted length of a ghost gap element.

A ghost gap element is a physical gap on the plotted isometric that can be used when generating

individual pipeline isometrics, or as a link between related, but unconnected, pipelines on a system type isometric.

0 - Default for the normal minimum gap as controlled by the ISOGEN program.

Value - Where value (real number) is the user-defined minimum gap dimension in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.

The smallest allowable gap is 18 mm.

The largest allowable gap is 60 mm.

The software defaults to using the appropriate maximum value if it detects a setting outside these limits.

Defines

OS 110

I

Styles


nstIDEnclosureSize

Controls the plotting of Instrument name in a balloon type enclosure.

No Balloon- Does not plot a balloon around the instrument name.

1 character - Plots a balloon size at least 1 character on each line.

2 character - Plots a balloon size at least 2 characters on each line.


A two line name output is derived by inputting a $ character in the name at the point a new-line is required, such as CV$101.



A variety of other box type enclosures is available by using the InstIDEnclosureStyle property .

Defines

OS 123 Pos 1

See also InstIDEnclosureStyle (on page 257)

Styles


InstIDEnclosureStyle

Controls the alternative instrument ID enclosure style.

No Box - Reverts to using the setting for InstIDEnclosureSize .

Diamond - Displays a diamond-ended box enclosure.

Round - Displays a round-ended box enclosure.

Triangular - Displays a triangle-shaped box enclosure.

Styles


Diamond - Displays a diamond-shaped box enclosure.

Square - Displays a square-ended box enclosure.

Circle - Displays a circular-shaped box enclosure.

Ellipse - Displays an elliptical-shaped box enclosure.

Hexagon - Displays a hexagonal-shaped box enclosure.

To reduce the chances of these enclosures becoming quite large, especially the diamond and triangle enclosures, limit the display to only 2 or 3 characters.

Defines

OS 123 Pos 3

See also InstIDEnclosureSize (on page 256)

Styles


InstIdentification

Controls which particular 3D design system parameter is used by ISOGEN for instrument identification on the material list or any material control file that is generated. Typically, 3D

design systems have parameters for both the instrument name (tag) and the specification reference (Item code), but only one of these can be selected for output.

Use Tag - Outputs the default for the Instrument name (tag).

Use Item Code - Outputs the specification reference (item code) of the instrument.

Defines

OS 59

InsulationStyle

Controls the plotting of insulation indication on the isometric in the form of a chain dotted line

on one side of the pipe and optionally, alongside components.

None - Suppresses insulation indication.

Alongside Pipe - Plots dashed insulation lines alongside pipe only, with a gap of 1mm.

Alongside Pipe and Components - Plots dashed insulation lines alongside pipe and all components, both with a 1mm gap.

Defines

OS 62

MessageCircleEnclosure

Controls the physical size of the circle enclosure used to contain user input messages.

This is achieved by specifying a mixture of new line and blank character indicators that will be

used by the program to 'pad- out' the normal message record to effectively increase the size of the enclosure. The size of the text (set by the TextSize property) displayed within any increased size enclosure is not increased in size.

The data string associated with each identifier consists of a combination of @, $ and ? characters.

The @ character is used to signal a blank (space) requirement.

The $ character is used to signal a new line requirement.

The ? character is used to indicate where the actual data from the declared record should be located in the 'padded-out' record.

Styles


Setting the value to the text string @@?@@ increases the message circle as shown in the following illustration:

The circle message enclosure should ideally only contain two or three characters, and should also be used with care, as a large circle message considerably affects the isometric representation.

See also TextSize (on page 294)

MessageDiamondEnclosure

Controls the physical size of the diamond enclosure used to contain user input messages.

This is achieved by specifying a mixture of new line and blank character indicators that will be used by the program to 'pad- out' the normal message record to effectively increase the size of the enclosure. The size of the text (set by the TextSize property) displayed within any increased size enclosure is not increased in size.





Setting the value to the text string @@?@@ increases the message diamond as shown in the following illustration:

Styles


The diamond message enclosure should ideally only contain two or three characters, and should also be used with care, as a large circle message considerably affects the isometric representation.

See also


MessagePointedEnclosure

Controls the physical size of the pointed-ended enclosure used to contain user input messages.

This is achieved by specifying a mixture of new line and blank character indicators that will be used by the program to 'pad- out' the normal message record to effectively increase the size of the enclosure. The size of the text (set by the TextSize property) displayed within any increased

size enclosure is not increased in size.

The data string associated with each identifier consists of a combination of @, $ and ?

characters.




Setting the value to the text string @@?@@ increases the pointed-ended message as shown in the following illustration:

Use the pointed-ended message with care, as a large pointed-end message considerably affects the isometric representation.

See also


Styles


MessageRoundEnclosure

Controls the physical size of the round-ended enclosure used to contain user input messages.






Setting the value to the text string @@?@@ increases the round-ended message as shown in the following illustration:

Use the round-ended message with care, as a large round-end message considerably affects the isometric representation.

See also


MessageSquareEnclosure

Controls the physical size of the square enclosure used to contain user input messages.





Styles



Setting the value to the text string @@?@@ increases the square message as shown in the following illustration:

Use the square message with care, as a large square message considerably affects the isometric representation.

See also


MessageTriangleEnclosure

Controls the physical size of the triangle enclosure used to contain user input messages.

This is achieved by specifying a mixture of new line and blank character indicators that will be used by the program to 'pad- out' the normal message record to effectively increase the size of the enclosure. The size of the text (set by the TextSize property) displayed within any increased

size enclosure is not increased in size.


characters.




Setting the value to the text string @@?@@ increases the triangle message as shown in the following illustration:

Styles


The triangle message enclosure should ideally only contain two or three characters, and should also be used with care, as a large triangle message considerably affects the isometric representation.

See also


MultiPortConnections

Controls the connection leg depiction of multi-port components.

All Dotted - Dotted connection lines on all multi-port connections.

Dotted for Clarity - Dotted connection lines are only generated when necessary for picture

clarity, such as here two or more ports are positioned on the same side with attached pipework running parallel to each other.

Not shown - No dotted connection lines shown.

Defines

OS 95 Pos 5

NorthArrowBox

Controls whether the North arrow, as specified in the NorthDirection property, is displayed in an enclosing box.

True - For the North arrow to have an enclosing box.

False - For the North arrow not to have an enclosing box.

Defines

OS 42

See also NorthDirection (on page 185)

OletBranchOrientationMessage

Controls the output of an orientation message on undeveloped olet branches that are in primary directions.

Create Orientation Message - Outputs an orientation message on undeveloped olet branches in a primary direction.

No Message - Suppresses output of an orientation message on the isometric drawing.

Defines

OS 70 Pos 4

Styles


OrientationFrom

Controls the output of skew orientation.

Previous Position - Orientation direction message showing rotation relative to previous position.

Primary Direction - Orientation direction message showing rotation from primary direction.

Defines

OS 70 Pos 3

PartNoEnclosureStyle

Controls the shape of the box enclosure used to surround the standard type of material list part numbers on the isometric.

None - No enclosure box - only part numbers plotted.

Styles


Square Ends

Round Ends

Diamond Ends

Circle

Double Circle

Styles


Ellipse

The size of the circle, double circle and ellipse is drawn at is controlled by the PartNoEnclosureSize property (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure is dynamically adjusted to suit.

Defines

OS 76 Pos 1 and 2

See also PartNoEnclSize (on page 268)

PartNoEnclSize

Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle and eclipse enclosure

style. The default is two, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters, or set to Variable, which dynamically sizes the enclosure.

The following example shows the default size of 2 used for the circle enclosure style:

The number of characters defines the minimum size that the circle, double circle and ellipse is drawn at. If there are more characters than the value that is defined, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. If the size is set to Variable, this allows the circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default of 2 characters, but again dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters.

Defines

OS 76 Pos 3

See also AdditionalEnclosureStyle (on page 245) PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 266)

PartNoSpaces (on page 269)

Styles


PartNoSpaces

Sets the number of spaces used in the Type1 and Type2 part number boxes specified by the AdditionalEnclosureStyle property.

Value - Specifies the number of spaces to be used. A default value of 2 is used if no value is set.

Defines

OS 73 Pos 1 and 2 or

OS 73 Pos 3 and 4

See also AdditionalEnclosureStyle (on page 245)

PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 266) PartNoVisible (on page 269) AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces (on page 248) AdditionalWeldEnclosure (on page 248)

PartNoLength

Sets a fixed (1-9 characters or variable) length for part numbers.


Defines

OS 76 Pos 4

See also AdditionalEnclosureStyle (on page 245) PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 266) PartNoVisible (on page 269) AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces (on page 248) AdditionalWeldEnclosure (on page 248)

PartNoVisible

True - Part numbers are displayed.

False - Part numbers are not displayed.

Defines

OS 76 Pos 1

See also AdditionalEnclosureStyle (on page 245)

PartNoEnclosureStyle (on page 266) PartNoSpaces (on page 269) AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces (on page 248) AdditionalWeldEnclosure (on page 248)

Styles


SeparateSpoolUnion

Controls spool break points at unions.

True - A fabrication union connecting fabrication components does not create separate spools.

False - A fabrication union connecting fabrication components creates separate spools.

Defines

OS 39 Pos 7

ShowFlowArrows

Controls the use of flow arrows that are plotted directly on the pipe. Their purpose is to show the

flow direction of fluid or gas in the pipeline. The size of the flow arrow is controlled by the FlowArrowScale property.

True - Shows flow arrows on pipe on isometric.

False - Suppresses flow arrows on pipe on isometric.

This type of glow arrow can only be generated if the relevant information is included in the input Pipeline data file.

You can also use a separate type of flow arrow that is plotted alongside in-line fittings, either

as well as, or instead of, the one output on pipe. For more information, see ShowCptFlowArrows (on page 171).

Defines

OS 112 Pos 1,2

See also FlowArrowScale (on page 256)

SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure

Controls the enclosure style used for site assemblies displayed on the isometric.

None - Displays no box enclosure.

Styles


Diamond - Displays a diamond-ended box enclosure.

Round - Displays a round-ended box enclosure.

Triangular - Displays a triangular-shaped enclosure.

Diamond - Displays a diamond-shaped enclosure.

Rectangular - Displays a rectangular-shaped enclosure.

Styles


Circular - Displays a circular-shaped enclosure.

Double Circle - Displays a circular-shaped enclosure inside another circle.

Ellipse - Displays an elliptical-shaped enclosure.

The site assembly uses AText -478, default J--such as J1 or JA-- to prefix the flange assembly identification.

The size that the circle, double circle and ellipse is drawn at is controlled by the SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize (on page 272) property (default 2 characters) which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit.

Defines

OS 79 Pos 3

See also SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize (on page 272) SiteAssemblyIDs (on page 273) SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing (on page 274)

Styles


SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize

Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle and ellipse enclosure style. The default is 2, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters or set to Variable, which

dynamically sizes the enclosure.

The following example shows the default size of 2 used for a circle style enclosure:

The number of characters defines the minimum size that the circle, double circle and ellipse is drawn at. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure is dynamically adjusted to suit. Setting the size to Variable, allows the circle, double circle and ellipse to be

smaller than the default of 2 characters, but again dynamically adjusts to suit the number of characters.

Defines

OS 79 Pos 9

See also SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure (on page 270) SiteAssemblyIDs (on page 273) SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing (on page 274)

Styles


SiteAssemblyIDs

Controls site assembly information displayed on the isometric.

Off - Flange assembly identification not output.

Numeric - Numeric flange assembly identification.

SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing

Controls whether site assemblies are numbered per drawing or per pipeline.

True - Flange assembly identification per drawing.

False - Flange assembly identification per pipeline.

Defines

OS 79 Pos 2

See also SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure (on page 270) SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize (on page 272)


SiteWeldsNotAssignedToSpools

By default, site welds are assigned to spools if they are adjoining.

True - Site welds assigned to adjoining spools.

False - Site welds not assigned to adjoining spools.

Defines

OS 83 Pos 1

Styles


SkewDimStandout

Controls the dimension line standout distance used on boxed or triangle skew dimensions.

0 - Uses the dimension line standout setting defined in StandOutComposite, except when SkewDimStyle is set to triangle - alternative, in which case the default dimension position is 4 mm.

Value - Where value (real number) is an alternative dimension line standout in mm or

inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. Used when SkewDimStyle is set to Triangle - Skew standout.

Defines

OS 100

See also SkewDimStyle (on page 275) StandOutComposite (on page 217)

SkewDimStyle

Controls whether skewed pipe sections are drawn with either box or triangle skew depiction on the isometric, together with the form of skew dimensioning to be used.

Box - Normal standout - skew box depiction with normal dimensioning.

Triangle - Normal standout - Skew triangle depiction with normal dimensioning.

Triangle - Skew standout - Skewed triangle depiction with normal dimensioning, uses value set in SkewDimStandout.

Triangle - Alternative - Skew triangle depiction with alternative dimensioning. Actual dimensions positioned close to sides of triangle with no witness lines.

Defines

OS 99 Pos 1

See also SkewDimStandout (on page 274)

SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280)

SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282) SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)

Styles


SkewHatchCptGap

Controls the physical size of the un-hatched gaps (white areas) to be left local to the in-line

components that fall within any skew triangle hatching.

0 - For gap local to pipeline of 2.5mm.

Value - Where value (real number) is an alternative gap in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.

Defines

OS 102 Pos 3,4

See also SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewDimStyle (on page 275)

SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281)

SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282) SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)

SkewHatchCutOff

Controls the maximum length of the Hatching lines to be plotted.

Blank - Default for no hatch line cut-off value. All triangles are fully hatched.

Value - Where value (real number) equals hatch line cut-off length in whole mm or inches,

depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. For example, type 25 for a 25mm cut-off value. In this case, hatch lines in excess of 25mm long are not be plotted. This gives a partial hatched effect.

Defines

OS 101 Pos 3,4

See also SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewDimStyle (on page 275)

SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279)

Styles


SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewRepresentation (on page 281)

SkewAngleStyle (on page 282) SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)

SkewHatchDimText

Controls the physical size of the un-hatched gaps (white areas) to be left local to dimensions or text that fall within any Skew triangle hatching.

Blank - Default for gap local to dimensions / text of 1.5mm.


Defines

OS 102 Pos 5,6

See also SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewDimStyle (on page 275) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatching (on page 277)

SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282)


SkewHatching

Controls whether skew triangles are hatched or not.

True - Skew hatching on.

False - Skew hatching off.

Defines

OS 101 Pos 1

See also SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewDimStyle (on page 275) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278)

Styles


SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280)


SkewHatchPipeGap

Controls the physical size of the un-hatched gaps (white areas) to be left local to the pipeline

within any skew triangle hatching.

0 - Default for gap local to pipeline of 2.5mm.


Defines

OS 102 Pos 1,2

See also SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewDimStyle (on page 275) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276)

SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281)


SkewHatchSpacing

Controls the spacing of the hatching lines used in hatched triangles.

Value - Where value (real number) equals an alternative hatch line spacing in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.

Defines

OS 101 Pos 1,2

See also SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277)

Styles


SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280)


SkewInVerticalBranch

Controls the drawing depiction method to be used when a vertical branch connection is to be

made to a sloping (falling) pipeline using a special zero length bend component.

This special bend (which has no length) is used to carry the angle between the vertical branch and the sloping pipeline. Two drawing methods are available. One shows a small 2D skew box

section between the branch and the main pipe, while the other does not.

Where olets are used in such cases, a text message indicates the orientation direction if the

branch is not developed.

True - Default to show the short tee branch leg section of pipe skewed. Olets have an

orientation message instead of a skewed section. Both are dimensioned separately to the connecting pipe.

False - For no separate skew sections, the vertical branch is connected straight into the main pipe. Olets do not have an orientation message. Both are included in a single inclusive dimension.

In both cases the angle between the vertical branch and the sloping (falling) pipeline will be indicated.

Defines

OS 68


SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281)


Styles


SkewMinCpts

Optionally permits simple skewed branch legs to have the normal skew box/triangle enclosure

suppressed and replaced by a single pipe length dimension and a text message giving the branch orientation.

When used to suppress the normal box enclosure, the value set represents the maximum number

of fittings permitted in the branch. Branches found to contain more fittings than this are drawn with the normal skew box/triangle enclosure.

0 - Default for all branches to be drawn with normal skew box/triangle depiction.

Value - Suppress skew box/triangle depiction on branch legs whose number of components is less than or equal to the value set, and output an orientation message.

This facility is only available on straight through branches. Any change in direction along the branch automatically causes the program to default to normal skew box/triangle output.

Defines

OS 70

SkewMixed

A secondary option to SkewDimStyle allows the selection of a mixture of 2D skew triangles and

3D skew box depiction.

True - For mixture of skew indication types - 3D Skews indicated with boxes, 2D skews indicated with triangles.

False - All skew indications similar, as defined in property SkewDimStyle .

Defines

OS 99 Pos 2


SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280)


Styles


SkewOverall

Controls how skew pipe sections containing branch connections are depicted in terms of the

skew indication on the isometric.

Overall - Skews are shown with a series of separate box/triangle enclosures, one per branch.

Individual - A single overall skew is shown.

Defines

OS 97

See also SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276)

SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282)


SkewRepresentation

Controls the method to be used for the depiction of sloping (falling) sections of a pipeline that are skewed in the Horizontal plane.

3D box - Full 3D skew depiction (box or triangle style).

2D Skew + Fall - 2D skew (box or triangle) + fall indicator.

Defines

OS 67

See also SkewDimStandout (on page 274) SkewDimStyle (on page 275) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277)

SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279) SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewAngleStyle (on page 282)

Styles



SkewAngleStyle

Controls the output of Skew angles on skewed section of pipeline.

Not Shown - Skew angles are not output.

With Arrowheads - Skew angle shown with arrow heads on the arc radius.

Without Arrowheads - Skew angles shown without arrow heads on the arc radius.

Defines

OS 99 Pos 3

See also SkewDimStandout (on page 274)

SkewDimStyle (on page 275) SkewHatchCptGap (on page 276) SkewHatchCutOff (on page 276) SkewHatchDimText (on page 277) SkewHatching (on page 277) SkewHatchPipeGap (on page 278) SkewHatchSpacing (on page 278) SkewInVerticalBranch (on page 279)

SkewMinCpts (on page 280) SkewOverall (on page 281) SkewRepresentation (on page 281) SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)

SpecBrkEnclosure

Controls the shape of the enclosure that surrounds the indication of a specification break

(specification change) on the isometric drawing.

Diamond Ended - Displays a diamond-shaped enclosure around the specification break reference on the isometric drawing.

Hexagonal Ended - Displays a hexagonally-shaped enclosure around the specification break reference on the isometric drawing.

None - Suppresses the display of an enclosure around the specification break reference on the isometric drawing..

Round Ended - Displays a round-ended box enclosure around the specification break reference on the isometric drawing.

Square Ended - Displays a square-shaped box enclosure around the specification break reference on the isometric drawing.

Defines

OS 114 Pos 2

See also SpecBrkRepresentation (on page 283)

Styles


SpecBrkRepresentation

Controls how specification breaks (specification changes) are indicated on the isometric.

Single - Indicates a single specification. Boxed message consisting of the new specification reference pointing to the position on the pipeline where the change occurs.

Dual - Indicates two specifications. Two boxed messages containing the current and new specification references are positioned at the point on the pipeline where the change occurs.

Defines

OS 114 Pos 1

See also SpecBrkEnclosure (on page 282)

SpoolIDAllocation

Controls allocation of spool numbers for lone fabrication components.

Allocate Lone IDs - Allocate spool numbers for lone fabrication components.

No Lone IDs - Do not allocate spool numbers for lone fabrication components.

User Spools Only - User controlled pipe spools only--no automatically generated spools.

Defines

OS 39 Pos 6

See also SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284)

SpoolIDSize (on page 286) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolIDLength (on page 288) SpoolDrawingID (on page 288) SpoolIDType (on page 290) SpoolPrefix (on page 290)

SpoolIDContinuation

Controls the spool identifier sequence.

True - For the current spool identifier sequence to continue on to each new drawing.

False - Causes spool identifiers to re-commence at 1 on each new drawing.

Defines

OS 39 Pos 2

See also SpoolIDAllocation (on page 283)

Styles


SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284) SpoolIDSize (on page 286) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287)

SpoolIDLength (on page 288) SpoolDrawingID (on page 288) SpoolIDType (on page 290) SpoolPrefix (on page 290)

SpoolIDEnclosure

Controls the enclosure style for spool identifiers.

None - No enclosure.

Square Brackets - For spool identifiers to be enclosed in the standard square brackets or a double box enclosure.

Diamond Ends - Enclosure to be a diamond-ended box.

Styles


Round - Enclosure to be a round-ended box.

Triangular - Enclosure to be a triangle-shaped box.

Diamond Box - Enclosure to be a diamond-shaped box.

Square Box - Enclosure to be a square-ended box.

Styles


Circle

Double Circle

Ellipse

The size that the circle, double circle and ellipse will be drawn at, is controlled by the

SpoolIDSize property (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit.

Defines

OS 39 Pos 3, 8

See also SpoolIDAllocation (on page 283) SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDSize (on page 286) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolIDLength (on page 288) SpoolDrawingID (on page 288)

SpoolIDType (on page 290) SpoolPrefix (on page 290)

Styles


SpoolIDSize

Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle and ellipse enclosure styles. The default is 2, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters, or set to Variable, which


The following example shows the default size of 2 used for an circle enclosure.

The number of characters defines the minimum size that the circle, double circle and ellipse are drawn at. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically

adjusts to suit. Setting the size to Variable, allows the circle, double circle and ellipse, to be smaller than the default of 2 characters, but again dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters.

Defines

OS 39 Pos 9

See also SpoolIDAllocation (on page 283) SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolIDLength (on page 288)

SpoolDrawingID (on page 288) SpoolIDType (on page 290) SpoolPrefix (on page 290)

SpoolIDEnclosureStyle

Allows the physical size of the SpoolIDEnclosure to be increased.

This is achieved by specifying a mixture of new line and blank character indicators that are used by the software to 'pad- out' the SpoolIDEnclosure record to effectively increase the size of the enclosure. The size of the text (set by TextSize property) displayed within any increased size

enclosure is not be increased in size.


characters.




Styles


Setting the value to the text string @$@@?@@$@ increases the SpoolIDEnclosure with the diamond-end enclosure as shown in the following illustration:

Use the increase in size with care as it affects the isometric representation considerably.

See also SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284) SpoolIDSize (on page 286) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolIDLength (on page 288)

SpoolDrawingID (on page 288) SpoolIDType (on page 290) SpoolPrefix (on page 290) TextSize (on page 294)

SpoolIDLength

Sets a fixed (1-9 characters) or variable length for spool ID length.


Defines

OS 72 Pos 1

See also SpoolIDAllocation (on page 283) SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284) SpoolIDSize (on page 286) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolDrawingID (on page 288)


Styles


SpoolDrawingID

Controls the spool drawing identifier used on Spool isometrics.

Default - The default, which is the pipeline name followed by the spool identifier (set by AText -257 to default of SPL) followed by the spool number, unless the spool has been named, in which case the spool name is used.

No spool name:

Spool named:

7USER - Pipeline name followed by the user Spool name.

If the spool is not named, then the spool drawing identifier will be the same as the default.

Auto Pipeline Ref - Pipeline name followed by spool number, unless the spool has been named, in which case the spool name is used

No spool name:

Spool named:

Styles


Auto Pipeline Filename - Pipeline filename followed by Spool number, unless the Spool

has been named, in which case the Spool name is used. No Spool name:

Spool named:

Defines

OS 39 Pos 4, 5

See also SpoolIDAllocation (on page 283) SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284) SpoolIDSize (on page 286)

SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolIDLength (on page 288) SpoolIDType (on page 290) SpoolPrefix (on page 290)

SpoolIDType

None - Causes the output of spool identifiers to be suppressed.

Numeric - For spool identifiers to be switched on using a numeric system starting at number 1 on the first drawing and incrementing consecutively throughout the pipeline.

Alphabetic - As for value 0 but using an alphabetic system of A, B, C, and so on.

Defines

OS 39 Pos 1

See also SpoolIDAllocation (on page 283) SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284) SpoolIDSize (on page 286) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolIDLength (on page 288) SpoolDrawingID (on page 288)


Styles


SpoolPrefix

Sets a spool prefix (output to DDF).

See also SpoolIDAllocation (on page 283) SpoolIDContinuation (on page 283) SpoolIDEnclosure (on page 284) SpoolIDSize (on page 286) SpoolIDEnclosureStyle (on page 287) SpoolIDLength (on page 288)

SpoolDrawingID (on page 288) SpoolIDType (on page 290)

SupportIdentification

Controls the identification information that is output for pipe supports on the isometric and parts list. For identification purposes, either the support name (tag) or specification reference (item

code) can be used in the combinations listed below.

No Tags / Spec Ref - For no support names (tags) to be output on the isometric and with the specification reference (Item code) output in the Item code field of the material list.

Unboxed Tags / Tags - For support names (tags) output on the isometric un-boxed and Support names in the Item code field of the material list.

Boxed Tags / Spec Ref - For boxed support names (tags) output on the isometric and Specification reference in the Item code field of the material list.

Unboxed Tags - For support names (tags) output on the isometric un-boxed and supports excluded from the material list.

Boxed Tags - For boxed support names (tags) output on the isometric and supports to be excluded from the material list.

Defines

OS 64 Pos 1

SupportTagEnclStyle

If SupportIdentification is set to Boxed Tags / Spec Ref or Boxed Tags, controls the enclosure

shapes used for supports.

Default Rectangle

Round Ends

Diamond Ends

Triangle

Diamond

Rectangle

Circle

Styles


Ellipse

Hexagon

Defines

OS 64 Pos 3

See also SupportIdentification (on page 291)

TapBranchInlineScale

Controls the plotted size of tapped branches on actual fitting components, such as valves, flanges, and so on.

A tapped branch is a collection of components attached to a connection tapping point. The components in a tapped branch can be scaled up or down from the size used for the main pipeline.

0 - Default for no tapped branch scaling. Tapped branches shown the same size as the main pipeline (100%).

Value - Where value is a number that represents an alternative tapped branch scaling factor. For example, type 110 to increase scaling, 90 to decrease scaling.

Note: 50% is the minimum recommended value.

Defines

OS 120 Pos 1,2,3

TapBranchPipeScale

Controls the plotted size of tapped branches on pipe type components, such as elbows, tees, pipe, and so on.


0 - Default for tapped branch scaling at 65% of main pipeline size.

Value - Where value is a number that represents an alternative tapped branch scaling factor. For example, type 80 to increase scaling, 45 to decrease scaling.

Defines

OS 120 Pos 4,5

Styles


TapBranchSuppression

Tapped branch connections can sometimes be difficult to draw clearly on an isometric, particularly where a number of fittings are in close proximity. ISOGEN suppresses the drawing

of tapped branches for particular components. This allows the alternative of using a detailed sketch to show branch connections instead.

Where tapped branches have been suppressed, part numbers and weld numbers can still be

output on the isometric.

The suppressed components are defined by either by component type SKEY--such as

VALVEVB**-- or component type as follows:

ALL - Suppress the output of all tapped branches.

PIPE - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on pipe.

FITTING - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on fittings.

FLANGE - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on flanges.

VALVE - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on valves.

INSTRUMENT - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on instruments.

MISC-ITEM - Suppress the output of all tapped branches on misc. components.

Double-clicking this property opens the TapBranchSuppression dialog box, into which you can type the component types you want to suppress.

TeeCrossNS

Controls the nominal size (N.S.) output at set-on type tees and crosses.

Combined - Nominal size output at set-on tees and crosses shown as combined.

Styles


Separate - Nominal size output at set-on tees and crosses shown separately.

Defines

OS 41 Pos 9

TestIso

Allows test isometrics to be produced for proving isometric output, or to resolve drawing production issues.

True - Generates a normal isometric.

False - Generate a test isometric with all dimensions and Material list quantities output as X's.

Defines

OS 21 Pos 3

TextFont

Defines the font used when outputting text on the isometric. Use the TextFont list to specify the font type.

Defines

OS 4 Pos 7,8,9

See also TextWeight (on page 295)

TextSize (on page 294) TextWidth (on page 296) UserTextSize (on page 295)

Styles


TextSize

Controls the physical size of the characters that are used for dimensions, coordinates and message text on the 'picture section' of the isometric.

Small (2.1 mm) - For small characters - 2.1mm high.

Medium (2.5 mm) - Default - for medium size characters - 2.4mm high.

Large (2.8 mm) - For large size characters - 2.8mm high.

XLarge (3.5 mm) - For extra large characters - 3.5mm high.

XXLarge (4.2 mm) - For extra large characters - 4.2mm high.

XXXLarge (4.9 mm) - For extra large characters - 4.9mm high.

Or User - For characters with a height defined in the UserTextSize property .

Title block text, which is always output using large characters (2.8mm) and material list text, which is controlled by properties of the material list object, are not affected by this setting.

Defines

OS 4 Pos 1

See also TextFont (on page 294) TextWeight (on page 295) TextWidth (on page 296)


UserTextSize

Controls the text size in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. Set the value (real number) required.

Only applicable if TextSize is set to User.

Defines

OS 4 Pos 1,2

See also Options (on page 77) TextFont (on page 294)

TextSize (on page 294) TextWeight (on page 295) TextWidth (on page 296)

Styles


TextWeight

Controls the character thickness. Specify a value between 1 and 9. Used only for MicroStation.

Defines

OS 4 Pos 5

See also TextSize (on page 294) TextWidth (on page 296)


TextWidth

Controls the text width (Fixed fonts only) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the

drawing units set on the Options dialog box. Type the value required as a real number.

Defines

OS 4 Pos 3,4

See also


TracingStyle

Controls the plotting of tracing indication on the isometric in the form of a chain dotted line on one side of the pipe and optionally, alongside components.

Alongside Pipe - Default to have chain dotted tracing lines plotted alongside pipe only, with a gap of 1mm.

None - To suppress tracing indication.

Alongside Pipe and Components - To have chain dotted tracing lines plotted alongside pipe and all components, both with a 1mm gap.

Defines

OS 62

Styles


ReferenceNameStyle

Controls the physical size of the characters that are used for dimensions, co-ordinates and message text on the 'picture section' of the isometric.

Default (Along Reference Lines)

1 Character Circular Enclosure

2 Characters

3 Characters

4 Characters

5 Characters

6 Characters

7 Characters

8 Characters

9 Characters

Defines

OS 123 Pos 5

Styles


CurvedPipeAngleStyle


Suppress - Suppress curved pipe angles.

With dimension - Output curved pipe angles as part of dimensions.

Defines

OS 84 Pos 2

CurvedPipeRadiusStyle


Message - Output curved pipe radii as a message.

Suppress - Suppress curved pipe radii.

Defines

OS 84 Pos 3

Styles


Drawing Layers Object

The Drawing Layers object contains a collection called Layers, which is used to store the

definitions of the layer names and colors assigned to layer numbers.

The Count property, defined by the software, displays the number of definitions in the Layers collection.

When you click the Drawing Layers object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel displays its two properties:

DefaultColour (on page 299)

Count (on page 299)

DefaultColour

Defines the color used for any layer which is not defined with its own color. The property requires an integer number representing the color number as defined in the output drawing system, such as MicroStation or AutoCAD.

Count

Displays the number of layers defined in the current style (and stored in the Drawing Layer Layers collection (see "Drawing Layers Layers Collection" on page 300)).

Styles


Drawing Layers Layers Collection

The Drawing Layers Layers collection stores the definitions of the layer names and colors

assigned to layer numbers.

The value that appears in parentheses after the collection name is a count of how many definitions are stored in the collection.


LayerColour (on page 300)

LayerNumber (on page 300)

Name (on page 300)

You can modify collection properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which

pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value.

LayerColour

Specifies the integer number representing the color number as defined in the output drawing

system (MicroStation or AutoCAD).

LayerNumber

Specifies the integer number that corresponds to the layer used in the Drawing Definitions

collection (see "Drawing Definitions Definitions Collection" on page 196) .

Name

Specifies the name for the layer with this LayerNumber (on page 300).

Styles


Drawing Welds Object

The Drawing Welds object control which welds are shown on the isometric, how they are

numbered, and what enclosures are used.

When you click the Drawing Welds object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the

properties that are currently defined for that object.


ShowWelds (on page 303)

ShowWeldNumbers (on page 303)

ImpliedWelds (on page 303)

GeneralPrefix (on page 303)

GeneralWeldStartNo (on page 303)

WeldNumbers (on page 303)

showFabWeldNos (on page 304)

ShowFabWeldPrefix (on page 304)

FabPrefix (on page 305)

FabWeldStartNo (on page 305)

MessageArrowHeads (on page 305)

FabWeldEnclosure (on page 305)

Styles


FabWeldEnclSize (on page 308)

ShowErectWeldNos (on page 308)

ShowErectWeldPrefix (on page 308)

OffshorePrefix (on page 312)

OffshoreWeldStartNo (on page 312)

OffshoreWeldEnclosure (on page 312)

OffshoreWeldEnclSize (on page 314)

ShowFabSupportWeldNos (on page 314)

ShowFabSupportWeldPrefix (on page 314)

FabSupportPrefix (on page 315)

FabSupportWeldStartNo (on page 315)

FabSupportWeldEnclosure (on page 315)

FabSuppWeldEnclSize (on page 317)

ShowErectSupportWeldNos (on page 317)

ShowErectSupportWeldPrefix (on page 318)

ErectSupportPrefix (on page 318)

ErectSupportWeldStartNo (on page 318)

ErectSupportWeldEnclosure (on page 318)

ErecSuppWeldEnclSize (on page 320)

ShowOffshoreSupportWeldNos (on page 321)

ShowOffshoreSupportWeldPrefix (on page 321)

OffshoreSupportPrefix (on page 321)

OffshoreSupportWeldStartNo (on page 322)

OffshoreSuppWeldEnclSize (on page 324)

SpoolMatchesPipe (on page 324)

SupportWeldNumbers (on page 325)

SupportWeldSeq (on page 325)

SupportWeldTypeNos (on page 325)

TypeSequenceNumbers (on page 326)

WeldNumberSequence (on page 326)

WeldNumberSize (on page 326)

WeldNumberLength (on page 327)

WeldNumberType (on page 327)

WeldTypeIdentifiers (on page 328)

Styles


ShowWelds

Controls whether welds are shown on the plotted isometric.

True - Welds are shown.

False - Welds are not shown.

The WeldTypes property allows a separate control on the different categories of weld that

can be output. For more information, see Weld Logic (on page 572).

Defines

OS 53, Pos 1

OS 54, Pos 1

ShowWeldNumbers

Controls whether welds are numbered and shown on the isometric.

True - Show weld numbers on the plotted isometric.

False - Suppress weld numbers on the plotted isometric.

This is a general control. There is also a separate control for all other supported weld

types. For more information, see Weld Logic (on page 572).

Defines

OS 53 Pos 1

ImpliedWelds

Controls the creation of implied welds, such as those welds that are not explicitly defined in the PCF or IDF.

True - Generates implied welds.

False - Suppresses implied welds.

Defines

OS 53, Pos 8

GeneralPrefix

General weld prefix used when none of the separate weld prefixes are set.

GeneralWeldStartNo

Sets a general start weld number in the WDF.

Styles


WeldNumbers

Controls the generation of weld numbers for any welds that do not have weld numbers defined in the PCF or IDF. This property interacts with WeldNumberSequence and SpoolMatchesPipe. If

WeldNumbers is set to Suppress, then this property takes precedence over the other two when setting the value.

True - Generates weld numbers.

False - Suppresses weld numbers.

Defines

OS 53, Pos 8

See also WeldNumberSequence (on page 326) SpoolMatchesPipe (on page 324)

ShowFabWeldNos

True - Show fabrication weld numbers on the plotted isometric.

False - Suppress fabrication weld numbers on the plotted isometric.

Defines

OS 75 Pos 1

ShowFabWeldPrefix

True - Show fabrication weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.

False - Suppress fabrication weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.

Defines

OS 75 Pos 2

Styles


FabPrefix

Sets the prefix used for fabrication type welds. In the following illustration, the prefix is set to F.

FabWeldStartNo

Sets a start weld number for fabrication welds in the weld definition file (WDF).

MessageArrowHeads

Controls whether messages to welds (including weld numbers and attributes) should have arrowheads attached to message leader lines.

On - Show arrowheads on message leader lines.

Off - Suppress arrowheads on message leader lines.

Defines

OS 54, Pos 9

Styles


FabWeldEnclosure

Controls the enclosure style for fabrication welds.

Default Circle - Fixed-sized circle.

Diamond End - Diamond-ended box.

Round End - Round-ended box.

Small Triangle - Small triangular-shaped enclosure.

Small Diamond - Small diamond-shaped enclosure.

Square - Square-ended box.

Styles


Dynamic Circle - Dynamically-sized double circle.

Double Circle - Dynamically-sized double circle.

Ellipse - Elliptical enclosure.

None - No weld number enclosure.

All the previous illustrations use weld prefixes except for Default Circle, where weld prefixes cannot be used, as this is limited to numeric values (3 characters maximum).

The size that the Circle, Double Circle and Ellipse are drawn at is controlled by the

FabWeldEnclSize property (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit.

When the weld number enclosure style is not the original circular type, then the weld number character size is controlled by the TextSize property and not the WeldNumberSize property.

Defines

OS 75 Pos 1, 7

See also FabWeldEnclSize (on page 308) WeldNumberSize (on page 326) TextSize (on page 294)

Styles


FabWeldEnclSize

Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle and ellipse enclosure

style. The default is 2, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters, or set to Variable, which dynamically sizes the enclosure.

The number of characters defines the minimum size at which the circle, double circle and ellipse enclosures are drawn. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure

dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting the size to Variable allows the circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default of 2 characters, but again all will dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters.

Defines

OS 54 Pos 2

ShowErectWeldNos

True -Show erection weld numbers on the plotted isometric.

False - Suppress erection weld numbers on the plotted isometric.

Defines

OS 75 Pos 3

ShowErectWeldPrefix

True - Adds weld prefix to weld number.

False - No weld prefix added to weld number.

Defines

OS 75 Pos 4

Styles


ErectPrefix

Sets the prefix used for erection type welds.

In the following illustration, the prefix is set to E.

ErectWeldStartNo

Sets a start weld number for erection welds in the weld definition file (WDF).

ErectWeldEnclosure

Controls the enclosure style for erection welds.

All of the following illustration use weld prefixes, except for the default circle where weld prefixes cannot be used, as this is limited to numeric values, 3 characters maximum.





Styles




Dynamic Circle - Dynamically-sized circle.




The size that the circle, double circle and ellipse are drawn at is controlled by the ErecWeldEnclSize property (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit.

Styles


When the weld number enclosure style is not the original circular type then the weld number

character size is controlled by the TextSize property and not WeldNumberSize property.

Defines

OS 75 Pos 3, 8

See also ErecWeldEnclSize (on page 311) TextSize (on page 294) WeldNumberSize (on page 326)

ErecWeldEnclSize



The number of characters defines the minimum size at which the circle, double, circle, and ellipse are drawn. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting the size to Variable allows the circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default 2 characters, while also allowing the enclosure to

dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters.

Defines

OS 54 Pos 3

ShowOffshoreWeldNos

True - Shows offshore weld numbers on the plotted isometric.

False - Suppresses offshore weld numbers on the plotted isometric.

Defines

OS 75 Pos 5

Styles


ShowOffshoreWeldPrefix

True - Shows offshore weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.

False - Suppresses offshore support weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.

OffshorePrefix

Sets the prefix used for offshore type welds.

In the following illustration, the prefix is set to O.

OffshoreWeldStartNo

Sets a start weld number for offshore welds in the weld definition file (WDF).

OffshoreWeldEnclosure

Controls the enclosure style for offshore welds.




Styles









Styles


OffshoreWeldEnclSize



The number of characters defines the minimum size at which the circle, double, circle,

and ellipse are drawn. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting the size to Variable allows the circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default 2 characters, while also allowing the enclosure to dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters.

Defines

OS 54 Pos 4

ShowFabSupportWeldNos

True - Shows fabrication support weld numbers on the plotted isometric.

False - Suppresses fabrication support weld numbers on the plotted isometric.

Defines

OS 78 Pos 1

ShowFabSupportWeldPrefix

True - Supports weld prefix to be added to weld number.

False - No weld prefix to be added.

Defines

OS 78 Pos 2

Styles


FabSupportPrefix

Sets the prefix used for fabrication support welds.

In the following illustration, the prefix is set to FS.

FabSupportWeldStartNo

Sets a start weld number for fabrication support welds in the weld definition file (WDF).

FabSupportWeldEnclosure

Controls the enclosure style for fabrication support welds.





Styles










FabSuppWeldEnclSize property (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit.

Styles


When the weld number enclosure style is not the original circular type, then the weld number character size is controlled by the TextSize property and not the WeldNumberSize property.

Defines

OS 78 Pos 1, 7

See also WeldNumberSize (on page 326) TextSize (on page 294)

FabSuppWeldEnclSize

Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle and ellipse enclosure style. The default is 2, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters, or set to Variable, which


The number of characters defines the minimum size that at which the circle, double, circle, and ellipse are drawn. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting the size to Variable allows the circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default 2 characters, while also allowing the enclosure to dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters.

Defines

OS 54 Pos 5

ShowErectSupportWeldNos

True - Shows erection support weld numbers on the plotted isometric.

False - Suppresses erection support weld numbers on the plotted isometric.

Defines

OS 78 Pos 3

Styles


ShowErectSupportWeldPrefix

True - Support weld prefix to be added to Weld number.

False - No Weld prefix to be added.

Defines

OS 78 Pos 4

ErectSupportPrefix

Sets the prefix used for erection support welds.

In the following illustration, the prefix is set to ES.

ErectSupportWeldStartNo

Sets a start weld number for erection support welds in the weld definition file (WDF).

ErectSupportWeldEnclosure

Controls the enclosure style for erection support welds.



Styles








Styles






ErectSuppWeldEnclSize property (default 2 characters), which defines the minimum size for the enclosure. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit.

When the weld number enclosure style is not the original circular type, then the weld number character size is controlled by the TextSize property and not the WeldNumberSize

property.

See also WeldNumberSize (on page 326)


Styles


ErecSuppWeldEnclSize

Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle and ellipse enclosure style. The default is 2, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters, or set to Variable, which


The number of characters defines the minimum size that the circle, double circle, and ellipse are drawn at. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting the size to Variable allows the circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default 2 characters, while also allowing the enclosure to dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters.

Defines

OS 54 Pos 6

ShowOffshoreSupportWeldNos

True - Shows offshore support weld numbers on the plotted isometric.

False - Suppresses offshore support weld numbers on the plotted isometric.

Defines

OS 78 Pos 5

ShowOffshoreSupportWeldPrefix

True - Shows offshore support weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.

False - Suppresses offshore support weld prefixes on the plotted isometric.

Defines

OS 78 Pos 6

Styles


OffshoreSupportPrefix

Sets the prefix used for offshore support welds.

In the following illustration, the prefix is set to OS.

OffshoreSupportWeldStartNo

Sets a start weld number for offshore support welds in the weld definition file (WDF).

OffshoreSupportWeldEnclosure

Controls the enclosure style for offshore support welds.


Styles








Styles





OffshoreSuppWeldEnclSize

Controls the number of characters used for the size of circle, double circle and ellipse enclosure style. The default is 2, and the valid entries are from 1 to 8 characters, or set to Variable, which dynamically sizes the enclosure.

The number of characters defines the minimum size at which the circle, double, circle, and ellipse are drawn. If there are more characters than the value that is set, the enclosure dynamically adjusts to suit. Setting the size to Variable allows the circle, double circle and ellipse to be smaller than the default 2 characters, while also allowing the enclosure to dynamically adjust to suit the number of characters.

Defines

OS 54 Pos 7

Styles


SpoolMatchesPipe

Controls whether the weld numbers on the spool isometric match those on the full isometric.

True - Spool isometric weld numbers to match full isometric weld numbers.

False - Spool isometric Weld numbers done separately.

For spool weld numbers to match the full isometric numbers, the properties that affect the number of welds and the sequence used must be the same for both spool and full styles.

Defines

OS 53 Pos 3

See also WeldNumbers (on page 303)

SupportWeldNumbers

Controls whether support welds are numbered separately from standard welds.

True - Support welds are numbered separately.

False - Support welds use the same sequence as Standard welds.

If set to True, then the SupportWeldTypeNos property is used to decide whether each category of weld has its own sequence or not.

Defines

OS 53 Pos 6

See also SupportWeldTypeNos (on page 325)

SupportWeldSeq

Controls whether the support weld numbers continue across drawings, or start again on each new

drawing.

Per Drawing - Support weld numbering sequence starts again on each drawing.

Continuous - Support weld numbering sequence starts again on each drawing.

The numbers used depend on the settings of the SupportWeldTypeNos property .

Defines

OS 53 Pos 7

See also SupportWeldTypeNos (on page 325)

Styles


SupportWeldTypeNos

Controls whether support weld numbers are separate for each support weld category or not.

True - For each support weld category to have its own sequence of numbers.

False - For all support welds to use the same sequence for numbers.

Defines

OS 53 Pos 6

TypeSequenceNumbers

Controls whether there is an individual sequence for weld numbers based on their category (Fabrication, Erection or Offshore) or just one sequence for all welds.

True - Each type of Weld has its own sequence numbers.

False - Single sequence for all Welds.

If set to True, then the SupportWeldNumbers and SupportWeldTypeNos properties allow additional control for support weld numbering.

Defines

OS 53 Pos 5

See also SupportWeldNumbers (on page 325)

SupportWeldTypeNos (on page 325)

WeldNumberSequence

Continuous - For weld number current sequence to continue on each new drawing.

Per drawing - For weld number sequence to restart on each new drawing.

Defines

OS 53 Pos 3

See also WeldNumbers (on page 303)

Styles


WeldNumberSize

Controls the size of characters used for weld numbers.

Small - For small Weld numbers.

Medium - For medium-sized Weld numbers.

Large - For large Weld numbers.

These size values are only valid for the original circular style enclosure. If one of the

alternative enclosure styles is being used, then the TextSize property is used.

Defines

OS 53 Pos 1


WeldNumberLength

Controls the number of characters output for a weld number.

For numeric weld numbers, leading zeros are output; for alphabetic weld numbers, spaces are output

Variable - Outputs the weld number without leading zeros or spaces.

1 to 9 - Sets the number of characters to be output. For example, 3 outputs 001 through to 999 for numeric weld numbers.

Defines

OS 53 Pos 9

WeldNumberType

Controls whether weld numbers are numeric or alphabetic.

Numeric - Numeric weld identifiers.

Alphabetic - Alphabetic weld identifiers. Generates A to Z, and then starts AA, AB, AC, and so on.

Defines

OS 53 Pos 8

Styles


WeldTypes

Controls whether all welds are numbered/plotted or allows single weld category (Fabrication, Erection or Offshore) to be numbered/plotted.

All - All welds are numbered.

Fabrication Only - Only fabrication welds are numbered/plotted.

Erection Only - Only erection welds are numbered/plotted.

Offshore Only - Only offshore welds are numbered/plotted.

Currently, if Offshore Only is set, then erection welds are plotted but not numbered. This is a general control, but there is also a separate control for all six weld types. If the separate weld types are set not to be plotted, then this control still causes a weld number to be generated for those welds so that they can be used on weld reports.

Defines

OS 53 Pos 1, 4

OS 54 Pos 1

WeldTypeIdentifiers

This property holds the text to be output to the weld definition file (WDF) for weld type

identifiers. When you double-click the WeldTypeIdentifiers box, the software opens the WeldTypeIdentifiers text editor, which you can use to input the required data as follows:

1. Piping Specification

2. Minimum Nominal size

3. Maximum Nominal size

4. Weld Type (replacement for BW welds)

5. Wall Thickness / Schedule (optional)

The WELD-TYPE-IDENTIFIER heading is output by SmartPlant I-Configure, and only the

data records are required in the text file.

CS-150 0.5 1.5 B2 80

CS-150 2 6 B3 40

CS-150 8 12 B8 30

The nominal size units are assumed to be those specified by the Drawing Controls Units

property (OS41). This is only used when the weld type is output on the weld operation list or welds report, and replaces the BW weld type identifier. If using the Wall Thickness / Schedule column, and the BW type is not being changed, then BW must be entered on the line.

See also Units (on page 191)

Styles


Drawing Welds WeldEnclosures Object

The Drawing Welds WeldEnclosures object has a collection called WeldEnclosures, which is used to store the definitions of special enclosures. There are several different formats for the

enclosure, which are controlled by the settings of the EnclosureType property. The Drawing

Welds WeldEnclosures object also has a Count property. The property is defined by the software and indicates the number of definitions in the WeldEnclosures collection .

The special weld enclosure supersedes weld enclosure styles set as a property of the Drawing Welds object for each category of weld or all welds, depending on the category setting on the WeldEnclosure collection.

See also Drawing Welds Object (on page 301)

EnclosureType (on page 331) Drawing Welds WeldEnclosures Collection (on page 329)

Count

Displays the number of WeldEnclosures currently defined in the style.

Styles


Drawing Welds WeldEnclosures Collection

The Drawing Welds WeldEnclosures collection is used to define special types of enclosure used for welds, to display attributes set on the weld in the PCF/IDF. You can define the following

properties:

AttributeName (on page 330)

Category (on page 331)

EnclosureType (on page 331)

ForceAllWeldsAsSpecial (on page 332)

NonSpecialPosition (on page 332)

SpecialPosition (on page 333)

Width (on page 333)

See also Add to Collection (on page 23)


Styles


AttributeName

Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Use the AttributeName list to select the required attribute.

Category

Specifies the category. Use the Category list to select the appropriate one:Fabrication, Erection, Offshore or All.

EnclosureType

Controls the type of enclosure to be used.

Pointed

Round

Triangle

Diamond

Square

Circle

Unboxed

SpecialPointed

Styles


SpecialRound

SpecialSquare

ForceAllWeldsAsSpecial

Only applies to objects with the EnclosureType property set to SpecialPointed, SpecialRound, or SpecialSquare and the AttributeName property that maps to WELD-NO.

True - Forces all welds to adopt the special layout for their enclosure.

False - Allows the generation of a enclosure containing only the weld number, when the data for all the other fields in an enclosure are missing.

See also AttributeName (on page 341) EnclosureType (on page 331)

Styles


NonSpecialPosition

Defines the position for the specified weld attribute to be output along the horizontal display. Type the position number.

Applies only to the following enclosure types, all of which allow multiple attributes displayed horizontally:

Pointed

Round

Square

SpecialPosition

Controls selection of the compartment or quadrant (position) for the weld number when weld attributes are to be output in a special enclosure.

Double-click SpecialPosition and then select the position from the list:

In the following example, the weld number is output TopRight, where 1 denotes the weld number and there are three weld attributes (T2, R2 and F8).

You can divide special enclosures into two compartments (top and bottom) or four compartments (quadrants).

The maximum number of compartments is four.

Only applies to SpecialPointed, SpecialRound, or SpecialSquare enclosure types.

The previous example is SpecialRound.

Width

Specifies the number of characters.

Styles


DrawingFrame

DrawingFrame Object

The properties of the DrawingFrame object and its sub-ordinates control the drawing frame and the data which is output on to the drawing frame.

The existing Supplementary TableAttributes object contains the same information as the DrawingFrame TableAttributes object. You can use either object to modify the properties, although the DrawingFrame.TableAttributes object supports real numbers in the XPos and YPos properties.


BottomMargin (on page 335)

TopMargin (on page 335)

LeftMargin (on page 335)

RightMargin (on page 336)

CustomHeight (on page 336)

CustomWidth (on page 336)

DXFUnits (on page 336)

Styles


ReservedAreaDrawing (on page 337)

ReservedAreaDrawingTop (on page 337)

ReservedAreaMatList (on page 337)

TemplateFile (on page 338)

TemplateFormat (on page 338)

Visible (on page 338)

BottomMargin

Defines the bottom margin.

0 - Default for no reserved area.

Value - Specifies the distance between the outer edge of the drawing sheet and the outer line

of the drawing frame that is being used. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units on the Options dialog box.

Defines

OS 13


TopMargin

Defines the top margin.




Defines

OS 12

See also


LeftMargin

Defines the left margin.




Defines

OS 10

Styles


See also


RightMargin

Defines the right margin.




Defines

OS 11

See also


CustomHeight

Defines isometric drawing height for non-standard paper sizes. That is, sizes that do not conform

to either the metric-based European A series or the imperial-based American ANSI sizes.

0 - For non-standard drawing height.

Value - Where value is the overall drawing height in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box

Defines

OS 15


CustomWidth

Defines isometric drawing width for non-standard paper sizes. That is, sizes that do not conform

to either the metric-based European A series or the imperial-based American ANSI sizes.

0 - For non-standard drawing width.

Value - Where value is the overall drawing width in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box

Defines

OS 16


Styles


DXFUnits

mm - Specifies metric units.

Inch - Specifies imperial units.

Defines

OS 92

ReservedAreaDrawing

Defines the reserved area along the bottom of the isometric.

0 - For no reserved area.

Value - Where the value (real number) is equal to the depth of the required reserved area

along the bottom of the isometric, measured from the outer line of the drawing frame. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units on the Options dialog box.

Defines

OS 35 Pos 1, 2, 3


ReservedAreaDrawingTop

Defines the reserved area along the top of the isometric.

0 - For no reserved area.

Value - Where the value (real number) is equal to the depth of the required reserved area

along the bottom of the isometric, measured from the outer line of the drawing frame. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units on the Options dialog box.

Defines

OS 35 Pos 7, 8 and 9


Styles


ReservedAreaMatList

Defines the reserved area along the bottom of the material list.

Blank - For no reserved area.

Value - Where value (real number) is equal to the depth of the required Reserved area along

the bottom of the material list measured from the outer line of the Drawing frame. Type a value in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units on the Options dialog box.

Defines

OS 35 Pos 4, 5, 6


TemplateFile

Specifies the file used for the backing sheet.

1. Double-click in the TemplateFile box.

2. In the Browse for file dialog box, navigate to the required file and then click OK.

TemplateFormat

Select the drawing format for the backing sheet.

Visible

Controls plotting of the standard ISOGEN drawing frame.

It is likely that if you either plot your own design of backing frame or plot to frames on pre-printed forms, you will want to suppress the plotting of the standard ISOGEN drawing frame.

True - Plots the standard ISOGEN drawing frame.

False - Does not plot the standard ISOGEN drawing frame.

Defines

OS 18

Styles


DrawingFrame Attributes Object

The DrawingFrame Attributes object contains a collection called DFAttributes, which is used

to store the definitions of text used on the drawing frame. The DrawingFrame Attributes object also has a Count property. The property is defined by the software and indicates the number of definitions in the DFAttributes collection.

See also Count (on page 339)

DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection (on page 339)

Count

Displays the number of attributes to be plotted in the drawing frame.

Styles


DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection

The DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes collection stores the definitions of text used on the drawing frame. The value that displays in parentheses after the collection name is a count of how

many definitions are stored in the collection.



CharHeight (on page 341)

Xpos (on page 341)

Ypos (on page 342)

Font (on page 342)

BarCode (on page 342)

CharWidth (on page 342)

Justification (on page 342)

Layer (on page 342)

Color (on page 342)

RotationAngle (on page 342)


TruncationLength (on page 342)

ColumnsNumber (on page 342)

Direction (on page 343)

LinesNumber (on page 343)

Xspacing (on page 343)

Styles


Yspacing (on page 343)




AttributeName


CharHeight

Sets the character height for the text. Type the required size in mm or Inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.


Xpos

Defines the X position for the text in mm or inches (set as real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.

Styles



Ypos

Defines the Y position for the text in mm or inches (set as real number), depending on the setting

of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.


Font

Defines the font to be used. Use the Font list to select an appropriate font.

BarCode

Several barcode standards exist worldwide to suit different industries, but Alias has standardized

on just three. Type 1, 2 or 3 for the appropriate barcode:

1 - Barcode 39

2 - Barcode 25

3 - Barcode 25 Interleaved

CharWidth


See also


Justification

Defines the justification for the text. Specify either Left or Right.

Layer


Colour

Type the integer number that represent the color number as defined in the output drawing system

(MicroStation or AutoCAD).

RotationAngle

Defines the angle of rotation in degrees clockwise.

TextWeight

Controls the character thickness. Type a value between 1 and 9. Used for MicroStation only

TruncationLength

Defines the number of output characters.

ColumnsNumber

Specifies the number of columns in the table.

Styles


Direction

Specifies the table direction.

LinesNumber

Specifies the number of lines in the table.

XSpacing

Specifies the table offset dimension in X (horizontal) direction.

Type a value in mm or inches (set as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. For example, you can type 50mm or 2.0 inch.

The value can be a negative number.


YSpacing

Specifies the table offset dimension in Y (vertical) direction.



See also


Styles


DrawingFrame TableAttributes Object

The DrawingFrame TableAttributes object contains a collection called DFTableAtributes,

which is used to store the definitions of text used on the drawing frame. The DrawingFrame

TableAttributes object also contains a Count property, defined by the software, which indicates the number of definitions in the DFTableAttributes collection.

The existing Supplementary TableAttributes object contains the same information as the DrawingFrame TableAttributes object. You can use either object the properties, although the DrawingFrame TableAttributes object supports real numbers in the XPos and YPos

properties.

See also DrawingFrame TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection (on page 345) Supplementary TableAttributes Object (on page 546)

Count

Displays the number of TableAttributes to be plotted in the drawing frame.

Styles


DrawingFrame TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection

The DrawingFrame TableAttributes DFTableAttributes collection stores the definitions of text

used on the drawing frame.




Xpos (on page 347)

Font (on page 347)

Ypos (on page 347)




Layer (on page 347)

Color (on page 347)



TruncationLength (on page 348)




XSpacing (on page 348)

Styles


YSpacing (on page 348)




AttributeName


Styles


CharHeight


See also


Xpos

Defines the X position for the text in mm or inches (set as real number), depending on the setting



Font

Defines the font to be used. Use the Font list to select an appropriate font.

Ypos




BarCode

Several barcode standards exist worldwide to suit different industries, but Alias has standardized

on just three. Type 1, 2 or 3 for the appropriate barcode:

1 - Barcode 39

2 - Barcode 25


CharWidth

Sets the character height for the text. Type the required size in mm or Inches (as a real number),

depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.


Justification


Layer


Color

Type the integer number that represent the color number as defined in the output drawing system (MicroStation or AutoCAD).

Styles


RotationAngle


TextWeight


TruncationLength

Defines the number of output characters.

ColumnsNumber


Direction


LinesNumber


XSpacing


Type a value in mm or inches (set as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing

units in the Options dialog box. For example, you can type 50mm or 2.0 inch.


See also


YSpacing


Type a value in mm or inches (set as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing

units in the Options dialog box. For example, you can type 50mm or 2.0 inch.



Styles


DrawingFrame SymbolTable Object

The SymbolTable object stores the properties for symbol shape frame positioning.

This facility allows symbol shapes, which could only be displayed on the standard drawing

frame, to be positioned on to a user-defined backing sheet. You set the properties to control the symbol shape/text that appears on the isometric. The following four options are available:

Single Vertical

Multiple Vertical

Single Horizontal

Multiple Horizontal

Styles


Set options appropriately to output symbol table as required.



DrawingLayer (on page 351)

HorizontalSpacing (on page 351)

Layout (on page 351)

MaxColumns (on page 351)

MaxRows (on page 351)

StartX (on page 351)

StartY (on page 352)

PipeLength (on page 352)

SymbolScale (on page 352)

SymbolSelect (on page 352)

SymbolList (on page 352)

TextOffsetX (on page 353)

TextOffsetY (on page 353)

Styles



TextHeight (on page 353)


TextWidthFactor (on page 353)

VerticalSpacing (on page 354)

Visible

Controls whether symbol shape frame positioning is being used or not. If set to True, then the definitions in the Symbol table are written to the Data definition file, which switches on the facility.

DrawingLayer

Sets the drawing layer for symbol shape frame positioning. Type a value in the range of 1 to 50.

HorizontalSpacing

Sets the horizontal spacing required between each column of the symbol shape output when the table is horizontally formatted or two dimensional. Type a value in mm or inches (as a real number) depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.


Layout

Controls whether the table is horizontal, vertical, or multiple style.

SingleVertical - Defines a single vertical table.

SingleHorizonta - Defines a single horizontal table.

MultipleVertical - Defines a multiple vertical table.

MultipleHorizontal - Defines a multiple horizontal table.

MaxColumns

Defines the maximum number of columns before a new row is started when using multiple tables or the maximum number of entries for a single horizontal table.

MaxRows

Defines the maximum number of rows before a new column is started when using multiple

tables or the maximum number of entries when the table is vertical.

Styles


StartX

Defines the bottom left-hand X position of the first symbol shape in mm, or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.


StartY

Defines the bottom left-hand Y position of the first symbol shape in mm, or inches (as a real number) , depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.


PipeLength

Single value for the length of pipe (including symbols), with a maximum value of 15mm or 0.5 inches. A negative value (-1) suppresses the output of pipe.

Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.


SymbolScale

Single value for the percentage symbol scale factor. Used to control the scaling of symbol shapes.

SymbolSelect

Controls whether all the symbols defined are output, or only those which are used on the drawing.

Fixed - All the symbols defined are output.

Dynamic - Only those symbols which are used on the drawing are output.

Styles


SymbolList

Double-clicking the SymbolList field opens a text editor, which you can use to type the symbols and associated text to be output. Each line must contain the symbol name and associated text

separated by a space, as shown in the following examples:

O1HG Pipe Support

WS Site Weld

WW Workshop Weld

TRACING Tracing

LAGGING Lagging

TextOffsetX

Single value for the horizontal movement from the symbol origin to the text origin. Type a value

(real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options

dialog box.


TextOffsetY

Single value for the vertical movement from the symbol origin to the text origin. Type a value

(real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options

dialog box.


TextFont

Defines the font to be used. Use the TextFont list to specify the font type.

TextHeight

Specifies the text height to be used. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on

the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.

See also


TextWeight


TextWidthFactor

Specifies the text width as a percentage of the text height to be used for output of the cut list.

Styles


VerticalSpacing

Sets the vertical spacing required between each row of the symbol shape output when the table is

vertically formatted or two dimensional.

Type a value in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units

set on the Options dialog box.


Styles


MaterialList

Material List Object

The MaterialList object contains information defining all three styles of plotted material list and also the text output to the material control file (each one defined in a specific sub-object). The MaterialList object itself defines which of the available styles is to be used and properties that apply to all material list styles.

When you click the MaterialList object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.

You can modify any of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value.

ActiveList (on page 356)

BoltAccumulation (on page 356)

ErectAccumulation (on page 357)

FabAccumulation (on page 357)

GasketAccumulation (on page 357)

OffshoreAccumulation (on page 357)

Styles


WeldAccumulation (on page 358)

BoltDiameterUnits (on page 358)

BoltLengthUnits (on page 358)

Drg1of1OnSingleIsos (on page 359)

ItemCodeLength (on page 359)

LinearQuantityStyle (on page 359)

MaterialListOverflow (on page 360)

MaterialListSplitting (on page 360)

OverflowDrawingID (on page 360)

SmallXLargeNS (on page 361)

SpoolsMatchFull (on page 361)



WastageArea1 (on page 362)









WeightsStyle (on page 366)

SupportsWithMatchingNamesAccumulation (on page 366)

MaterialsBySpool (on page 366)

SheetNumberFormat (on page 367)

ActiveList

Defines which of the three available material list styles is being used. The default is Fixed.

Fixed (see "MaterialList FixedLayout Object" on page 367)

UserDefined (see "MaterialList UserDefined Object" on page 372)

Variable (see "MaterialList Variable Layout Object" on page 395)

Defines

OS 23 Pos 3

Styles


BoltAccumulation

Controls the type of bolt accumulation.

None - For non-accumulation of bolts.

Normal - Accumulates bolts normally.

Suppress - Suppresses all bolts.

Defines

OS 74 Pos 5

ErectAccumulation

Controls the accumulation of erection material.

All Except Pipe - For non-accumulation of all erection materials (excluding pipe).

None - For non-accumulation of erection materials (including pipe).

Normal - Erection materials accumulate normally. This is the default.

Pipe Only - For non-accumulation of all erection materials (pipe only)

Suppress - Suppresses all erection materials.

Defines

OS 74 Pos 2

FabAccumulation

Controls the accumulation of fabrication materials.

All Except Pipe - For non-accumulation of all fabrication materials (excluding pipe).

None - For non-accumulation of fabrication materials (including pipe).

Normal - Fabrication materials accumulate normally. This is the default.

Pipe Only - For non-accumulation of all fabrication materials (pipe only)

Suppress - Suppresses all fabrication materials.

Defines

OS 74 Pos 1

GasketAccumulation

Controls the accumulation of gaskets.

Normal - Gaskets accumulated normally.

None - For non-accumulation of gaskets.

Suppress - Suppresses all gaskets.

Defines

OS 74 Pos 4

Styles


OffshoreAccumulation

Controls the accumulation of offshore material.

All Except Pipe - For non-accumulation of all offshore materials (excluding pipe).

None - For non-accumulation of offshore materials (including pipe).

Normal - Offshore materials accumulate normally. This is the default.

Pipe Only - For non-accumulation of all offshore materials (pipe only)

Suppress - Suppresses all offshore materials.

Defines

OS 74 Pos 3

WeldAccumulation

Controls the accumulation of welds.

Normal - Welds accumulated normally.

None - For non-accumulation of welds.

Suppress - Suppresses all welds.

Defines

OS 74 Pos 6

BoltDiameterUnits

Controls the units used for bolt diameters.

As Drawing - As the Units property on the Drawing Controls object

Inch - For Inch diameters.

mm - For mm diameters.

Defines

OS 65 Pos 2

See also Drawing Controls Object (on page 178) Units (on page 191)

Styles


BoltLengthUnits

Controls the units used for bolt lengths.

As Drawing - As the Units property on the Drawing Controls object

Inch - For Inch diameters.

mm - For mm diameters.

Defines

OS 65 Pos 1

See also Drawing Controls Object (on page 178)

Units (on page 191)

Drg1of1OnSingleIsos

Allows a single drawing to be identified as Drg 1 of 1.

True - The words Drg 1 of 1 are written on isometrics consisting of one drawing.

False - The words Drg 1 of 1 are not written on isometrics consisting of one drawing

Defines

OS 30

ItemCodeLength

Controls the number of characters used for the item code output on the material list.

Changes in this property cause the material list to be correspondingly wider or narrower.

0 - Default for 8 characters in the item code.

Value - Where value is an alternative number of characters, such as 12.

The maximum number of permissible Item code characters is 29 for a FixedLayout (see "MaterialList FixedLayout Object" on page 367) material list.

Defines

OS 28

Styles


LinearQuantityStyle

Controls the output style for linear quantities.

n. n M n. n ft - For pipe length to be output in the form n.n M or n.n Feet, as in 10.4 M or 10.4'.

n mm n ft n in - For pipe length to be output in the form n MM or n Feet n Inches, as in 1040 MM or 10'5".

n. nnn M n. nnn ft - For pipe length to be output in the form n.nnn M or n.nnn Feet, as 1.045 M or 10.375'.

Defines

OS 24 Pos 2

MaterialListOverflow

Controls material list overflow.

Same sheet - To give automatic overflow onto secondary material list plotted alongside the first. This creates a wider non-standard drawing size.

Continuation sheet - Gives a second "dummy" isometric containing the overflow material list but no pipeline graphics. This isometric is allocated the next drawing (sheet) identifier in the sequence.

Defines

OS 30

MaterialListSplitting

Controls whether the material list is produced on a per drawing or a per pipeline basis.

This difference only comes into effect when a pipeline is split on to two or more drawings.

Per drawing - For material list per isometric drawing.

Per pipeline - For material list per isometric drawing.

Defines

OS 24 Pos 1

Styles


OverflowDrawingID

Controls how an overflow drawing is numbered, if the MaterialListOverflow property is set to continuation sheet.

Next ID - The isometric is allocated the next drawing (sheet) identifier in the sequence.

Alpha Suffix - The isometric is allocated the same drawing (sheet) identifier as the previous

"master isometric", but supplemented with an A suffix letter. Any further overflow drawings for the same "master isometric" are suffixed B, C, and so on.

Defines

OS 30 Pos 1

See also MaterialListOverflow (on page 360)

SmallxLargeNS

Free format text field that allows you to enter a table of record ids and SKEYs, which are output

with the nominal size in small x large order.

The following example illustrates the required format (Record identifier SKEY (optional)):

50 AR

80

100 RAFL

SpoolsMatchFull

Controls whether part numbers on a spool isometric match those on the full isometric.

True - Spool isometric material part numbers to match full isometric part numbers.

False - Spool isometric material part numbers to be independent from full isometric part numbers.

Defines

OS 24 Pos 1

TextFont

Defines what font is used in the material list on the isometric. Use the TextFont list to specify

the font type.

Defines

OS 27 Pos 7, 8, 9

Styles


Visible

Controls whether the material list is plotted or not.

True - Plots the material list.

False - Does not plot the material list.

Defines

OS 23 Pos 1

WastageArea1

Controls any additional pipe quantity that needs to be added to the material list to allow for wastage during fabrication.

The property is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe wastage allowances. Each of the nine properties is applicable to a particular Plant area, which can be identified in the input Pipeline data file.

0 - For a percentage multiplication factor of zero. This setting allows you to obtain no increase in pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the input Pipeline data file.

1 - Default for a percentage multiplication factor of 1. This value does not increase the basic wastage percentage that can be set in application records in the input Pipeline data file.

Value - Where value is an additional factor that is multiplied by the basic wastage factor (input on appropriate records in the pipeline data input file) to arrive at a final wastage factor

percentage. For example, a value of 2 in this property gives a final percentage of twice the value of any figure included in the input Pipeline data file.

Defines

OS 43

WastageArea2



0 - For a percentage multiplication factor of zero. This setting allows you to obtain no

increase in pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the input Pipeline data file.


Value - Where value is an additional factor that is multiplied by the basic wastage factor

(input on appropriate records in the pipeline data input file) to arrive at a final wastage factor percentage. For example, a value of 2 in this property gives a final percentage of twice the value of any figure included in the input Pipeline data file.

Styles


Defines

OS 44

WastageArea3

Controls any additional pipe quantity that needs to be added to the material list to allow for

wastage during fabrication.

The property is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe wastage

allowances. Each of the nine properties is applicable to a particular Plant area, which can be identified in the input Pipeline data file.






Defines

OS 45

WastageArea4




0 - For a percentage multiplication factor of zero. This setting allows you to obtain no increase in pipe material quantity even though a value may have been included in the input Pipeline data file.




Defines

OS 46

Styles


WastageArea5










Defines

OS 47

WastageArea6










Defines

OS 48

Styles


WastageArea7








Defines

OS 49

WastageArea8



The property is one of nine that holds a percentage factor that is used to calculate pipe wastage allowances. Each of the nine properties is applicable to a particular Plant area, which can be

identified in the input Pipeline data file.






Defines

OS 50

Styles


WastageArea9








Defines

OS 51

WeightsStyle

Controls the output of component weights.

Total - Any component weight output is a total weight (Quantity x Unit Weight).

Individual - Any component weight output is the Individual weight of each component type (no multiplication x Quantity).

None - No component weight output on material lists.

Defines

OS 41 Pos 5

SupportsWithMatchingNamesAccumulation

Controls the accumulation of supports with matching tags.

Off - Supports with matching names (tags) not accumulated.

On - Supports with matching names (tags) accumulated.

Defines

OS 64 Pos 4

Styles


MaterialsBySpool

Controls the splitting of fabrication materials by spool on the material list.

False - Fabrication materials listed as normal under the Fabrication section of material list.

True - Spool materials grouped separately, with part numbering on a per spool basis.

Defines

OS 24 Pos 3

SheetNumberFormat

Controls the number of characters output for the sheet number. If the sheet number output has less than the requested number of characters, leading zero(s) are inserted where appropriate.

0 - No leading zeros

1 Character - Fixed number of characters

2 Characters

3 Characters

4 Characters

5 Characters

6 Characters

7 Characters

8 Characters

9 Characters

Defines

OS 30 Pos 3

Styles


MaterialList FixedLayout Object

The properties of the MaterialList FixedLayout object define the original ISOGEN material list

options, where ISOGEN plots the column headings. They are not user-definable. The FixedLayout object does not create any material list definition (MLD) data - everything is contained in the properties of this object.

The ActiveList property on the MaterialList object must be set to Fixed.

When you click the MaterialList FixedLayout object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.

You can modify any of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list


InsertBlankLines (on page 369)


LineSpacing (on page 369)

MLType (on page 369)

RightSide (on page 370)

ShowDividingLines (on page 370)

Styles


ShowItemDescriptions (on page 370)





TitleblockPos (on page 372)

TitleBlockVisible (on page 372)

InsertBlankLines

Controls the insertion of blank lines following single line material list entries.

True - Blank lines inserted.

False - Blank lines not inserted following single line entries. This provides the possibility of the material list being shorter.

Defines

OS 26 Pos 2

Layout

Controls the material list headings layout.

Standard - For the Standard sectionalized type with group headings and component sub-group headings.

Continuous - For Continuous style listing without headings and sub-headings.

This type of list is partitioned with horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups, such as pipe, flanges, and fittings. If required, you can switch off the dividing lines using the ShowDividingLines property .

Defines

OS 23 Pos 5

See also ShowDividingLines (on page 370)

LineSpacing

Controls the line spacing distance on a plotted material list. The default value is 100. Type a value to increase/decrease the line spacing distance in the ratio Value/100. For example, a value of 90 reduces the line spacing, while a value of 110 increases it.

Defines

OS 29

Styles


MLType

Controls the type of material list.

Normal - Default for non-special type material list.

Special - Special type material list where every item is given a separate entry except gaskets

and bolts, which are accumulated. Pulled bends get U prefixes and welds have W or B prefixes.

Normal with alpha pointers - Uses an alpha system of material list pointers, such as A, B, C, and so on instead of the default numeric system.

Defines

OS 23 Pos 2

RightSide

Controls whether the material list is printed on the left-hand or right-hand side of the isometric.

True - Material list printed on the right-hand side.

False - Material list printed on the left-hand side.

Defines

OS 25 Pos 1

ShowDividingLines

If the Layout property is set to Continuous, then this property controls whether the dividing

lines are shown or not.

True - List is partitioned with horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups, such as PIPE, FLANGES, FITTINGS, and so on.

False - No horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups.

Defines

OS 23 Pos 5

See also Layout (on page 369)

Styles


ShowItemDescriptions

Controls whether or not item descriptions are printed on the material list.

When item descriptions are suppressed, the material list becomes correspondingly narrower.

True - Item descriptions are printed on the material list.

False - Item descriptions are not printed on the material list.

Defines

OS 26 Pos 1

TextSize

Controls the physical size of the characters that are used for the plotted material list.







Or User - For characters with a height defined in UserTextSize property .

Defines

OS 27 Pos 1

See also UserTextSize (on page 371)

UserTextSize

Specifies a text height in mm or inches for text output in the fixed material list. This is an alternative way of setting the text size to setting the TextSize property, which allows you to select one of a number of available fixed sizes (such as Small/Medium/Large). If UserTextSize

is set to a value, it overrides the TextSize property.

Defines

OS 27 Pos 1, 2


Styles


TextWeight


Defines

OS 27 Pos 5

TextWidth



Defines

OS 27 Pos 3, 4


TitleblockPos

Controls the position of the title block.

Pipeline - For title block in default position (bottom right-hand corner of pipeline drawing area).

MatList - For title block at bottom of material list.

Defines

OS 25 Pos 2

TitleBlockVisible

Control whether the title block is shown or not.

True - Displays the title block as defined by the TitleblockPos property .

False - Suppresses the title block.

Defines

OS 25 Pos 2

See also TitleblockPos

Styles


MaterialList UserDefined Object

The MaterialList UserDefined object contains the properties defining the alternative Style3

material list. This type of list is created and plotted into a drawing frame that contains a pre-existing table (with header texts) into which the material list is plotted.

A Style3 material list is only allowed with a backing sheet. That is, if an ISOGEN generated

drawing frame is in use, only Style 1 and Style2 are available.

The MaterialList UserDefined object has several sub-objects and one collection:

OneSection (see "MaterialList UserDefined OneSection Object" on page 380)

TwoSection (see "MaterialList UserDefined TwoSection Object" on page 382)

ThreeSection (see "MaterialList UserDefined ThreeSection Object" on page 385)

RemarksBox (see "MaterialList UserDefined RemarksBox Object" on page 389)

SpoolTable (see "MaterialList UserDefined SpoolTable Object" on page 391)

XYColumns (see "CutList UserDefined XYColumns Collection" on page 448)

These objects are used to hold the data defining the various different types of Style3 list. These basically break down to how many sections there are plotted (certain options are not available in certain list types). Sensible defaults exist for each type of list, so each sub (section) object can be set up automatically, allowing you to select between them.

Styles



ActiveSection (on page 374)

DefaultDescriptionWidth (on page 375)


DrawingColour (on page 375)


ShowRemarks (on page 375)



ShowGroupHeadings (on page 376)

GroupHeadingX (on page 376)

GroupUnderline

CategoryUnderline (on page 376)

ShowAccumulatedPipeData (on page 376)

ShowCategoryHeadings (on page 377)

AccumulatedPipePosition (on page 377)

AccumulatedPipeQuantity (on page 377)

AccumulatedPipeDesc (on page 377)






Count (on page 378)

ActiveSection

Defines how many sections the material list has. The ActiveSection property is used to select the active section information. You can type 1, 2, or 3.

1- Uses the OneSection object properties for material list layout.

2 - Uses the TwoSection object properties for material list layout.

3 - Uses the ThreeSection object properties for material list layout.

See also MaterialList UserDefined OneSection Object (on page 380) MaterialList UserDefined TwoSection Object (on page 382) MaterialList UserDefined ThreeSection Object (on page 385)

Styles


DefaultDescriptionWidth

Controls the number of characters to use for the Description. Type an appropriate value. The

maximum you can enter is 130.

DrawingLayer

Sets the drawing layer for material list text. Type a value in the range of 1 to 50.

DrawingColour

Type an integer number that represents the color number as defined in the output drawing system (MicroStation or AutoCAD).

MLType


Normal - Default for Non-special type material list.

Special - Special type of material list. Every item is given a separate entry except gaskets and bolts, which are accumulated. Pulled bends get U prefixes and welds have W or B prefixes.

Normal with Alpha Pointers -

Defines

OS 23 Pos 2

ShowRemarks

Controls the display of a Remarks list, as defined by the separate RemarksBox object.

True - Remarks list is shown.

False - Remarks list not shown.

See also RemarksBox Object

StartX

Defines the starting X position of the list in mm, or inches (as a real number), depending on the

setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.


Styles


StartY

Defines the starting Y position of the list in mm, or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.


ShowGroupHeadings

Controls whether group headings are displayed.

True - Group headings are displayed.

False - Group headings are not displayed.

GroupHeadingX

Displacement in X from StartX property for group heading in mm.

See also StartX (on page 375)

GroupUnderline

If set to True, the group heading is underlined.

CategoryHeadingX

Displacement in X from StartX property for category heading in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.

See also Options (on page 77) StartX (on page 375)

CategoryUnderline

If set to True, the category heading is underlined.

ShowAccumulatedPipeData

True - The properties AccumulatedPipePosition, AccumulatedPipeQuantity and

AccumulatedPipeDesc are exported to the material list definition (MLD) file. These properties control the plotting of accumulated pipe information in a material list containing non-accumulated quantities. That is, for pipe only, it is possible to have both accumulated and non-accumulated information in the same material list.

False - The properties defined previously (as set when True is selected) are not exported to the material list definition file (normal behavior).

Styles


ShowCategoryHeadings

Controls whether group category headings are displayed.

True - Group category headings are displayed.

False - Group category headings are not displayed.

AccumulatedPipePosition

Horizontal offset in mm or inches to contents of Alternate Text –394. The offset is from the

material list StartX property.

See also StartX (on page 375)

AccumulatedPipeQuantity

Horizontal offset in mm or inches to horizontal offset to accumulated pipe quantity. The offset is

from the material list StartX property.

See also


AccumulatedPipeDesc

Horizontal offset in mm or inches to horizontal offset to accumulated pipe description. The

offset is from the material list StartX property.

See also


TextFont

Defines the font that is used in the material list on the isometric. Use the TextFont list to specify the font type.

TextHeight

Specifies the text height to be used. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.

See also


Styles


TextWeight


Defines

OS 27 Pos 5

TextWidthFactor

Specifies the text width as a percentage of the text height.

VerticalSpacing

Sets the vertical spacing between each horizontal line in mm or inches (set as a real number),

depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.


Count

Displays the number of columns in the UserDefined Material list plotted on the isometric, as

defined in the XYColumns collection (see "CutList UserDefined XYColumns Collection" on page 448).

Styles


MaterialList UserDefined XYColumns Collection

The MaterialList UserDefined XYColumns collection defines the data output for three user-definable lists - material, weld and cut lists.

This must be used with a backing sheet, as the positions given are for the X coordinate only.



Offset (on page 380)

MaxChars (on page 380)

To modify the AttributeName property, double-click on the attribute name you want to change and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Offset t and MaxChars

properties, double-click the value you want to change, type a new value and then press Enter.



Styles


AttributeName


Offset

Specifies the offset in mm from the StartX and StartY .

Type a value (real number) in mm, or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.

See also Options (on page 77) StartX (on page 375) StartY (on page 375)

MaxChars

Defines the maximum number of characters.

Styles


MaterialList UserDefined OneSection Object

The properties of MaterialList UserDefined OneSection object are used when the ActiveSection property on the Material list UserDefined object is set to 1.

Content (on page 381)

ListDown (on page 382)

MaxEntries (on page 382)

You can define properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value.

See also ActiveSection (on page 374) MaterialList UserDefined Object (on page 372)

Styles


Content

Controls which category of components are listed on the material list.

Continuous - A continuous listing of all components.

Fabrication - Lists Fabrication components only.

Erection - Lists Erection components only.

Offshore - Lists Offshore components only.

Erection/Offshore - Lists Erection/Offshore components only.

ListDown

Controls the direction in which the Material list is printed with reference to the StartX and StartY properties of the MaterialList UserDefined object.

True - The material list is down.

False - The material list is up.

For a three section material list, all section must be in the same direction.

See also StartX (on page 375) StartY (on page 375) MaterialList UserDefined Object (on page 372)

MaxEntries

Controls the maximum number of entries for the material list before an overflow sheet is

generated.

Styles


MaterialList UserDefined TwoSection Object

The properties of this MaterialList UserDefine TwoSection object are used when the ActiveSection property on the Material list UserDefined object is set to 2.

Section1Content (on page 384)

Section1Down (on page 384)

Section1MaxEntries (on page 384)


Section2Down (on page 384)


Section2YOffset (on page 384)

You can define properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value.

See also ActiveSection (on page 374) MaterialList UserDefined Object (on page 372)

Styles


Section1Content

Controls which category of components is listed in Section 1 of the material list.

Fabrication - Lists only Fabrication components.

Erection - Lists only Erection components.

Offshore - Lists only Offshore components.

Erection/Offshore - Lists only Erection/Offshore components.

Section1Down

Controls the direction in which the material list is printed with reference to the StartX and StartY properties of the MaterialList UserDefined object.



See also MaterialList UserDefined Object (on page 372) StartX (on page 375)


Section1MaxEntries

Controls the maximum number of entries for section 1 of the material list before an overflow sheet is generated.

Section2Content






Section2Down

Controls the direction in which section 2 of the material list is printed with reference to the

Section2YOffset property.



See also Section2YOffset (on page 384)

Section2MaxEntries

Controls the maximum number of entries for section 2 of the material list, before an overflow

sheet is generated.

Styles


Section2YOffset

Controls the Y offset for section 2 of the material list, with reference to the StartX and StartY

properties of the MaterialList UserDefined object. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches,


See also MaterialList UserDefined Object Options (on page 77) StartX (on page 375) StartY (on page 375)

Styles


MaterialList UserDefined ThreeSection Object

The properties of the MaterialList UserDefined ThreeSection object are used when the ActiveSection property on the MateriaList UserDefined object is set to 3.










You can define properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up

when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value.

Styles


See also ActiveSection (on page 374)

MaterialList UserDefined Object (on page 372)

ListDown

Controls the direction in which the Material list is printed with reference to the StartX and StartY properties of the MaterialList UserDefined object.



For a three section material list, all section must be in the same direction.

See also StartX (on page 375) StartY (on page 375) MaterialList UserDefined Object (on page 372)

Section1Content






Section1MaxEntries

Controls the maximum number of entries for Sction 1 of the material list, before an overflow sheet is generated.

Section2Content






Section2MaxEntries

Controls the maximum number of entries for section 2 of the material list, before an overflow sheet is generated.

Styles


Section2YOffset

Controls the Y offset for Section 2 of the material list, with reference to the StartX and StartY

properties of the MaterialList UserDefined object. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches,


See also MaterialList UserDefined Object Options (on page 77) StartX (on page 375) StartY (on page 375)

Section3Content






Section3MaxEntries

Controls the maximum number of entries for section 3 of the material list, before an overflow

sheet is generated.

Section3YOffset

Controls the Y offset for section 3 of the material list, with reference to the StartX and StartY

properties of the MaterialList UserDefined object. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.

See also MaterialList UserDefined Object Options (on page 77)

StartX (on page 375) StartY (on page 375)

Styles


MaterialList UserDefined RemarksBox Object

The MaterialList UserDefined RemarksBox object contains the necessary data to define the

position and properties of a Style3 Remarks box, which is used to plot user-specified remarks attached to components.

You can modify the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that



MaxCharacters (on page 390)







Styles


DrawingLayer

Sets the drawing layer for the spool table text. Type a value in the range of 1 to 50.

MaxCharacters

Defines the maximum number of characters that can fit on each output line in the Remarks box.

The maximum number should include the Remark ID.

MaxEntries

Controls the maximum number of lines of text that can be fitted into the available space used for

the Remarks box. When the maximum is reached, ISOGEN does not output any further lines, and a warning message is output to the Message file.

StartX

The starting X position of the Remarks box in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on

the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.


StartY

The starting Y position of the Remarks box in mm or inches (as a real number) dependent upon



TextHeight

Sets the text height to be used for the Remarks box in mm or inches, depending on the setting of

the drawing units in the Options dialog box.

See also


TextWeight


Defines

OS 27 Pos 5

VerticalSpacing

The vertical spacing between each horizontal line of text in the Remarks box.

Type a value in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting g of the drawing units

in n the Options (on page 77) dialog box.


Styles


MaterialList UserDefined SpoolTable Object

The MaterialList UserDefined SpoolTable object stores the settings for the Spool table

quantities, which can be output as part of a user-defined material list.

You can modify the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that


Enabled (on page 392)

HeaderOffsetX (on page 392)

HeaderOffsetY (on page 392)

ColumnOffset (on page 393)

NoColumns (on page 393)

TableOverflow (on page 393)




DataOffsetX (on page 394)

Styles


DataOffsetY (on page 394)

OutputLinesTube (on page 395)

TextHeightMultiple (on page 395)

Enabled

Controls whether the spool table settings are written to the material list definition (MLD) file.

HeaderOffsetX

Sets the X offset to the spool identifier position in mm or inches (as a real number), depending

on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.


HeaderOffsetY

Sets the Y offset to the spool identifier position in mm or inches (as a real number), depending

on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box

.

Styles



ColumnOffset

Controls the horizontal offset between each column of spool quantities on the material list.


in the Options dialog box.


NoColumns

The maximum number of spool quantity columns that can fit on the backing sheet.

TableOverflow

Indicates if automatic spool table overflow on to a second sheet is allowed.

True - Overflow is allowed.

False - Overflow is not allowed.

TextHeight

Sets the text height to be used.

Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the

Options dialog box.


TextWeight


DrawingLayer

Sets the drawing layer for the spool table text. Type a value in the range of 1 to 50.

Styles


DataOffsetX

Sets the X offset to the first spool quantities position in mm or inches (as a real number),

depending on the setting in of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.


DataOffsetY

Sets the Y offset to the first spool quantities position in mm, or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set in the Options dialog box.

See also


Styles


OutputLinesTube

Used in conjunction with AText -537 to control the number of lines used for output of pipe

lengths.

The form of length output on the material list is controlled by the LinearQuantityStyle

property; however, in order to save space, it is possible to have a two line format.

By default, the OutputLinesTube property is set to 1, which uses the existing LinearQuantityStyle property. If AText -537 is being used, then the OutputLinesTube

property must be set to 2.

AText -537 is used to indicate the new line by using the $ and the setting for the units indication to be output, as shown in the following example:

-537$m 13.5m m

-537$mm 13500mm mm

-537$FT 19.5 Ft Ft

-537$FT 13.5Ft (instead of 13.5') Ft (instead of 13.5')

Do not use AText -537 if pipe quantities are requested in Ft-Ins (13'-5") units.

If set, this AText takes over control of the Units indication output on all styles of material

list, as well as allowing a new line indicator to force two line output. If it is not set, then normal defaults apply.

See also LinearQuantityStyle (on page 359)

TextHeightMultiple

Sets the height of the text to be output in multiple line form on the material list.

Type the value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.


Styles


MaterialList Variable Layout Object

The properties of the MaterialList VariableLayout object control the layout of the material list.

This object contains the properties defining the alternative Style2 material list. This is a variation of the basic Style1 type, with additional user options that permit further variations of the basic material list. A Style2 material list requires column header and data entries to be defined in the material list definition (MLD) file. The Style2 object is a collection of column definitions. Column headers are stored in a single long string in this object.

The MaterialList VariableLayout object also has a collection called TextColumns, which is used to store the definitions of the data to be output on the material list. The Count property, defined by the software, indicates the number of objects in the TextColumns collection.

When you click the MaterialList VariableLayout object in the Detail panel, the Properties

panel displays all of the properties that are currently defined for that object.

You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list


DefaultDescriptionWidth (on page 397)

HeaderLines (on page 397)

Styles


InsertBlankLines (on page 397)


LineSpacing (on page 398)


RightSide (on page 398)

ShowDividingLines (on page 399)





Count (on page 400)

See also MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection (on page 400)

DefaultDescriptionWidth

Controls the number of characters to use for the description, maximum value is 130.

Type an appropriate value.

HeaderLines

Specify the text string for the column header.

\ - Starts a new line.

| - Produces a vertical break.

You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the material list definition (MLD) file.

InsertBlankLines

Control of the insertion of blank lines following single line material list entries.

True - Blank lines inserted.

False - Blank lines not inserted following single line entries. This provides the possibility of the material list being shorter.

Defines

OS 26 Pos 2

Styles


Layout

Controls the material list headings layout.

Standard - For the standard sectionalized type with group headings and component sub-group headings.

Continuous - For continuous style listing without headings and sub-headings. This type of

list is partitioned with horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups, such as Pipe, Flanges, Fittings, and so on. If required, you can use the ShowDividingLines property to switch off the dividing lines.

Defines

OS 23 Pos 5

See also ShowDividingLines (on page 399)

LineSpacing

Controls the line spacing distance on a plotted material list. The default value is 100. Type a

value to increase/decrease the line spacing distance in the ratio Value/100. For example, a value of 90 reduces the line spacing, while a value of 110 increases it.

Defines

OS 29

MLType


Normal - Default for non-special type material list.

Special - Special type material list where every item is given a separate entry except gaskets

and bolts, which are accumulated. Pulled bends get U prefixes, and welds have W or B prefixes.

Normal with Alpha Pointers - Uses an alpha system of material list pointers - A, B, C, and so on, instead of the default numeric system.

Defines

OS 23 Pos 2

RightSide

Controls whether the material list is printed on the left-hand or right-hand side of the isometric.

True - Material list printed on the right-hand side.

False - Material list printed on the left-hand side.

Defines

OS 25 Pos 1

Styles


ShowDividingLines

If the Layout property is set to continuous, then this property controls whether the dividing lines

are shown or not.

True - List is partitioned with horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups, such as. PIPE, FLANGES, FITTINGS, and so on.

False - No horizontal dividing lines between the logical groups.

Defines

OS 23 Pos 5

See also Layout (on page 369)

TextSize

Controls the physical size of the characters that are used for the plotted material list.







Or User - For characters with a height defined in UserTextSize property.

Defines

OS 27 Pos 1

See also UserTextSize

UserTextSize

Controls the text size in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box. Set the value (real number) required.

Only applicable if TextSize is set to Or User.

Defines

OS 27 Pos 1, 2

See also Options (on page 77) TextSize (on page 399)

Styles


TextWeight


Defines

OS 27 Pos 5

TextWidth



Defines

OS 27 Pos 3, 4

See also


Count

Displays the number of columns in the VariableLayout material list plotted on the isometric.

Styles


MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection

The MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns collection is used to store the definitions of the data to be output for the different types of lists. You can modify the following properties:



Start (on page 402)


To modify the AttributeName property, double-click on the attribute name you want to change and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Justification, Start and MaxChars properties, double-click the value you want to change, type a new value and then

press Enter.

See also Add to Collection (on page 23) Remove from Collection (on page 23)

AttributeName

Specifies the name of the attribute being defined. Use the AttributeName list to select the

required attribute.

Styles


Justification


Start

Defines the start column for the output data on a fixed format file, and specifies a field number for a delimited file.

MaxChars


Styles


MaterialList SummaryFile Object

The MaterialList SummaryFile object contains the properties for the material control file. The

object also contains a collection called TextColumns, which is used to store the definitions of the data to be output for the different types of lists.

The Count property, defined by the software, indicates the number of objects in the TextColumns collection.

When you click the MaterialList SummaryFile object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel displays all of the properties that currently defined for that object.




Path (on page 404)

Append (on page 404)

FileFormat (on page 404)

Delimiter (on page 404)

ShowHeaders (on page 405)


Styles


MaterialHeadings (on page 405)

IncludeBolts (on page 405)

IndividualEntries (on page 405)

TitleText (on page 406)

ShowTitles (on page 406)

UserDefined (on page 406)

Count (on page 406)

See also MaterialList SummaryFile TextColumns Collection (on page 406)

Enabled

Controls whether file is created or not.

True - File is created.

False - File is not created.

Path

Defines the path for the file.

1. Double-click the Path box.

2. In the Specify path for file dialog box, navigate to the appropriate file and then click OK.

Append

Defines whether the file is opened in Append mode or Overwrite mode.

True - File is appended.

False - File is overwritten.

FileFormat

Defines whether the output file is a fixed format or delimited file.

Fixed - Outputs a fixed format file.

Delimited - Outputs a delimited file.

Styles


Delimiter

Defines the character used as a delimiter when the file format is delimited. The possible characters are

Blank

Comma (,)

Semi-colon (;)

Colon (:)

ShowHeaders

Controls whether the header lines are shown or not.

True - Shows header lines.

False - Does not show header lines.

HeaderLines





MaterialHeadings

Controls whether there is a single output of material headings or for each pipe/drawing.

Pipeline - Output headings for each pipeline.

Drawing - Output headings for each drawing.

Single - A single output of the headings.

IncludeBolts

Controls whether bolts are included in the material control file.

True - Bolts are included in the material control file (default).

False - Bolts are excluded from the material control file

Defines

OS 65 Pos 1

Styles


IndividualEntries

Controls whether Individual entries are output to the material control file when material accumulation is being used on the material list. This allows components with different attributes

to be listed correctly but avoids non-accumulation of materials which can often create overflow drawings.

True - Individual entries are written.

False - Individual entries are not written.

TitleText

Type the text to be used for the title.

ShowTitles

Controls whether the title line is shown or not.

True - Shows the title line.

False - Does not show the title line.

UserDefined

Controls whether the material control file uses the properties of the SummaryFile object to control the data output to the material control file, or the old standard material control file is created.

True - Use the SummaryFile object properties.

False - Standard material control file.

See also MaterialList SummaryFile Object (on page 402)

Count

Displays the number of attributes to be output in the Material list Summary file (material control

file).

Styles


MaterialList SummaryFile TextColumns Collection

The MaterialList SummaryFile TextColumns collection is used to store the definitions of the data to be output for the different types of lists. You can modify the following properties:



Start (on page 408)


To modify the AttributeName property, double-click on the attribute name you want to change

and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Justification, Start and MaxChars properties, double-click the value you want to change, type a new value and then press Enter.



AttributeName


required attribute.

Styles


Justification


Start


MaxChars


Styles


MaterialList Transfers Object

The MaterialList Transfers object is used to store the information that allows you to move a

component from one sort group to another on the material list. For example, a blank flange can be moved to the FLAN sort group.

The MaterialList Transfers object also has a collection called MLTransfers (see "MaterialList

Transfers MLTransfers Collection" on page 410), which is used to store the components to be transferred. The object itself has only a single property called Count, which is defined by the software, and indicates the number of objects in the MaterialList MLTransfers collection.

See also Count (on page 409) MaterialList MLTransfers Collection (see "MaterialList Transfers MLTransfers Collection" on page 410)

Count

Displays the number of items in the MLTransfers collection (see "MaterialList Transfers MLTransfers Collection" on page 410). Each one represents a material that is to be assigned to a

group other than its default.

Styles


MaterialList Transfers MLTransfers Collection

The MaterialList MLTransfers collection stores the list of components to be transferred from one

sort group to another.


RecordID (on page 410)

NewGroup (on page 410)

SKEY (on page 411)



RecordID

This is the IDF record number for the component, such as 107 for a blank flange or 90 for a control valve.

Styles


NewGroup

This is the new group to which the component is to be transferred. The available groups are:

PIPE

VALV

FITT

INST

FLAN

SUPP

GASK

MISC

BOLT

WELD

SKEY

The following transfers record ID 90 (instrument) to the valve group (VALV) but only

instruments that have an SKEY of CV** (refers to a control valve with any end preparation).

RecordID Group SKEY

90 VALV CV**

Styles


WeldList

WeldList Object

The WeldList object contains information that defines all three ISOGEN styles of plotted weld list and the weld list summary file. The WeldList object itself defines which of the styles is to be

used and the properties that apply to all weld list styles.

You can modify each of the following properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --

click in the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value.


ExtraRPadWelds (on page 413)

SlipOnFlangeWelds (on page 413)

YTypeWelds (on page 414)

TackWeldNumbers (on page 414)

ClampWelds (on page 415)

Styles


See also WeldList FixedLayout Object (on page 415)

WeldList VariableLayout Object (on page 417) WeldList UserDefined Object (on page 421) WeldList SummaryFile Object (on page 428)

ActiveList

Defines which of the three weld list styles is being used.

UserDefined (see "WeldList UserDefined Object" on page 421)

FixedLayout (see "WeldList FixedLayout Object" on page 415)

VariableLayout (see "WeldList VariableLayout Object" on page 417)

ExtraRPadWelds

Controls the quantity of extra weld numbers generated at reinforcement pads. You can type 0, 1,

or 2.

0 - Generates no extra weld numbers.

1 - Generates one extra weld number.

2 - Generates two extra weld numbers.

These are extra weld numbers because they are created in addition to the normal single and double branch connection weld numbers that are generated at set-on tee and cross positions.

Defines

OS 77 Pos 2

Styles


SlipOnFlangeWelds

Controls the quantity of weld numbers generated at slip-on flanges. You can generate either one or two weld numbers at slip-on flanges. Type a value of 1 or 2.

1 - Generates one weld number.

2 - Generates two weld numbers. 2 is the default setting.

Defines

OS 77 Pos 1

Visible

Controls whether the weld list is plotted or not.

True - Plots the weld list.

False - Does not plot the weld list.

Defines

OS 53 Pos 2

YTypeWelds

Controls the allocation of weld numbers on the fabricated Y-type components. You can type 1 or 2.

1 - One weld number.

2 - Two weld numbers

Defines

OS 77 Pos 4

Styles


TackWeldNumbers

Controls the allocation of weld numbers on tack welds.

True - Allocates weld numbers.

False - Does not allocate weld numbers.

Defines

OS 77 Pos 5

ClampWelds

Controls the number of weld numbers allocated to Victaulic welded/gorged ring type clamps (CLVR). Type a value in the range of 1 to 9. If set to 0 (the default value), two weld numbers are allocated.

Defines

OS 77 Pos 7

Styles


WeldList FixedLayout Object

The WeldList FixedLayout object is used for the original ISOGEN weld list. It has one

property, ShowOperationsBox.

The ActiveList property on the WeldList object must be set to Fixed.

To set the ShowOperationsBox property, double-click the current value and then select the new value in the list.

See also ActiveList (on page 413) ShowOperationsBox (on page 416)

Styles


ShowOperationsBox

Controls whether the weld operations box is shown or not.

True - Shows the weld operations box. Replaces the original weld list, if set, to be shown by the Visible property on the WeldList object .

False - Does not show the weld operations box. As a result, the original weld list is plotted if the Visible property on the WeldList object is set to True.

Defines

OS 53 Pos 2

Styles


WeldList VariableLayout Object

The WeldList VariableLayout object has a collection called TextColumns, which is used to

store the definitions of the data to be output on the weld list.

The WeldList VariableLayout object has two properties, Headerlines , which is user-defined,

and Count , which is defined by the software. Count is the number of definitions in the TextColumns (see "MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection" on page 400) collection.

The ActiveList property on the WeldList object must be set to Variable.

See also ActiveList (on page 413) Count (on page 419) Headerlines (on page 419) WeldList Object (on page 412)

Styles


HeaderLines




You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the weld

definition file (WDF).

Count

Displays the number of definitions in the TextColumns collection. This is a system-defined value.

See also WeldList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection (on page 419)

Styles


WeldList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection

The WeldList VariableLayout TextColumns collection is used to store the definitions of the data to be output for the weld list. You can define the following properties:



Start (on page 421)






AttributeName


Styles


Justification


Start

Defines the start column for the output data on a fixed format file, and specifies the field number for a delimited file.

MaxChars

Specifies the maximum number of characters.

Styles


WeldList UserDefined Object

The WeldList UserDefined object contains the properties for a user-defined weld list. This type

of list is created and plotted into a drawing frame that contains a pre-existing table (with header texts) into which the weld list is plotted. The object also contains a collection called XYColumns, which is used to store the definitions of the data to be output on the weld list.

The Count property, defined by the software, specifies the number of definitions in the XYColumns collection.

The ActiveLlist property on the WeldList object must be set to UserDefined.

The WeldList UserDefined object controls the following properties:


DrawingColour (on page 423)




MaxCols (on page 424)








TableLayout (on page 425)


Styles


Count (on page 426)


See also WeldList Userdefined XYColumns Collection (on page 426)

DrawingLayer

Sets the drawing layer for the weld list. Type a value in the range of 1 to 50.

DrawingColour

Type an integer number that represents the color number as defined in the output drawing system (MicroStation or AutoCAD).

Styles


ListDown

Controls the direction in which the weld list is printed with reference to the StartX and StartY

properties of the WeldList UserDefined object .

True - Prints the material list down.

False - Prints the material list up.

See also StartX (on page 424) StartY (on page 424)

MaxEntries

Controls the maximum number of entries in the weld list.

MaxRows

Defines the maximum number of rows before a new column is started when using multiple tables or the maximum number of entries when the table is vertical.

MaxCols

Defines the maximum number of columns before a new row is started when using multiple tables or the maximum number of entries when the table is horizontal.

StartX

Sets the start X position of the weld list on the drawing in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.


StartY

Sets the start Y position of the weld list on the drawing in mm, or Inches (as a real number)



TextFont

Specifies the font used when outputting text on the weld list.

Styles


TextHeight

Sets the text height to be used for the weld list in mm or inches (as a real number), ,depending on


See also


TextWeight


TextWidthFactor

Specifies the text width as a percentage of the text height to be used for output of the weld list on the isometric.

HorizontalSpacing

Sets the horizontal spacing required between each column of the weld list output when the table

is horizontally formatted or two dimensional. Type a value in mm or inches (as a real number)depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.

See also


TableLayout

Controls the order in which a Weld list table is to be organized, either

Horizontal

Vertical

Styles


VerticalSpacing

Specifies the vertical spacing between each horizontal line in mm or inches (as a real number),


See also


Count

Indicates the number of definitions in the XYColumns collection.

See also WeldList Userdefined XYColumns Collection (on page 426)

Styles


WeldList UserDefined XYColumns Collection

The WeldList Userdefined XYColumns collection is used to define the data output for the user-defined weld list.






To modify the AttributeName property, double-click on the attribute name you want to change and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Offsett and MaxChars




Styles


AttributeName


required attribute.

Offset

Specifies the offset in mm from the StartX and StartY.

Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set in the Options dialog box.

See also




MaxChars


Styles


WeldList SummaryFile Object

The WeldList SummaryFile object contains properties for the weld summary file. There is also

a TextColumns collection, which is used to store the definitions of the data to be output in the weld summary file.

The Count property, which is defined by the software, specifies the number of objects in the TextColumns collection.

The WeldList Summary File object controls the following properties:


Path (on page 430)








Count (on page 432)

When you click SummaryFile in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties

that are currently defined for that object.

Styles



See also WeldList SummaryFile TextColumns Collection (on page 432)

Enabled

Controls whether weld summary file is created or not.

True - Creates the weld summary file.

False - Does not create the weld summary file.

Styles


Path

Defines the path for the file.

1. Double-click in the Path box.

2. In the Specify path for file dialog box, navigate to the file and then click OK.

Append


True - Appends the file.

False - Overwrites the file.

FileFormat

Defines whether the output file is a Fixed format or Delimited file.

Fixed - For fixed format file.

Delimited - For a delimited file. The delimiter is specified in the Delimiter property.

See also Delimiter (on page 431)

Delimiter


Blank

Comma (,)

Semi-colon (;)

Colon (:)

Styles


HeaderLines




You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the welding list definition file (WLD).

ShowHeaders

Controls whether the header lines are shown or not.

True - Shows header lines.

False - Does not show header lines.

TitleText


ShowTitles




Count

Displays the number of definitions in the TextColumns collection.

See also WeldList SummaryFile TextColumns Collection (on page 432)

Styles


WeldList SummaryFile TextColumns Collection

The WeldList SummaryFile TextColumns collection is used to store the definitions of the data to be output for the weld summary list. You can define the following properties"



Start (on page 434)


To modify the AttributeName property, double-click on the attribute name you want to change and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Offset and MaxChars




Styles


AttributeName


required attribute.

Justification


Start


MaxChars


Styles


CutList

CutList Object

The CutList object controls the definition of the cut list output on both the drawing and to a summary file. The properties of the CutList object set general information for the cut list,

whereas the sub-objects control the type of cut list and the properties required for each type. When you click the CutList object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel displays all of the currently defined properties.



IncludeAdditionalMaterial (on page 436)

CutPieceID (on page 436)

CutPieceSequence (on page 436)

DecimalInchOutput (on page 437)

Styles


LengthToCL (on page 437)

LengthToBranchPoint (on page 437)

OffshoreAllowance (on page 438)

OnShoreAllowance (on page 438)

ShopWeldAllowance (on page 439)

UseWeldGapData (on page 439)

UseTangentData (on page 439)


ActiveList

Controls the style of layout used for the cut list on the isometric.

Fixed - Use the properties of the FixedLayout object.

User Defined -Use the properties of the FixedLayout object.

See also CutList FixedLayout Object (on page 440) CutList UserDefined Object (on page 442)

IncludeAdditionalMaterial

Controls how additional material is handled in the cut list.

None - No entry to cut list for additional material.

Pipe Only - Add entry to cut list for additional material (PIPE).

Misc Only - Add entry to cut list for additional material (MISC).

Pipe and Misc - Add entry to cut list for additional material (PIPE and MISC).

Defines

OS 2 Pos 9

CutPieceID

Controls whether the cut piece identifiers are Numeric or Alphabetic.

Numeric - For numeric cut piece identifiers.

Alphabetic - For alphabetic cut piece identifiers.

Defines

OS 2 Pos 3

Styles


CutPieceSequence

Controls whether the cut piece identifier is per pipeline or per drawing.

Continuous - Cut piece list and cut piece identifiers generated per pipeline.

Per drawing - Cut piece identifiers starting at 1 (one) or A on each isometric drawing, depending on the setting of the CutPieceID property.

Defines

OS 2 Pos 1

See also CutPieceID (on page 436)

DecimalInchOutput

Controls the supplementary output of cut length in decimal inches.

True - For supplementary output of cut lengths in decimal inches format in the REMARKS

column of the new style cut piece list. This option only applies to Imperial units users.

False - For standard cut lengths only.

Defines

OS 2 Pos 4

LengthToCL

Controls the calculation of branch cut length to centre of main pipeline.

True - Calculation to the center line of the main pipeline in all situations.

False - Calculation of the cut length to whatever the branch point position implies, that is, no adjustment to cut length is made.

LengthToCL and LengthToBranchPoint are mutually exclusive; setting one True sets

the other one to False.

Defines

OS 2 Pos 5

See also LengthToBranchPoint (on page 437)

Styles


LengthToBranchPoint

Controls the calculation of branch cut length to the branch point position.

True - Calculation of the cut length to whatever the branch point position implies, that is, no adjustment to cut length is made.

False - Calculation to the centre line of the main pipeline in all situations.

LengthToCL and LengthToBranchPoint are mutually exclusive; setting one True sets the other one to False.

Defines

OS 2 Pos 5 = 2

See also LengthToCL (on page 437)

OffshoreAllowance

Controls the amount of extra pipe that is added at loose flange and field fit weld (FFW) positions for Offshore piping. Extra pipe is added both to cut pipe length dimensions and to pipe quantities on the isometric.

0 or Blank - Obtains 0mm allowance.

Value - Where value (real number) is an alternative allowance in mm, or Inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.

Defines

OS 22 Pos 4, 5, 6


OnShoreAllowance

Controls the amount of extra pipe that is added at loose flange and field fit weld (FFW) positions

for Onshore piping. Extra pipe is added both to cut pipe length dimensions and to pipe quantities on the isometric.



Defines

OS 22 Pos 1, 2, 3


Styles


ShopWeldAllowance

Controls the amount of extra pipe that is added for shop test purposes where certain welds are

cut-off together with a short length of pipe after testing.



ShopWeldAllowance is only applied to shop test welds.

Defines

OS 22 Pos 7, 8, 9

See also


UseWeldGapData

If set to True, the data stored in the WeldGaps property at the project level is written to the

welding definition file (WDF). This data is used for setting the various weld gaps.

When you import a style, if the WDF contains a WELD-GAPS entry, the WeldGaps and the

WeldGapData properties are both set to True.

See also Import Style Settings (on page 73) WeldGaps (on page 94)

UseTangentData

If set to True, the data stored in the ElbowConversion property at the project level is written to

the drawing definition file. This data is used for cut list calculations when elbows have been converted to bends in SmartPlant Spoolgen.

If there is data in the ElbowConversion property, then this property must be set to True;

otherwise, any cut lengths can be wrong.

When importing a style, if the DDF contains a STANDARD-BEND-LENGTHS entry, the

ElbowConversion and the UseTangentData properties are both set to True.

See also ElbowConversion (on page 94) Import Style Settings (on page 73)

Styles


Visible

Controls whether the cut list is shown on the isometric drawing. The cut list is a report on the cut pieces that ISOGEN has determined to be in the pipeline. The type of cut list report can be Fixed

or UserDefined.

The ActiveList property controls which list is used.

True - Shows the cut piece list and numbers on the isometric drawing.

False - Does not show the cut piece list and numbers on the isometric drawing.

Defines

OS 2 Pos 1

See also ActiveList (on page 436)

CutList FixedLayout Object (on page 440)

CutList UserDefined Object (on page 442)

Styles


CutList FixedLayout Object

The CutList FixedLayout object is used for either the old or extended cut list output, which is

controlled by the Content property.

If either of these types of cut list is required, the ActiveList property on the CutList

object must be set to Fixed.

When you click FixedLayout in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the currently defined value for the Content property.

See also ActiveList (on page 436) Content (on page 441) CutList Object (on page 435)

Styles


Content

Controls whether the old style cut list with limited information or new style cut list with full information is generated.

Standard - Generates the old style cut list.

Extended - Generates the new style cut list.

Defines

OS 2 Pos 2

Styles


CutList UserDefined Object

The CutList UserDefined object properties control the UserDefined cut list. There is an

XYColumns collection, which defines the data to be output on the cut list.

The Count property, which is defined by the software, specifies the number of objects in the XYColumns collection.

The CutList UserDefined object controls the following properties:

AllowOverflowDrawings (on page 444)


HorizontalDirection (on page 445)



MaxColumns (on page 446)


ShowEnclosure (on page 447)







VerticalDirection (on page 448)


Count (on page 448)

Styles


When you click UserDefined in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.


See also UserDefined XYColumns Collection (see "CutList UserDefined XYColumns Collection" on page 448)

Styles


AllowOverflowDrawings

Controls whether the cut list causes an overflow drawing.

True - Cut list can cause an overflow drawing. True is the default setting.

False - Cut list cannot cause an overflow drawing. If AllowOverflowDrawings is set to

False, and there was no overflow drawing created for any other reason, then the cut list overflow data is lost.

DrawingLayer

Sets the drawing layer for the cut list text. Type a numerical value in the range of 1 to 50.

HorizontalDirection

Sets the horizontal direction for the cut list.

Right - Cut list is to the right.

Left - Cut list is to the left.

HorizontalSpacing

Sets the horizontal spacing required between each column of the cut list output when the table is

horizontally formatted or two dimensional.


set on the Options dialog box.


Layout

Controls whether the table is horizontal, vertical, or multiple style.

SingleVertical - Same data items output vertically against their relevant heading. Number of columns output dependant on the MaxRows property.

Styles


SingleHorizontal - Same data items output horizontally against their relevant heading. Number of columns output dependant on the MaxRows property.

MultipleVertical (Across/Down) - Layout of data items is Across > Down. Number of columns output dependant on the MaxRows property.

MultipleHorizontal (Down/Across) - Layout of data items is Down > Across. Number of columns output dependant on the MaxRows property.

See also MaxRows (on page 447)

Styles


MaxColumns

Defines the maximum number of columns before a new row is started when using multiple tables or the maximum number of entries for a single horizontal table.

MaxRows

Defines the maximum number of rows before a new column is started when using multiple tables or the maximum number of entries when the table is vertical.

ShowEnclosure

Controls whether cut list enclosures are shown.

True - Cut list enclosures are shown.

False - Cut list enclosures are not shown.

StartX

Defines the bottom left hand X position of the first line of the cut list in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.


StartY

Defines the bottom left hand Y position of the first line of the cut list in mm or inches (as a real

number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.


TextFont

Defines the font to be used. Select an appropriate font from the list.

TextHeight

Set the text height to be used on the cut list in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.

See also


Styles


TextWeight

Controls the character thickness. Define a value between 1 and 9. Only used for MicroStation.

TextWidthFactor

Specifies the text width as a percentage of the text height to be used for output of the cut list.

VerticalDirection

Sets the vertical direction for the cut list.

Up - Cut list goes up.

Down - Cut list goes down.

VerticalSpacing

Sets the vertical spacing required between each row of the cut list output when the table is vertically formatted or two dimensional.

Type a value in mm or inches (real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.


Count

Displays the number of columns in the UserDefined cut list report plotted on the isometric drawing.

Styles


CutList UserDefined XYColumns Collection

The CutList UserDefined XYColumns collection is used to define the data output for three user-defined lists: material, weld and cut lists.






To modify the AttributeName property, double-click on the attribute name you want to change and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Offset and MaxChars



Styles


AttributeName


required attribute.

Offset

Specifies the offset in mm from the StartX and StartY.

Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set in the Options dialog box.


MaxChars


Styles


CutList SummaryFile Object

The CutList SummaryFile object controls which type of cut list summary file is created - Fixed

or UserDefined. The following properties control such things as the type of file--Append or Overwrite--and in the case of a user-defined file, set the header and title information for the file.


Path (on page 452)


UserDefined (on page 453)







Count (on page 454)

Styles


When you click SummaryFile in the Detail panel, the Properties panel shows all of the properties that are currently defined for the selected object.


Enabled

True - Enables the export of cut list summary details to the material list definition file (MLD).

False - Suppress the export of cut list summary details to the material list definition file (MLD).

Path

Specify the path to the cut list summary file to be created by ISOGEN.

Styles


Append




UserDefined

Controls whether the cut list summary file uses the properties of the CutList SummaryFile

object to control the data and headings output to the cut list summary file, or if the old, standard cut list summary file is created.

True - Uses the properties of the CutList SummaryFile object.

False - Uses the old style cut list summary file.

See also CutList SummaryFile Object (on page 450)

FileFormat




Delimiter

Defines the character used as a delimiter when the file format is delimited. The possible

characters are:

Blank

Comma (,)

Semi-colon (;)

Colon ():

Styles


HeaderLines

Specifies the text string for the column header. You can use the following:

\ - Start a new line.



ShowHeaders

Controls whether header lines are shown.

True - Shows the header lines.

False - Does not show the header lines.

TitleText


ShowTitles




Count

Displays the number of attributes to be output to the material list cut list summary file.

Styles


CutList SummaryFile TextColumns Collection

The CutList SummaryFile TextColumns collection stores the definitions of the data to be output to the cut list summary report file. You can define the following properties:



Start (on page 456)






Styles


AttributeName


Justification

Defines the justification for the text. Use the list to select either Left or Right.

Start


MaxChars


Styles


Supplementary Object

The Supplementary object itself has no properties, but it does contain several other sub-objects, as follows:

AdditionalData object (see "Supplementary AdditionalData Object" on page 458)

AuxiliaryPrograms object (see "Supplementary AuxiliaryPrograms Object" on page 460)

BendingReport object (see "Supplementary BendingReport Object" on page 462)

CentreOfGravity object (see "Supplementary CentreOfGravity Object" on page 464)

DataFiles object (see "Supplementary DataFiles Object" on page 468)

DetailSketches object (see "Supplementary DetailSketches Object" on page 495)

DwgInfoFile object (see "Supplementary DwgInfoFile Object" on page 506)

EquipmentTrim object (see "Supplementary EquipmentTrim Object" on page 510)

Fonts object (see "Supplementary Fonts Object" on page 512)

HeatTreatment object (see "Supplementary HeatTreatment Object" on page 514)

InstrumentSKEYS object (see "Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS Object" on page 519)

PipeLineAtts object (see "Supplementary PipeLineAtts Object" on page 520)

ReferencePlanes object (see "Supplementary ReferencePlanes Object" on page 525)

RepeatFile object (see "Supplementary RepeatFile Object" on page 528)

ReportFiles object (see "Supplementary ReportFiles Object" on page 532)

SiteWeldFile object (see "Supplementary SiteWeldFile Object" on page 536)

SpoolInformation object (see "Supplementary SpoolInformation Object" on page 542)

TableAttributes object (see "Supplementary TableAttributes Object" on page 546)

TitleTexts object (see "Supplementary TitleTexts Object" on page 551)

Styles


Traceability object (see "Supplementary TitleTexts Object" on page 551)

Styles


Supplementary AdditionalData Object

The Supplementary AdditionalData object allows data to be added to the data definition file

(DDF) by specifying the additions as a text string.

When you click the Supplementary AdditionalData object in the Detail panel, the Properties

panel displays all the properties that are currently defined for that object.




DDFLines (on page 460)

Styles


Enabled

Controls whether the data in the DDFLines property is added to the drawing definition file (DDF).

True - Data is included.

False - Data is excluded.

See also DDFLines (on page 460)

DDFLines

Specifies the text to be added to the data definition file. When you double-click the DDFLines

box, the software opens a text editor and displays the current text (if any exists). You can use the text editor to set the data lines to be added to the data definition file.

Click File > Update to add the text, or click File > Cancel to close the text editor without saving the changes.

Styles


Supplementary AuxiliaryPrograms Object

The Supplementary AuxilliaryPrograms object controls the running of auxiliary programs--

custom pre- or post-processing utilities.

When you click the Supplementary AuxilliaryPrograms object in the Detail panel, the

Properties panel shows all of the properties that are currently defined for the selected object.

StartProgram (on page 461)

StartTimeout (on page 462)

StopOnError (on page 462)

EndProgram (on page 462)



Styles


StartProgram

Allows a pre-processor program to be specified, which is run before Personal ISOGEN runs.

1. Double-click in the StartProgram data field.

2. In the Specify path for file, click Browse and navigate to the appropriate file and then

click OK.

StartTimeout

Defines a time in seconds after which the pre-processor or post-processor program does not run.

StopOnError

Controls whether Personal ISOGEN is run if the pre-processor program experiences an error and fails.

True - Personal Isogen does not run if the pre-processor fails.

False - Personal Isogen still runs if the pre-processor fails.

EndProgram

Allows a post-processor program to be specified, which is run after Personal ISOGEN runs.

1. Double-click in the EndProgram data field.

2. In the Specify path for file, click Browse and navigate to the appropriate file and then click OK.

Styles


Supplementary BendingReport Object

The Supplementary BendingReport object controls the content and output of the bending and

cutting information report file.

When you click the Supplementary BendingReport object in the Detail panel, the Properties

panel displays all the currently defined properties for that object.


Path (on page 464)


ReportContents (on page 464)



Styles


Enabled

Controls whether file is created.



Path

1. Double-click in the Path data field.

In the Specify path for file, click Browse and navigate to the appropriate file and then click OK.

Append




ReportContents

Controls the contents of the bending report.

Standard - Pipe fabrication information including details of each cut piece, listing the

length, diameter, end preparation, material part number, and other related details to assist manufacturing. In addition bending information giving distances to/between bends, angle and radius details are also output.

Full - Pipe fabrication information as for Standard, but also including details to enable profiling the shaped ends of pipe and the cutting of holes, such as for tees, olets, crosses, and so on.

Styles


Supplementary CentreOfGravity Object

The Supplementary CentreOfGravity object controls the data which is output for center of

gravity and wet (pipe contains fluid) and dry (pipe empty of fluid) weight calculations, including or excluding insulation weight.

When you click the Supplementary CentreOfGravity in the Detail panel, the Properties panel

shows all of the properties that are currently defined for the selected object.




ForDryPipe (on page 466)

ForWetPipe (on page 466)

PerPipeLine (on page 467)

ShowInsulationWeight (on page 467)

ShowWetWeight (on page 467)

Styles


Enabled

Controls whether any center of gravity and weight calculations are done.

True - Those center of gravity and weight calculations which are set by ForDryPIpe , ForWetPipe , ShowInsulationWeight and ShowWetWeight properties are calculated.

False - All four center of gravity and weight calculations suppressed.

Defines

OS 82 Pos 1

See also ForDryPIpe (on page 466) ForWetPipe (on page 466) ShowInsulationWeight (on page 467) ShowWetWeight (on page 467)

ForDryPipe

Controls which center of gravity calculations are done for dry (empty) pipe.

Not Required - Center of gravity for dry pipe not required.

Calc C of G - Center of gravity calculated for dry pipe.

Calc C of G with Insulation - Center of gravity calculated for insulated dry pipe.

Calc C of G with and without Insulation - Center of gravity calculated for dry pipe and insulated dry pipe.

Calculated values can then be output on the drawing using text positioning facilities, or output in

a Weight/CofG summary report.

Defines

OS 82 Pos 4

ForWetPipe

Controls which center of gravity calculations are done for wet (full) pipe.

Not Required - Center of gravity for wet pipe not required.

Calc C of G - Center of gravity calculated for wet pipe.

Calc C of G with Insulation - Center of gravity calculated for insulated wet pipe.

Calc C of G with and without Insulation - Center of gravity calculated for wet pipe and insulated wet pipe.

Calculated values can then be output on the drawing using text positioning facilities, or output in a Weight/CofG summary report.

Defines

OS 82 Pos 5

Styles


PerPipeLine

Controls whether the center of gravity and weight calculations are per pipeline or per

drawing/spool.

The Enabled property must also be set to True.

True - Calculations are per pipeline.

False - Calculations are per drawing/spool.

Defines

OS 82 Pos 1

See also Enabled (on page 465)

ShowInsulationWeight

Controls whether insulation weight is calculated.

True - Insulation weight is calculated.

False - Insulation weight not calculated.

Insulation weight can then be output on the drawing using text positioning facilities, or in a

Weight/CofG summary report.

Defines

OS 82 Pos 3

ShowWetWeight

Controls whether wet (full) weight is calculated.

True - Wet weight is calculated.

False - Wet weight not calculated.

Wet weight can then be output on the drawing using text positioning facilities, or in a

Weight/CofG summary report.

Defines

OS 82 Pos 2

Styles


Supplementary DataFiles Object

The Supplementary DataFiles object has a collection called ISOGENFiles, which is used to

store the names of input files used by ISOGEN, and the file path for the particular file. The object contains a single property, Count, which is set by the software and indicates the number of objects in the ISOGENFiles (see "Supplementary DataFiles ISOGENFiles Collection" on page 469) collection.

See also Count (on page 468) Supplementary DataFiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 469)

Styles


Count

Displays the number of local detail sketches/information notes in the LocalSketch collection.

Supplementary DataFiles ISOGENFiles Collection

The Supplementary DataFiles ISOGENFiles collection stores the types and path of each individual input data file used by ISOGEN (this style).

FileType (on page 470)

FilePath (on page 471)

FileText (on page 535)





Styles


FileType

Double-click in the FileType data box and then use the FileType list to select the type of input

data file. You can choose from the following:

ASCII-SYMBOL (see "ASCII-SYMBOLS"

on page 471)

ASCII version of the ISOGEN symbol file.

BENDING-DATABASE-FILE (see "Supplementary BendingReport Object" on

page 462)

Bending, cutting and hole information file.

BINARY-SYMBOLS (on page 471) Binary version of the ISOGEN symbol file.

BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE (on page 471) Bolting information file.

COMPONENT-INFORMATION (see "COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE" on

page 471)

Contains detailed information related to individual

components.

FUNCTION-DEFINITION (see

"FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE" on page

473)

Defines the content and structure of other files that

form part of the Component Information facilities.

INSULATION-WEIGHT (see "INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE" on page

475)

Contains weights of insulation on a bore / unit length

basis for each Insulation specification.

PROJECT-MATERIAL-DATA (see

"PROJECT-MATERIALDATA" on page

476)

System specified.

PROJECT-MATERIAL-MANAGER (see "PROJECT-MATERIALMANAGER" on

page 476)

System specified.

PROJECT-PIPELINE (on page 476) System specified.

REMARKS (on page 478) Remarks data file.

OPTION-SWITCH-LONG

DRAWING-DEFINITION

POSITIONED-TEXT

ALTERNATIVE-TEXT

MATERIAL-LIST-DEFINITION

WELDING-DEFINITION

TITLE-BLOCK

SPECIAL-INSTRUMENTS

User alternative control files.

User now have the option of specifying an alternative

file (in the Supplementary DataFiles).

SPECIFIC-GRAVITY (see "INSULATION-

WEIGHT-FILE" on page 475)

Contains the specific gravity values for pipeline fluid or

gas contents.

Styles


FilePath

Defines the file path.

1. Double-click the FilePath box.


FileText

1. Double-click the FileText box.

2. In the text editor that displays, edit the data as necessary.

3. Click File > Update to save your changes.

To close the text editor without saving your changes, click File > Cancel.

File Types

ASCII-SYMBOLS

This file contains definitions of the user-defined ISOGEN symbols, such as new and re-defined SKEYS. Information in this file is used to override default ISOGEN behavior when plotting shapes in the isometric drawing to represent components in the pipeline.

This item points to the ASCII (human-readable) form of the symbol data. It can be created using the ISOGEN Symbols editor software.

BINARY-SYMBOLS

This file contains definitions of the user-defined ISOGEN symbols, such as new and re-defined

SKEYS. Information in this file is used to override default ISOGEN behavior when plotting shapes in the Isometric drawing to represent components in the pipeline.

This item points to the BINARY (computer-readable) form of the symbol data. It can be created

using the ISOGEN Symbols editor software.

BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE

The BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE contains the look up data to allow ISOGEN to produce reports on the bolted connections in the pipeline.

For a description of the contents of this file, see FDF BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT (on page 478).

Styles


COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE

For each component entry, the CIF holds the following items of information:

Design contractor's item code (the Item code in the input Piping data file).

Main and secondary component bores.

Main and secondary Thickness/Ratings.

Fabricator's item code.

Fabricator's material description.

Component weight.

This is the maximum amount of information that can be held for each component. What actually appears depends upon what facilities are actually being used.

The structure/layout of the CIF file is defined by the COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE Section of the FUNCTION DEFINITION FILE.

CIF Rules Summary

1. Weight data in the CIF takes precedence over weights in the Piping data file; however, in the event of missing values, SmartPlant Spoolgen can supplement the data in the CIF by searching the Piping data file.

2. I the C of G facility is to be used then component weight information must be available in

either the CIF or the Piping data files.

3. Several ITEM-CODE-IDENTIFIER entries can be made in the CIF to cater for a variety of different Design Contractor or Fabricator item codes. (The actual ones to be used are specified in the COMPONENT- INFORMATION-SELECTION section of the FDF file).

4. For those who want to handle projects with Metric bore Piping data files and Imperial bore Piping data files, if required, two sets of N.S. and N.S.SEC information can be included in a CIF, with both projects sharing the one CIF. However, where this is done, two separate FDFs are required in order to specify the required N.S. to be used on a particular project.

Item Codes in the CIF

Item codes for components in the CIF can be constructed (and hence specified) in two different

ways, thus:

1. In the form of unique codes with built-in bore information:

E.g.

E-90-CS1-40:3 - this is an elbow of 3" bore

E-90-CS1-40:4 - this is the same elbow, but of 4" bore

R-C-CS1-40:4X3 - this is a concentric reducer of bore 4" X 3".

This type of Item code does not need N.S. and N.S.SEC data fields to specify the bore

information because this is built-in to the Item code.

1. Codes having separate bores:

E.g.

Styles


E-90-CS1-40

R-C-CS1-40

This type of Item code does need N.S. and N.S.SEC data fields to completely identify the

component.

There are no rules as to whom should use which of the two types of item code construction.

Some Design contractors use the first type.

See also COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE Section (on page 481) FUNCTION DEFINITION FILE. (on page 473)

FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE

The function definition file (FDF) provides the following functions:

1. It defines the units (see "UNITS-DEFINITION Section" on page 489) for

Lengths

Weights

Nominal sizes

2. It defines the content and structure of other files that form part of the Component

Information Facilities, namely:

COMPONENT INFORMATION FILE (CIF) (on page 471)

INSULATION WEIGHT FILE (IWF) (on page 475)

SPECIFIC GRAVITY FILE (SGF) (on page 478)

3. Through a system of cross-reference pointers in the COMPONENT-INFORMATION-

SELECTION Section, (on page 483) it defines the functions of the various columns of data in the COMPONENT INFORMATION FILE (on page 471) .

4. Bend Radius (see "MISC-DEFINITIONS Section" on page 485) identification.

5. The format of the Weight and C of G summary file (on page 490) .

6. Definition of IDF changes (on page 484) - where nominated IDF record types can have their normal use either changed or deleted.

7. The format of the

Bolting output (on page 478)

Pipeline attribute file (on page 475)

HeatTreatment/NDE file ( on page 474)

Site Assembly report ( on page 486)

Spool attribute file (on page 488)

Styles


The FDF has several sections, each having a keyword identifier

UNITS-DEFINITION ( on page 489)

COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE (on page 481)

COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION (on page 483)

INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE (on page 485)

SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE (on page 486)

MISC-DEFINITIONS (on page 485)

WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-FILE ( on page 490)

IDF-REVISIONS (on page 484)

BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT (on page 478)

PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE (on page 475)

HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE (on page 474)

SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT (on page 486)

SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE (on page 488)

Each of these sections then has its own list of data inputs.

HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE

This FDF section defines the format of the HeatTreatment/NDE file, which must be defined in the Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles collection.

The section heading HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE is followed by the following identifiers

and associated data:

DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the HeatTreatment/NDE attribute file. (Optional).

IGNORE_CHARACTER data - Where data is any character that should be ignored when the software is extracting data for the HeatTreatment/NDE attribute file if it is a delimited file. (Optional).

Data Items - The data items are the -900 to -999 series text type record identifiers, followed

by either start-col,. end-col,. or position in file dependent upon whether a delimiter character is set. The data after the ! is a comment for user information, as shown in the following example:



DELIMITER-CHARACTER ,

-950 2 ! PWHT N.S. RANGE

-951 3 ! PWHT TEMPERATURE

-952 4 ! PREHEAT N.S RANGE

-953 5 ! PREHEAT TEMPERATURE

-954 6 ! % RT

-955 7 ! % MT

-956 8 ! % PT

-957 9 ! % BHN

See also Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 469)

Styles


INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE

Contains weights of insulation on a bore/unit length basis for each insulation specification. This

is needed if Insulation weights are to be calculated and output.

CAL199 1/2 1.04

CAL199 3/4 1.04

CAL199 1 1.04

CAL199 1.1/4 1.04

CAL199 1.1/2 1.19

CAL199 2 1.49

CAL199 2.1/2 1.63

OPTION-SWITCH-OVERRIDE

You can specify an OPTION-SWITCH-OVERRIDE file, which can contain specific values for particular option switches:

130 6

139 12

The switches in the previous example override any value output by SmartPlant I-Configure.

Alternatively, switch positions can be specified using a * to indicate an unchanged switch position.

For example, to set switch 1 position 3 to 4, type the following in the file:

1 4**

Likewise, to set switch 10 position 5 to 1, and position 2 to 3, type the following:

10 1**3*

PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE

This FDF section defines the format of the Pipeline attributes file, which must be defined in the Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles collection. The section heading PIPELINE-

ATTRIBUTE-FILE is followed by the following identifiers and associated data.

DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the Pipeline attribute file. (Optional).

IGNORE_CHARACTER data - Where data is any character that should be ignored when

the program is extracting data for the Pipeline attribute file if it is a delimited file. (Optional).

The data items are the -900 to -999 series text type record identifiers, followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file dependent upon whether a delimiter character is set. The data after the ! is a comment for user information.


PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE


-900 1 ! LINE REF.

-901 2 ! P-ID FROM

-902 3 ! P-ID TO

-903 4 ! UNIT NO.

Styles


-904 5 ! SERVICE CODE

-905 6 ! PAINT CODE

-906 7 ! OPERATING TEMP.

-907 8 ! DESIGN TEMP.

-908 9 ! OPERATING PRESSURE

-909 10 ! DESIGN PRESSURE

-910 11 ! TEST PRESSURE

-911 12 ! TEST TYPE

-912 13 ! INSULATION THKS.

-913 14 ! HEAT TRACING

-914 15 ! INSULATION CODE

-915 16 ! DESIGN CODE

-916 17 ! MATERIAL

If the pipeline attribute mechanism is being used, do not add the same record to the project defaults. Doing so overwrites the data when the isometric is being created by the data in the Pipeline attributes file.

See also Project Defaults (on page 37) Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 469)

PROJECT-MATERIALDATA

The file contains data to add to, or override the information in the SystemMaterialData.xml file.

This defines the available component types, SKEYs, PCF data and groups (and the mapping between them) for use in other software, such as SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen.

This item only needs to be set on one of the mandatory import styles – such as SGImport or

ISImport - if such a file has been created for use on a particular project.

PROJECT-MATERIALMANAGER

The file contains data that adds to or overrides the information in the

SystemMaterialManager.xml file. This defines the attributes available for materials used in other software, such as SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen.

This item only needs to be set on one of the mandatory import styles – such as SGImport or

ISImport - if such a file has been created for use on a particular project.

PROJECT-PIPELINE

The file contains data that adds to or overrides the information in the SystemPOD.xml file. This

defines the attributes available for different objects, such as pipelines, components, and welds, that are used in other products such as SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen.

By default this item is set on the mandatory SGImport and ISImport styles delivered with

SmartPlant Isometrics and SmartPlant Spoolgen respectively. This setting should not normally be changed.

REFERENCE-PLANE-DEFINITION

ISOGEN can be configured to display the coordinates of nominated points in the pipeline

relative to a reference plane, rather than as absolute values. The nominated points are indicated by the presence of LOCATION-POINT entries in the PCF. The reference plane can be a set of

Styles


steel columns and floor levels in a process plant, or it can be a set of decks and bulkheads in a ship.

The reference planes are defined in a file and properties of this object are used to control how ISOGEN behaves when plotting the location points. A location point table can be defined and plotted on the isometric drawing. Optionally, location points can be shown with coordinates.

Six AlternateText numbers have been assigned to output relative directions.

-443 ^ + ? (used for positive relative position in e/w plane).

-444 ^ - ? (used for negative relative position in e/w plane).

-445 ^ + ? (used for positive relative position in n/s plane).

-446 ^ - ? (used for negative relative position in n/s plane).

-447 ^ + ? (used for positive relative position in u/d plane).

-448 ^ - ? (used for negative relative position in u/d plane).

^ is substituted with the reference plane name.

? is substituted with the distance from the reference plane.

An AlternateText record has been assigned to be output as a delimiter text between the relative

direction and its relative position.

-449 = (default setting)

–449 AlternateText set to blank only outputs the relative position.

Styles


See also Supplementary ReferencePlanes Object (on page 525)

Location Points (on page 588)

REMARKS

The Remarks file contains a set of texts (remarks) that can be associated with components in the pipeline by setting the Remark property. The file has the following format:

Remark# Remark

1 Remark1

2 Remark2

SPECIFIC-GRAVITY

Contains the specific gravity values for pipeline fluid or gas contents. Each pipeline in the project needs to have an entry in this file if the weight of full--or wet weight--pipelines are

required to be output.

4"-DDE-4325 1.1

4"-ARR-6000 1.0

6"-ASC-6900 1.2

FDF Sections BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT

This FDF section defines the format of the output for Bolted connections on the Erection

operations list.

The section heading BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT is followed by the following three sub-section

headings, each of which has its own data items:

BOLTING-INFO-CONTROLS

List - (MANDATORY) The form of list to be output, either:

CONTINUOUS-DOWN

CONTINUOUS-UP

Styles


Start Position - (MANDATORY) Information to identify the START - POSITION for the output of the bolting Information (where X pos and Y pos are input in mm--real (one decimal place) or integer, such as 225, or 225.0, or 225.5).

START-POSITION X pos Y pos

Vertical Spacing - (MANDATORY) The vertical spacing required between each horizontal line of text on the bolting information list (where value is input in mm--real (one decimal place) or integer, such as 6, 6.0, or 6.2).

VERTICAL-SPACING value

Max Number of Lines - (MANDATORY) The maximum number of output lines that can fit on the backing sheet (where the value is an integer number).

MAXIMUM-ENTRIES value

Text Height - The height of the characters in the text to be output on the bolting

information list (where value is real (one decimal place) or integer, such as 2, 2.0, or 2.3_)

TEXT-HEIGHT value (in mm)

Drawing Layer - (OPTIONAL) Identification of the drawing layer for outputting the

text on to (where value is an integer number that is valid for the graphics system being used).

DRAWING-LAYER value

Text Thickness (Weight) - (OPTIONAL) Identification of the text thickness (weight)

for all output text to the bolting information list (where value is an integer number that is valid for the graphics system being used).

TEXT-THICKNESS value


BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT - - - - - - - Section Header

BOLTING-INFO-CONTROL

CONTINUOUS-DOWN

START-POSITION 450.0 106.0

VERTICAL-SPACING 4.0

TEXT-HEIGHT 2.5

MAXIMUM-ENTRIES 12

DRAWING-LAYER 16

TEXT-THICKNESS 2

BOLTING-DATA-ITEMS

BOLT-SET NO - Bolted connection number - generated by the system.

N.S. - Nominal size at bolted connection. Output in this format: - 4" = 040.

BOLT-UP-TYPE - One of these values from the related piping specification entry in the bolting information file (-146 type).

HT HW MW NW

BOLT-DIA - Diameter of the bolts used for the flanged connection. Taken from the 115 bolt record in the IDF. Output in this format: - ½" = 050 ¾" = 007 1" = 010.

BOLT-QUANTITY - Number of bolts required for the flanged connection. Taken (two digits) from the 115 bolt record in the IDF.

TENSION-A: Any value set in the BIF (-146) file against the relevant piping

specification / size combination.

Styles


TENSION-B: Any value found to go into relevant column on operations list.

TORQUE-SETTING

Each of the previous is followed by the X position for location on the drawing

frame.


BOLTING-INFO-DATA-ITEMS

'BOLT-SET-NO' 450.0

'N.S.' 463.0

'BOLT-UP-TYPE' 486.0

'BOLT-DIA' 504.0

'BOLT-QUANTITY' 522.0

'TENSION-A' 540.0

'TENSION-B' 558.0

'TORQUE-SETTING 576.0

BOLTING-INFO-FILE

'PIPING–SPEC‟ Start Col End Col

„MIN–N.S.‟ Start Col End Col

„MAX–N.S.‟ Start Col End Col

„BOLT–UP–TYPE‟ Start Col End Col

„TENSION–A‟ Start Col End Col

„TENSION–B‟ Start Col End Col

„TORQUE–SETTING‟ Start Col End Col

Where Start Col and End Col indicate the extremities of each data column in the file.

MIN“N.S. and MAX-N.S. - Must be stated in the Units specified at the top of the FDF file.

BOLT“UP“TYPE - Must be one of the following:

HT = Hydraulic Tensioner

HW = Hydraulic Wrench

MW = Manual Torque Wrench

NW = Non Mandatory (Hand Tightening)

TENSION-A, TENSION“B or TORQUE“SETTING -

All entries on the list are triggered by the presence of a Bolt Record (-115 type) in the

IDF or the attribute BOLT in a PCF.

Each bolted connection is indicated on the isometric using the following properties:

SiteAssemblyIDs (on page 273)

SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize (on page 272)


SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure (on page 270)

Styles


The site assembly uses AText -478, default J to prefix the flange assembly identification (J1 or JA).

Considering the following example:

BOLTING–INFO–FILE

„PIPING–SPEC‟ 1 12

„MIN–N.S.‟ 15 20

„MAX–N.S.‟ 23 29

„BOLT–UP–TYPE‟ 32 33

„TENSION–A‟ 35 45

„TENSION–B‟ 50 60

„TORQUE–SETTING‟ 65 75

See also SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT (on page 486)

COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE Section

This FDF Section provides a cross-reference to entries in the Component Information File (CIF) by defining the layout and content of that file.

The section heading COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE is followed by the following

identifiers and associated data.

ITEM-CODE-IDENTIFIER

N.S.

N.S.SEC

N.S.THIRD

N.S.THICKNESS/RATING

N.S.SEC.THICKNESS/RATING

N.S.WALL-THICKNESS

N.S.SEC.WALL-THICKNESS

DESCRIPTION

COMPONENT-WEIGHT

COMPONENT-CONTENT-WEIGHT

EQUIVILANT-INSULATION-LENGTH

N.S.CONVERSION-CODE

RADIUS-DIAMETERS

RADIUS-MM

RADIUS-INCH

DETAILED-SKETCH

INFORMATION-NOTE

COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 to COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 (-190 tom -199)

MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE1 to MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE10 (-80 to -89)

User Defined Names matching those used in the PCF file

DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the Component

Information File (on page 471).

Styles


Each of the following is followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file, depending on

whether a delimiter character is set.

FDF Identifier Used For Used For

ITEM-CODE-IDENTIFIER 1) Design contractors item code.

2) Fabricator's item code.

2) Fabricator's item code.

N.S. The main bore of a component -

specified in accordance with the UNITS-BORE Identifier in the

UNITS-DEFINITION section of the FDF.

The main bore of a component -

specified in accordance with the UNITS-BORE Identifier in the UNITS-

DEFINITION section of the FDF.

N.S.SEC The secondary bore of a component - specified in

accordance with the UNITS-BORE Identifier in the UNITS-DEFINITION

section of the FDF.

The secondary bore of a component - specified in accordance with the

UNITS-BORE Identifier in the UNITS-DEFINITION section of the FDF.

N.S.THIRD A third bore of a component -

specified in accordance with the UNITS-BORE Identifier in the


A third bore of a component -

specified in accordance with the UNITS-BORE Identifier in the UNITS-

DEFINITION section of the FDF.

N.S.THICKNESS/RATING Thickness/Rating for the main bore of a component.

Thickness/Rating for the main bore of a component.

N.S.SEC.THICKNESS/RATING Thickness/Rating for the secondary bore of a component.

Thickness/Rating for the secondary bore of a component.

N.S.OUTSIDE-DIAMETER The outside diameter of the main bore of the component.

The outside diameter of the main bore of the component.

N.S.SEC.OUTSIDE-DIAMETER The outside diameter of the

secondary bore of the component.

The outside diameter of the

secondary bore of the component.

N.S.WALL-THICKNESS The wall thickness of the main bore

of the component.

The wall thickness of the main bore

of the component.

N.S.SEC.WALL-THICKNESS The wall thickness of the secondary bore of the component.

The wall thickness of the secondary bore of the component.

DESCRIPTION Fabricator's Material descriptions. Fabricator's Material descriptions.

COMPONENT-WEIGHT The weight of a component - in the

weight units specified in accordance with the UNITS-

WEIGHT Identifier in the UNITS- DEFINITION section of the FDF.

The weight of a component - in the

weight units specified in accordance with the UNITS-WEIGHT Identifier in

the UNITS- DEFINITION section of the FDF.

COMPONENT-CONTENT-WEIGHT The weight of the components water volume specified in

accordance with the UNITS-WEIGHT Identifier in the UNITS-

DEFINITION section of the FDF. For PIPE the weight specified

here’s the weight per unit length for the length units specified in the

UNITS-LENGTH Identifier in the UNITS-DEFINITION section of the

FDF.

The weight of the components water volume specified in accordance with

the UNITS-WEIGHT Identifier in the UNITS- DEFINITION section of the

FDF. For PIPE the weight specified here’s the weight per unit length for

the length units specified in the UNITS-LENGTH Identifier in the


Styles


FDF Identifier Used For Used For

EQUIVILANT-INSULATION-LENGTH

Used to equate the component insulation weight to a length based

weight. Values here are the equivalent length of insulation in

accordance with the weight and length units in the UNITS- LENGTH

and UNITS-WEIGHT Identifiers in the UNITS- DEFINITION section of

the FDF.

Used to equate the component insulation weight to a length based

weight. Values here are the equivalent length of insulation in

accordance with the weight and length units in the UNITS- LENGTH

and UNITS-WEIGHT Identifiers in the UNITS- DEFINITION section of the

FDF.

N.S.CONVERSION-CODE

This is used where the N.S. and N.S. Header output on the Weld list and Weld summary outputs is to be

replaced by a user supplied code.

This is used where the N.S. and N.S. Header output on the Weld list and Weld summary outputs is to be

replaced by a user supplied code.

RADIUS-DIAMETERS Bend radius specified as a number of diameters.

Bend radius specified as a number of diameters.

RADIUS-MM Bend radius specified in mm. Bend radius specified in mm.

RADIUS-INCH Bend radius specified in mm. Bend radius specified in mm.

DETAILED-SKETCH Detail sketch file name. Detail sketch file name.

INFORMATION-NOTE Information note name. Information note name.

COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 to

COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10

Data for Component attributes. Data for Component attributes.

MATERIAL-ATTRIBUTE1 to MATERIAL- ATTRIBUTE10

Data for Material attributes. Data for Material attributes.

User-defined names matching those used in the PCF file.

Data for user-defined names. Data for user-defined names.

The actual number of these data items present will depend upon which of the available facilities are being used.

The maximum width of the file is 500 characters and any characters outside this limit are ignored.

Styles


COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION Section

This FDF section provides a link between the Design contractor's item code that appears in the Piping data file and the location of the corresponding entry for that component in the COMPONENT INFORMATION-FILE. (on page 471)

This FDF section defines:

Design Contractors Item Code

Alternative Item Code

Alternative Description

The section heading COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION is followed by the

following Identifiers:

ITEM-CODE-INPUT data

ITEM-CODE-OUTPUT data

DESCRIPTION data

Where data is either a start column or file position, dependent upon

whether the Component Information file is a delimited file or not.

The minimum requirement in this section is the Input Item code:

COMPONENT-INFORMATION-SELECTION (section identifier)

ITEM-CODE-INPUT 1

Alternatively, if Item Code Transposition and Material Description

Substitution were being used the file would look like this:


ITEM-CODE-INPUT 1

ITEM-CODE-OUTPUT 51

DESCRIPTION 76

Or for a Delimited file.


ITEM-CODE-INPUT 1

ITEM-CODE-OUTPUT 7

DESCRIPTION 10

Styles


IDF-REVISIONS Section

The IDF-REVISIONS FDF section allows you to delete or change the meaning of the numeric record identifiers that are present in all IDFs in order to make them fully compatible with ISOGEN. This facility is particularly useful to those customers who use the Component

Information facility, but who are handling non-standard Alias IDFs, such as IDFs generated by PDMS.

The IDF-REVISIONS section heading is followed by one or several of these entries, depending

on what manipulation of records needs to be performed:

DELETE-RECORD data - Where data = any invalid record number that is to be ignored.

CHANGE-RECORD data1 data2 - Where data1 = any invalid record number and data2= the replacement record number for data1.

REDEFINED-SKEY data1 data2 - Where data 1 is the SKEY in the IDF file and data2 is the SKEY to be used instead.

The previous examples are for illustrative purposes only--do not use them. If you need assistance, contact Intergraph Support.

IDF-REVISIONS

DELETE-RECORD -900

CHANGE-RECORD 707 877

REDEFINED-SKEY LWWN FLWN

INSULTATION-WEIGHT-FILE Section

This FDF section provides a cross reference to entries in the insulation weight file (IWF) by defining the layout and content of that file.

The INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE section heading can be followed by the following

identifiers and associated data:

DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the insulation weight file, as shown in the following example:


DELIMITER-CHARACTER :

INSULATION-SPECIFICATION 1

N.S. 2

INSULATION-WEIGHT 3

Start-col. End-col. - Position in the file dependent upon whether a delimiter character is set, as shown in the following example:


INSULATION-SPECIFICATION 1 14

N.S. 15 24

INSULATION-WEIGHT 25 34

Styles


MISC-DEFINITIONS Section

This FDF section is for facilities that do not warrant their own separate section. Currently, it is only used to define BEND RADIUS values.

The input structure in this FDF section is a section heading:

MISC-DEFINITIONS

followed by the bend radius definition:

BEND-RADIUS data units

where

data = the pipe bend radius.

units = Inch or mm, when radius is a value, and D when the radius is a number of pipe diameters.

Consider the following:

MISC-DEFINITIONS

BEND-RADIUS 5 D

Other typical data inputs are:

BEND-RADIUS 3 D

BEND-RADIUS 5.5 D

BEND-RADIUS 12 INCH

BEND-RADIUS 18.5 INCH

BEND-RADIUS 220 MM

BEND-RADIUS 1250 MM

Bend radius information is used by both the C of G and weights facilities.

SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE Section

This FDF section provides a cross reference to entries in the specific gravity file (SGF) by

defining the layout and content of that file.

The SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE section heading is followed by the following identifiers and

associated data.

DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the specific gravity file .

PIPELINE-REFERENCE - Followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file, depending on whether a delimiter character is used.

SPECIFIC-GRAVITY - Followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file, depending on whether a delimiter character is used.

Start col. end col. Example

SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE

PIPELINE-REFERENCE 1 20

SPECIFIC-GRAVITY 21 30

Delimiter Example

SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE

DELIMITER-CHARACTER :

PIPELINE-REFERENCE 1

SPECIFIC-GRAVITY 2

Styles


SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT

This FDF section defines the format of the output for the Site assembly report.

The section heading SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT is followed by 2 sub section heading:

SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT-COLUMN-HEADINGS - The column headings are arranged

and spaced out just as they are required to appear in the output report file, as shown in the following example:

SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT

SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT-COLUMN-HEADINGS

LINEREF DRG ASSY NS BOLT NO ASSY

NO NO DIA OFF ATT1

The column headings look out of line in the example as the space character is narrower

than an actual character.

SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT-DATA-ITEMS - Permissible data items are:

Unique Name IDF Record Number

PIPELINE-REFERENCE

-6

DRG -

REVISION -8

BATCH -10

AREA -10

PROJECT-

IDENTIFIER

-9

PIPING-SPEC -11

NOMINAL-CLASS -12

NOMINAL-RATING -12

DATE-DMY -14

INSULATION-SPEC -15

TRACING-SPEC -16

PAINTING-SPEC -17

PIPELINE-TEMP -19

MISC-SPEC1 -41

MISC-SPEC2 -42

MISC-SPEC3 -43

MISC-SPEC4 -44

MISC-SPEC5 -45

Styles


Unique Name IDF Record Number

BOLT-SET-NO -

N.S. -

BOLT-UP-TYPE -

BOLT-DIA

BOLT-QUANTITY -

TENSION-A -

TENSION-B -

TORQUE-SETTING -

ATTRIBURE0 to

ATTRIBUTE99

-600 to -699

ATTRIBUTE100 to

ATTRIBUTE199

-900 to -999

ASSEMBLY-

ATTRIBUTE1 to ASSEMBLY- ATTRIBUTE10

-190 to -199


SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT-DATA-ITEMS


'DRG' 10 L

'BOLT-SET-NO' 15 L

'N.S.' 21 L

'BOLT-DIA' 26 L

'BOLT-QUANTITY' 36 L

'ASSEMBLY-ATTRIBUTE1' 45 L

All the above is carried out in SmartPlant I-Configure, the Assembly attribute is set in the

software (SmartPlant Spoolgen) by selecting each bolt and then setting the value for the Assembly attribute on that bolt.

The data items BOLT-UP-TYPE, TENSION-A, TENSION-B and TORQUE-SETTING require the bolting info file (BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT section of FDF).

See also

BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT (on page 478)

Styles


SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE

This FDF section defines the format of the spool attribute file, which must be defined in the Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles collection.

The SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE section heading is followed by the following identifiers and associated data.

DELIMITER-CHARACTER data - Where data specifies the delimiter used in the Spool attribute file. (Optional).

IGNORE_CHARACTER data - Where data is any character that should be ignored when the program is extracting data for the Spool attribute file if it is a delimited file. (Optional).

The data items are -28, -91, -170 to -179, followed by either start-col. end-col. or position in file,

depending on whether a delimiter character is set. This can be followed by an ! as a comment for user information.


SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE

DELIMITER-CHARACTER ;

IGNORE-CHARACTER “

-28 1 ! Spool Name

-170 2 ! Spool Attribute 1

-171 3 ! Spool Attribute 2

See also Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 469)

Styles


UNITS-DEFINITION Section

This FDF section defines the following units for data items listed in the COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE (CIF):

Unit Length

Weight

Nominal Size (N.S.)

The section heading UNITS-DEFINITION is followed by the following identifiers and associated data.

UNITS-BORE data - Where data = Inch or mm.

UNITS-LENGTH data - Where data = Foot (Weights / Foot) or Meter (Weights / Meter).

UNITS-WEIGHT data - Where data = Kgs. or Lbs.


UNITS-DEFINITION

UNITS-BORE INCH

UNITS-LENGTH METRE

UNITS-WEIGHT KGS

Input Data Formats

Inch bores - You can type 1/2, 0.1/2, 0.5, 1, 1.0, 1.1/2, 1.5, 2, 10 (1 1/2 is also permitted for 1½).

mm bores - You can type. 50 or 50.0.

Weights - You can type. 25 or 25.0

Units Selection Process

Usually, it is expected that the units' settings in OS 41 and the FDF match, as they should do. However, if they do not match, the following sequence is followed.

Units for Weights & Lengths - The units specified in OS 41 are regarded as the master units. For example, if OS 41 specifies weights in LBS but the weights in the CIF are kgs, then all kgs values are converted to lbs. on output. A similar procedure is applied to length units.

Units for N.S. - The unit settings in the FDF and Piping data file must be the same. A check

is performed between the N.S. units as defined by O.S.41 and the UNITS-BORE attribute in the FDF. If they differ, the run is terminated with Error Code 35:1126.

Styles


WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-FILE Section

This FDF Section defines the required content and layout structure of the weight and center of gravity printed output summary file.

The input definition for this section is in three separate parts:

SUMMARY-FILES-TITLES

The section heading SUMMARY-FILE-TITLES is followed by the title data. There are two different types of title data information items:

1. Variable user-defined descriptive title text, such as PROJECT NO. or AREA REF.

2. Fixed data items. These are standard keywords or equivalent I/D numbers that are used to describe a required data field. They are written inside single quote marks ( ' ' ) to distinguish

them from the variable user-defined title text.

The two types are used together to make-up the required file heading.

The following rules apply to the title data section SUMMARY-FILE-TITLES text:

Both user-defined descriptive title text and fixed keyword text are positioned in the output file on the exact line and in the column position at which they are input.

User-defined descriptive title text can be written in upper- or lower- case characters and is re-produced as specified in this respect.

Fixed data items can be defined either as keywords written in upper-case characters and

enclosed in single quotes, or can be represented by their standard text record numbers (inside single quotes).

Empty lines for spacing purposes are created by the instruction Blank.

Use the characters ' ' in conjunction with the word PAGE to obtain page numbers. For example, PAGE ' ' automatically produces PAGE 1, PAGE 2, and so on, at the top of each printed output page.

SUMMARY-FILE-COLUMN-HEADINGS

The section heading SUMMARY-FILE-COLUMN-HEADINGS is followed by the column

headings data (this section is optional).

All column headings data are reported in the output file exactly as it is specified in the FDF. The

text should be positioned to suit the data items layout that follows it.

Styles


SUMMARY-FILE-DATA-ITEMS

The section heading SUMMARY-FILE-DATA-ITEMS is followed by the data item entries.

Each data item entry in this part of the FDF is input using either two, three, or five parameters, depending on the type of data item being specified.

C of G with a vertical layout uses three parameters.

C of G with a horizontal layout uses five parameters.

All others including weight output use two parameters.

The first part is a keyword that must be enclosed in single quotes ( ' ' ).

Typical entries would appear like this:

Most keywords have an equivalent numeric identifier which can be used as an alternative to the

text. For example, the numeric equivalent of PIPELINE-REFERENCE is -6.

Numbers, when used, must also be enclosed by single quotes ' '.

Styles


Character justification letters.

L Left

R Right

N Number (the column position in this case is the decimal)

V Vertical output

For example:

E3252

N1020

EL -1566

H Horizontal output

For example:

E3252 N1020 EL -1566

V and H parameters are only used on C of G output data because this type of data has three output values, not one, and their output layout direction must be specified. The V parameter

gives an automatic Vertical layout but where Horizontal justification is specified, extra starting column information must be given one for each C of G output value, as shown in the following example:

'COFG-POSITION-DRY' 44 58 72 L H

Data items available for output in the WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARYFILE.

Key Name Equivalent I/D

Number

Equivalent I/D

Number

AREA or BATCH -10 -10

COFG-POSITION-DRY -714 -714

COFG-POSITION-DRY+INSU -715 -715

COFG-POSITION-WET -716 -716

COFG-POSITION-WET+INSU -717 -717

DATE -14 -14

DRG

ERECTION-WEIGHT-DRG -706 -706

ERECTION-WEIGHT-PIPELINE -719 -719

FABRICATION-WEIGHT-DRG -705 -705

FABRICATION-WEIGHT-PIPELINE -718 -718

INSULATION-SPEC -15 -15

OFFSHORE-WEIGHT-DRG -707 -707

Styles


Key Name Equivalent I/D

Number

Equivalent I/D

Number

OFFSHORE-WEIGHT-PIPELINE -720 -720

PIPELINE-REFERENCE -6 -6

PIPING-SPEC -11 -11

PROJECT-IDENTIFIER -9 -9

REVISION -8 -8

SPECIFIC-GRAVITY -18 -18

SYSTEM-REFERENCE -25 -25

TOTAL-DRY-WEIGHT-DRG -704 -704

TOTAL-DRY-WEIGHT-PIPELINE -711 -711

TOTAL-INSULATION-WEIGHT -713 -713

TOTAL-WET-WEIGHT -712 -712

If a -143 Specific Gravity File (SGF) is present then values from that file will be used in preference to any Specific Gravity value found in an IDF -18 record (see table

above).


The name of the output C of G summary file is specified in SmartPlant I-Configure in the

Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles collection (on page 534). Also, the properties on the Supplementary CentreOfGravity object (on page 464) in SmartPlant I-Configure control the data generated for center of gravity.

Styles


Supplementary DetailSketches Object

The Supplementary DetailSketches object stores the properties for detail sketches and information notes. Set the properties as appropriate.

When you click the Supplementary DetailSketches object in the Detail panel, the Properties

panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.


FileFormat

Path (on page 496)

Colour (on page 496)

LabelLayer (on page 496)

LabelType (on page 496)

LabelX (on page 497)

LabelY (on page 497)

Styles


SketchHeight (on page 498)

SketchPosition (on page 498)

SketchWidth (on page 500)




PositionFix (on page 501)

NoteFormat (on page 501)

NoteHeight (on page 501)

NotePosition (on page 501)

NoteWidth (on page 503)


Path

Specifies either the directory where the DXF files are located or the filename for the MicroStation Cell.

Colour

Sets the drawing color for the detail sketch. This value is expressed as an integer number

representing the color number as defined in the output drawing system (MicroStation or AutoCAD).

LabelLayer

Controls the drawing layer for the cross-reference character used on the detail sketch. Use the

LabelLayer list to select the appropriate layer.

LabelType

Controls whether the cross reference used for the detail sketch is numeric or alphabetic.

Alpha - The cross reference is alphabetic.

Styles


Number - The cross reference is numeric.

LabelX

Specifies the X position of the cross-reference on the detail sketch.

Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.


LabelY

Specifies the Y position of the cross-reference on the detail sketch.

Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.


Styles


SketchHeight

Sets the height of the detail sketch in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting



SketchPosition

Controls the position of the detail sketch on the isometric.

Default - Across the top of the drawing.

Styles


Local - Locally positioned around the isometric in free spaces.

Overflow - On a separate overflow drawing.

Styles


SketchWidth

Sets the width for the detail sketch in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting



TextHeight

Specifies the text height in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units set on the Options dialog box.

See also


Styles


TextWeight


TextFont

Defines what font is used. Use the TextFont list to specify the font type.

PositionFix

Controls positioning of detail sketches along top of drawing border.

True - Detail sketches positioned left to right along top of drawing border.

False - Normal detail sketch placement observed - sketches run right to left along top of drawing border.

NoteFormat

Sets the file format for the information note. Use the NoteFormat list to select the appropriate format.

The format of the detail sketch, information note and, drawing output, must be consistent. If the FileFormat is DXF, then the NoteFormat and OutputFormat properties must also be DXF. These properties change automatically when the OutputFormat or TemplateFormat

properties change.

See also OutputFormat (on page 186)

TemplateFormat (on page 338)

NoteHeight

Sets the height (as a real number) of the Information note in mm or inches (as a real number), depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.


Styles


NotePosition

Controls the position of the information note on the isometric.

Default - Across the bottom of the drawing.

Local - All notes are automatically placed along the bottom of the isometric, from left to right.

Styles


OverFlow - In the case of duplicate occurrences, only one copy of each unique Information note is output on a single isometric.

NoteWidth

Sets the width (as a real number) for the information note in mm or inches, depending on the setting of the drawing units in the Options dialog box.


Styles


Supplementary DetailSketches LocalSketches Object

The Supplementary DetailSketches LocalSketches object contains the LocalSketch collection, used to store the properties for local detail sketches and information notes.

The object also contains a single property called Count, which is defined by the software and indicates the number of definitions stored in the collection.


Count

Displays the number of data files--input files to be read by ISOGEN--currently defined in the style.

Styles


Supplementary DetailSketches LocalSketches LocalSketch Collection

The Supplementary DetailSketches LocalSketches LocalSketch collection stores the properties for local detail sketches and information notes.


ID (on page 505)

Height (on page 506)

Width (on page 506)



You can modify each of the properties as needed. Some properties have a selection list that which pops-up when the property is double-clicked. Other properties are typed entries --click in

the field to place the cursor, and then type the required value.



Styles


ID

The detail sketch or Information note string identifier. The following are examples:

Detail Sketch - SK1.dxf

Information Note - note_G.dxf or note_S.dxf

For AutoCAD and SmartSketch, the file format extension must be shown in the ID, such as SK1.dxf or SK1.igr.

For MicroStation, specify just the name of the sketch as found in the graphic cell library, as in SK1.

Inclusion of _G --as in GenNote_G.dxf or GenNote_G--as part of the information note name signifies a general note, which is output on every sheet.

Inclusion of _S--as in SpecNote_S.dxf or SpecNote_S--signifies a specific note, which is only output on the sheet on which the component having this particular note attached is output.

Height

Single value for the height of the detail sketch / Information note in mm.

Width

Single value for the width of the detail sketch / information note in mm.

LabelX

Specifies the horizontal cross-reference position measured from the bottom left corner of the

detail sketch in mm.

LabelY

Specifies the vertical cross-reference position measured from the bottom left corner of the detail sketch in mm.

Styles


Supplementary DwgInfoFile Object

The Supplementary DwgInfoFile object stores the definitions for the Drawing Information

Cross Reference output file in the TextColumns collection .

When you click the Supplementary DwgInfoFile object in the Detail panel, the Properties

panel displays its properties:


Path (on page 508)


Count (on page 508)


Enabled




Styles


Path

1. Double-click in the Path data box.

2. In the Specify path for file, navigate to the appropriate file and then click OK.

HeaderLines




You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the material list definition (MLD) file .

Count

Displays the number of columns in the Drawing Information Cross Reference file to be output.

Styles


Supplementary DwgInfoFile TextColumns Collection

The Supplementary DwgInfoFile TextColumns collection is used to store the definitions of the data to be output to the Drawing Cross Reference summary report file. You can define the

following properties:



Start (on page 510)


To modify the AttributeName property, double-click on the attribute name you want to change and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Offset t and MaxChars



AttributeName

Specifies the name of the attribute to be output to the drawing information file.

Styles


Justification


Start

Specifies the character position at which the attribute is output.

MaxChars

Defines the maximum number of characters to be output.

Styles


Supplementary EquipmentTrim Object

The Supplementary EquipmentTrim object controls the various functions related to the

generation of equipment trim (vessel trim) drawings and associated material control files.

DataFile (on page 511)

MaterialFile (on page 512)

PartNos (on page 512)



Styles


DataFile

Specifies whether the information is for a single pipeline or multi-pipeline file.

One Pipeline per file - Single pipeline type file (where there is only one set of header records).

Multiple Pipelines per file - Multiple pipeline type file (where there are multiple sets of header records).

Defines

OS 52 Pos 3

MaterialFile

Controls the content of the material control file for equipment trims.

Accumulate Per Item - All components related to a single equipment item accumulated and

written to the material control file under a single Pipeline entry. Equipment Trim Reference is used as the Pipeline Reference for identification purposes.

Accumulate Per Nozzle - Components for each nozzle kept separate and written to the material control file using the individual Pipeline Reference associated with each nozzle.

Defines

OS 52 Pos 2

PartNos

Controls the part number sequencing on the material list for equipment trim drawings.

Start at 1 per nozzle - Single pipeline type file (where there is only one set of header records).

Start at 1 per drawing - Multiple pipeline type file (where there are multiple sets of header records).

Defines

OS 52 Pos 1

Styles


Supplementary Fonts Object

The Supplementary Fonts object controls the use of the ISOGEN font information file. If

required, it can be used to turn Off the use of fonts in the ISOGEN output files.

By default, there is always a supplementary fonts path. If one does not exist--for example, you

delete it--it is recreated automatically. However, if you set the Enabled switch, this setting is persisted.

When importing a style, the Enabled property is set OFF before import starts, and only resets if

there was previously a FONT- INFORMATION-FILE (or IDF -152 record) reference in the imported style.




Path (on page 514)

Styles


Enabled

Controls whether fonts are enabled or not.

True - Fonts are enabled.

False - Fonts are disabled.

Path

Specifies the path to font information file.

Styles


Supplementary HeatTreatment Object

The Supplementary HeatTreatment object is used to set up heat treatment /NDE testing data.

When you click the Supplementary HeatTreatmen object in the Detail panel, the Properties





Path (on page 516)

Text (on page 516)

Enabled




Styles


Path

Specifies the path to the heat treatment/NDE file.

Text

When you double-click the Text property box, the software opens the Edit Text dialog box, in which you can type the data for heat treatment/NDE testing. This data is written to the data definition file (DDF) when the Enabled property is set to True.

The data required is as follows:

1. The link between the piping data file and the data in the heat treatment / NDE file.

The form of this depends upon whether the heat treatment file is a delimited file or not.

a. Columnized style file:

ELEMENT1 'Data Identifier' Start Pos End pos

ELEMENT2 'Data Identifier' Start Pos End pos

b. Delimited file:

ELEMENT1 'Data Identifier' 'Data Field no'

ELEMENT2 'Data Identifier' 'Data Field no'

Styles


In both cases a 'Data Identifier’ can be either:

i) FIXED DATA IDENTIFIER

(PIPING SPEC)

(SERVICE / COMMODITY)

(BATCH)

etc

ii) IDF RECORD No. -10

-11

etc

iii) ATTRIBUTE ID No. -900 to -999

The Start Pos / End Pos or 'Data Field No.' entries are the location in the heat treatment /

NDE file of the required data items that are to be matched to the declared „Data Identifier‟.

Any number of ELEMENTS can be used for matching up to a maximum of 10.

2. An optional selection based on nominal size.

The form of this depends upon whether the heat treatment file is a delimited file or not.

a. Columnized style file

N.S.-CHECK Start Pos End Pos Start Pos End Pos

or

N.S.-CHECK-WELD Start Pos End Pos Start Pos End Pos

b. Delimited file

N.S.-CHECK Data Field No. Data Field No.

N.S.-CHECK-WELD Data Field No. Data Field No.

In both cases the first data nominated must be the N.S. information, and the second - the related data to be output.

Any number of N.S. - CHECK or N.S. - CHECK - WELD entries up to a maximum of 10.

Typical use of the N.S. - CHECK - WELD facility is for P.W.H.T. and PREHEAT

requirements in specific nominal sizes or size ranges only.

Whenever N.S. - CHECK or N.S. - CHECK - WELD is used, the N.S. information and

any related data must be in separate data fields.

N.S. information is restricted to only using the following characters.

< Less than

> Greater than

= Equal to

18 Integer number representing a N.S. in either inches or mm.

Styles


Typical entries can be (all using inch bores):

= 54 Data only output if N.S. is 54”.

> = 18 Data only output if N.S. is 18” or above.

> = 42 < = 48 Data only output if N.S. is 42” to 48” inclusive.

A combined data column to signal Y (for YES) N (for NO) or a N.S. entry can be used in association with a related data column.

This would be done say P.W.H.T. information where the requirement was for a simple Y / N indication in generated data files, but the actual P.W.H.T. temperature was required to be output on any plotted isometric and the requirement for P.W.H.T. was also N.S. related.

Example of text entered in text box:

ELEMENT1 'PIPING-SPEC' 1

N.S.-CHECK 2 3

The section heading HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILEUSE- DEFINITION heading is

generated by SmartPlant I-Configure.

The corresponding entry in FDF:

HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE (Delimited type file)

DELIMITE-CHARACTER ,


-950 1 ! Piping Specification

-951 2 ! PWHT N.S. range

-952 3 ! PWHT Temperature

-953 4 ! Design Code

-954 5 ! Service / Commodity

Styles


Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS Object

The Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS object contains a collection called InstrumentSKEYs

(see "Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYs Collection" on page 520), which is used to store the SKEY of components to be treated as instruments. The object also includes a single property called Count, defined by the software, which indicates the number of definitions stored in the InstrumentSKEYs collection.

See also Count (on page 519) Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYs Collection (on page 520)

Count

Displays the number of SKEYS to be treated as instruments, instead of their default type.

Styles


Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYs Collection

The Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYs Collection controls which SKEYs are

treated like Instruments.


ISKEYText

Set the SKEY required in the ISKEYText box.

The Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYS collection contains a list of SKEYs

that ISOGEN treats as Instruments. This property holds one SKEY from that list.

See also Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS InstrumentSKEYS Collection (on page 520)

Styles


Supplementary PipeLineAtts Object

The Supplementary PipeLineAtts object is used to set up PIPELINE-REFERENCE-

LOCATION-DEFINITION in the data definition file (DDF).

When you click the Supplementary DetailSketches object in the Detail panel, the Properties





Path (on page 523)

Text (on page 523)

The link between the pipeline and the data in the Pipeline attributes file, the format of which is specified in the Function Definition File (FDF), is specified as follows:

Styles


RECORD-ID data1 data2

Where data1 specifies which IDF record is to be used as the key match field and data 2 is the data record in the Pipeline Attributes file.

RECORD-ID -6 -900

In the previous example, it is the -6 record (pipeline reference) which is used to match the -900

in the pipeline attribute file. which should also be the pipeline reference.

FULL-REFERENCE data

Where FULL-REFERENCE means the Pipeline Reference in the IDF and data is the data record in the Pipeline Attributes File, which corresponds to the Pipeline Reference.

FULL-REFERENCE -900

ELEMENTNo. Start Pos End Pos Attribute No.

ELEMENT1 Start Pos End Pos Attribute No.



Where Start Pos and End Pos are the positions in the Pipeline Reference of the required data that will be used to look for a match in the Pipeline Attribute File.

Attribute No. is the -900 series Attribute ID that has been allocated to the particular element in the Pipeline Attribute File, as shown in the following example of an actual pipeline reference (-6 record):

PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION

ELEMENT1 4 6 -902

ELEMENT2 8 9 -903

ELEMENT3 10 12 -904

Corresponding entry in FDF:

PIPELINE - ATTRIBUTE - FILE (Delimited type File)

DELIMITER - CHARACTER ,

IGNORE - CHARACTER “

-900 1 ! P & ID From

-901 2 ! P & ID To

-902 3 ! Unit No.


-904 5 ! Sequence No.

-905 6 ! Paint Code

Styles


Extracting a Service/Commodity Value from the Pipeline Reference

This information can be extracted from the Pipeline Reference by setting the following in the DDF.

Section heading:

SERVICE/COMMODITY-DEFINITION

Followed by:

LOCATION-IN-PIPELINE-REF start pos end pos

Where Start Pos and End Pos are the positions in the Pipeline Reference (-6 record) of the required Service/Commodity identifier

Using the previous example this would be:

SERVICE/COMMODITY-DEFINITION

LOCATION-IN-PIPELINE-REF 8 9

This identifier is available as a data item in both the Spool information file and the Site weld

information file.

Enabled

Controls whether file is created or not.

True - Creates the file.

False - Does not create the file.

Path

Specifies the path to the Pipeline attributes file.

Text

When you double-click the Text property box, the software opens the Edit Text box, in which

you can type in the data required for the PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION in the DDF. This data is written to the Data definition file (DDF) when the Enabled property is set to True.

Styles


The link can be specified either as:

RECORD-ID data1 data2

Where data1 specifies which IDF record is to be used as the key match field, and data2 is the

data record in the Pipeline Attributes file

RECORD-ID -6 -900

In the previous example, the -6 record (Pipeline Reference), which is used to match the -900 in

the Pipeline attributes file, is also used in the Pipeline Reference.

Or the link can be specified as:

FULL-REFERENCE data

Where FULL-REFERENCE means the Pipeline Reference in the IDF, and data is the data record in the Pipeline attributes file, which corresponds to the Pipeline Reference.

FULL-REFERENCE -900

Elements are specified as follows:




In the previous example, Start Pos and End Pos are the positions in the Pipeline Reference of

the required data that is used to look for a match in the Pipeline attributes file.

Attribute No is the -900 series Attribute ID that has been allocated to the particular element in

the Pipeline attributes file.

Any number of elements can be used up to a maximum of 10.

Actual Pipeline Reference (-6 record)

ELEMENT1 4 6 -902

ELEMENT2 8 9 -903

ELEMENT3 10 12 -904

The PIPELINE-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION heading is generated by SmartPlant I-Configure.

Corresponding entry in FDF:

PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE (Delimited type File)



-900 1 ! P & ID From

-901 2 ! P & ID To

-902 3 ! Unit No.


-904 5 ! Sequence No.

-905 6 ! Paint Code

Styles


Supplementary ReferencePlanes Object

The Supplementary ReferencePlanes object is used to set up the data required for the output of location point data on the isometric.

When you click the Supplementary ReferencePlanes object in the Detail panel, the Properties




Path (on page 526)

LocationPtStyle (on page 526)

CoordStyleAtLocationPts (on page 526)

CoordStyle (on page 527)

See also REFERENCE-PLANE-DEFINITION (on page 476) Location Points (on page 588)

Styles


Enabled

Controls processing of the reference plane file.

True - Enable the processing of the reference plane file.

False - Suppresses the processing of the reference plane file.

Path

Specifies the path to the reference plane file.

LocationPtStyle

Controls how the location point message is output on the isometric.

Special Text - Shows a box containing “****”.

Square Ended Box - Shows a box containing the contents of AText –nnn, such as AText -471 LOCATION$POINT?

Defines

OS 123 Pos 4

Styles


CoordStyleAtLocationPts

Controls how ISOGEN shows co-ordinates at each LOCATION-POINT entered in the PCF/IDF.

None - No co-ordinates are displayed.

World Co-ordinates - Location point co-ordinates are shown in world, or absolute co-ordinates.

Relative Co-ordinates - Location point co-ordinates are shown in relative co-ordinates, with respect to the nearest reference plane.

Defines

OS 66 Pos 7

Styles


CoordStyle

Controls how ISOGEN shows coordinates at branches and elbows.

None - No coordinates are displayed.

World Coordinates - Coordinates are shown in world, or absolute co-ordinates.

Relative Coordinates - Coordinates are shown in relative c-ordinates, with respect to the nearest reference plane.

Defines

OS 66 Pos 7

Styles


Supplementary RepeatFile Object

The Supplementary RepeatFile object controls what data is going to be repeated from an

ISOGEN run.

When you click the Supplementary RepeatFile object in the Detail panel, the Properties panel

shows the properties that are currently defined for that object.




Path (on page 530)

ByPass (on page 530)

ComponentInfo (on page 530)

Content (on page 530)

MatList (on page 531)

SplitPoints (on page 531)

SpoolID (on page 532)

Styles


StartPoint (on page 532)

WeldNos (on page 532)

Enabled

Controls whether repeatability return file is created.



Path

Specifies path for the repeatability return file.

ByPass

Controls whether by-pass component re-ordering is done.

True - Re-ordering of components at by-pass closure points to be done.

False - No re-ordering of components at by-pass closure points.

Defines

OS 109 Pos 6

ComponentInfo

Controls whether and how component information is written to the repeatability return file.

Off - Component information not to be written to the repeatability return file.

With Numeric - For numeric component information to be written to the repeatability return file.

With Alphabetic - For full alphanumeric component information to be written to the repeatability return file. (Maximum of 4 characters).

Defines

OS 109 Pos 5

Styles


Content

Controls the type of repeatability return file output.

Standard - Default for standard repeatability return file type (FOR052) containing just a list of successfully processed pipelines.

Original - For a repeatability repeatability return file containing the original repeat information.

Revised - For a repeatability return file containing the original repeat information and new records for spool information.

Original ASCII - ASCII version of Original.

Revised ASCII - ASCII version of Revised.

Defines

OS 109 Pos 1

MatList

Controls whether material list part number information is written to the repeatability return file.

True - Material list part number information to be written to the repeatability return file.

False - Material list part number information not to be written to the repeatability return file.

Defines

OS 109 Pos 8

Styles


SplitPoints

Controls whether split points are to be written to the repeatability return file.

True - Split point information to be written to the repeatability return file.

False - Split point information not to be written to the repeatability return file.

Defines

OS 109 Pos 3

SpoolID

Controls whether and how the SpoolID information is written to the repeatability return file.

Off - SpoolID information not to be written to the repeatability return file.

Numeric - SpoolID information to be written to the repeatability return file.

Alphabetic - For full alphanumeric SpoolID information to be written to the repeatability return file. (Maximum of 4 characters).

Defines

OS 109 Pos 4

StartPoint

Controls whether the start point for data extraction is written to the repeatability return file.

True - Data extraction start point to be written to the repeatability return file.

False - Data extraction start point not to be written to the repeatability return file.

Defines

OS 109 Pos 2

WeldNos

Controls whether Weld number information is written to the repeatability return file.

True - Weld number information to be written to the repeatability return file.

False - Weld number information not to be written to the repeatability return file.

Defines

OS 109 Pos 7

Styles


Supplementary ReportFiles Object

The Supplementary ReportFiles object is used to store the names of output files that ISOGEN

can create and the file path to be used for the particular file. The object has one property, Count--set by the program, which indicates the number of data entries in the ISOGENFiles collection.

When you click the Supplementary ReportFiles object in the Detail panel, the Properties

panel shows the properties that are currently defined for that object. .

See also Count (on page 533) Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 534)

Count

Displays the number of data entries stored in the ISOGENFiles collection (see "Supplementary

ReportFiles ISOGENFiles Collection" on page 534).

Styles


Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles Collection

The Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles collection stores the output files and their paths

which ISOGEN creates during runtime.

System environment variables such as TEMP, USERNAME or COMPUTERNAME can be used in folder or file paths for report files.


FileType (on page 535)

FilePath (on page 535)

FileText (on page 535)

Styles


FileType

Double click the FileType list to select the type of output report file:

FilePath

Defines the file path.

1. Double-click the FilePath box.


Set the actual filename required. The filename itself can be dynamic (see "Dynamic File Naming" on page 582), using the Pipeline Reference, for example, as part of the filename.

Styles


FileText

1. Double-click the FileText box.

2. In the text editor that displays, edit the data as necessary.

3. Click File > Update to save your changes.

To close the text editor without saving your changes, click File > Cancel.

Supplementary SiteWeldFile Object

The Supplementary SiteWeldFile object has a collection called TextColumns, which is used to

store the definitions of the data to be output in the Site weld file. It also has a Count property, is set by the program, which indicates the number of definitions in the TextColumns collection.

When you click the Supplementary SiteWeldFile object in the Detail panel, the Properties


Styles




Path (on page 537)




Count (on page 538)

Enabled

Controls whether site weld file is created or not.



Path

Specifies path for the site weld file.

FileFormat




Delimiter


Blank

Comma (,)

Semi-colon (;)

Colon (:)

HeaderLines




You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the weld definition file (WDF).

Styles


Count

Displays the number of data entries stored in the TextColumns collection (see "Supplementary

SiteWeldFile TextColumns Collection" on page 538).

Supplementary SiteWeldFile TextColumns Collection

The Supplementary SiteWeldFile TextColumns collection stores the definitions of the data to be output for the site weld summary file.




Start (on page 540)


To modify the AttributeName property, double-click on the attribute name you want to change and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Justification, Start and MaxChars properties, double-click the value you want to change, type a new value and then press Enter.

Styles




AttributeName


Styles


Justification


Start


MaxChars


Supplementary SpoolAttributes Object

The Supplementary SpoolAttibutes object is used to set up the data required for the output of spool attributes data on the isometric and to summary report files, such as the spool Information file.




Path (on page 541)

Styles


ReferenceIDLocation (on page 541)

Count (on page 541)

Enabled

Controls the creation of spool attributes.

True - Attributes are created.

False - Attributes are not created.

Path

Specifies path for the spool attribute file.

ReferenceIDLocation

Sets the spool record as the key to map spool attributes.

Value - Spool records for possible mapping to spool attribute file:

-28

-91

- 170 to -179

The following is an example of the typical input in the DDF file:

SPOOL-REFERENCE-LOCATION-DEFINITION

RECORD-ID -28

Count

Displays the number of SpoolAttEnclosure definitions defined.

Styles


Supplementary SpoolAttributes SpoolAttEnclosure Collection

The Supplementary SpoolAttributes SpoolAttEnclosure collection controls the assignment of enclosure styles to spool attributes used to plot them on the isometric.



EnclosureType (on page 542)

AttributeName


required attribute.

EnclosureType

Specify the name of the enclosure type. Use the EnclosureType list to select the required

description.

Styles


Supplementary SpoolInformation Object

The Supplementary SpoolInformation object stores the definitions for the spool information

file in the TextColumns collection.


Path (on page 544)




Count (on page 544)

The Count property, set by the software, indicates the number of data entries in the TextColumns collection.



See also Supplementary SpoolInformation TextColumns Collection (on page 544)

Styles


Enabled

Controls whether the creation of the spool information file.



Path

Specifies path for the spool information file.

FileFormat




Delimiter

Defines the character used as a delimiter when the file format is delimited. The possible

characters are

Blank

Comma (,)

Semi-colon (;)

Colon (:)

HeaderLines




You must ensure that the column headers match the column positions set in the data definition file (DDF).

Count

Displays the number of data entries stored in the TextColumns collection (see "Supplementary SpoolInformation TextColumns Collection" on page 544).

Styles


Supplementary SpoolInformation TextColumns Collection

The Supplementary SpoolInformation TextColumns collection stores the definitions of the data to be output to the spool information file.

The value in parentheses after the name is a count of how many definitions are stored in the collection.



Start (on page 546)





Styles


AttributeName


required attribute.

Justification


Start


MaxChars


Supplementary TableAttributes Object

The Supplementary TableAttributes object has a collection called DFTableAttributes, which is used to store the definitions of the data to be output as a table on the isometric. The object

contains a single property called Count, which is set by the software and indicates the number of definitions in the collection.

The existing Supplementary TableAttributes object contains the same information as the DrawingFrame TableAttributes object. You can use either object to modify the properties, although the DrawingFrame TableAttributes object supports real numbers in the XPos and

YPos properties.

Styles



DrawingFrame TableAttributes Object (on page 343)

Count

Displays the number of definitions in the DFTableAttributes collection (see "Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection" on page 547).

Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection

The Supplementary TableAttributes DFTablesAttributes collection stores the definitions of the data to be output as a table on the isometric.




Xpos (on page 548)

Ypos (on page 548)

Styles


Font (on page 548)




Layer (on page 549)

Color (see "Colour" on page 549)






XSpacing (on page 550)

YSpacing (on page 550)

AttributeName


CharHeight


See also


Xpos

Defines the X position for the text in mm or inches (set as real number), depending on the setting


See also


Ypos




Font

Defines the font to be used when plotting the attribute in the table.

Styles


BarCode

Several barcode standards exist worldwide to suit different industries, but Alias has standardized on just three. Type 1, 2 or 3 for the appropriate barcode:

1 - Barcode 39

2 - Barcode 25


CharWidth



Justification


Layer

Specify the integer number that identifies the required layer (in the Drawing Layers collection

(see "Drawing Layers Layers Collection" on page 300)) to which the definition is applied.

Colour

Type the integer number that represent the color number as defined in the output drawing system

(MicroStation or AutoCAD).

RotationAngle


TextWeight


ColumnsNumber


Direction


Styles


LinesNumber


XSpacing





YSpacing





Styles


Supplementary TitleTexts Object

The Supplementary TitleTexts object has a collection called TitleTexts, which is used to store

the text to be used as titles. The object also has one property called Count , which is set by the software and indicates the number of definitions in the TitleTexts collection.

See also Supplementary TitleTexts TitleTexts Collection (on page 552)

Count

Displays the number of definitions in the TitleTexts collection (see "Supplementary TitleTexts TitleTexts Collection" on page 552).

Styles


Supplementary TitleTexts TitleTexts Collection

The definitions in the Supplementary TitleTexts TitleTexts collection each store one line of text

to be used for the titles. The collection contains a single property called TText (on page 552).


TText

Contains the text for each title line.

Styles


Supplementary Traceability Object

The Supplementary Traceability object is used to define a unique part numbers table that can

be output on the isometric and a traceability output file. The object has a TextColumns collection, which is used to define the data output to the traceability file.

When you click the Supplementary Traceability object in the Detail panel, the Properties

panel shows the currently defined properties for the selected object.




Path (on page 554)

UniquePartNumber (on page 554)

IdentifierSuffix (on page 554)

PlotUniquePtNoTable (on page 554)

ContinuousDown (on page 554)



Styles







Count (on page 556)

Enabled

Controls the creation of the traceability file.



Path

Defines the output path of the traceability file.

UniquePartNumber

Controls the type of suffix used for the unique part number and whether unique part numbers are

used.

Alpha - Suffix is alphabetic.

Numeric - Suffix is numeric.

Off - All unique part number facilities are switched off.

IdentifierSuffix

Controls sequencing of the IdentifierSuffix used for part numbering on the isometric.

Continuous - Unique part number suffixes are generated as a continuous sequence across all output drawings, such as 6.1 to 6.6 on Drg 1 of 2 and 6.7 to 6.11 on Drg 2 of 2, and so on.

PerDrawing - Unique part number suffixes are generated with a new sequence for each drawing, such as 6.1 to 6.6 on Drg 1 of 2 and 6.1 to 6.5 on Drg 2 of 2, and so on.

PlotUniquePtNoTable

Controls whether the unique part numbers table is plotted.

True - Table is plotted.

False - Table is not plotted.

Styles


ContinuousDown

Controls the direction of the unique part numbers table.

True - Table direction is down.

False - Table direction is up.

StartX

Defines the starting X position of the list in mm, or inches (as a real number), depending on the



StartY

Defines the starting Y position of the list in mm, or inches (as a real number), depending on the



VerticalSpacing

Sets the vertical spacing between each horizontal line in mm or inches (as a real number),



TextHeight

Sets the text height to be used. Type a value (real number) in mm or inches, depending on the


See also


Styles


MaxEntries

Controls the maximum number of entries before an overflow drawing is created if the TableOverflow property is set to True.

See also TableOverflow (on page 556)

TableOverflow

Controls whether an overflow drawing is created when MaxEntries is exceeded.

True - An overflow drawing is created.

False - No overflow drawing is created.

See also MaxEntries (on page 555)

DrawingLayer

Sets the drawing layer for unique part number table. Type a value in the range of 1 to 50.

Count

Displays the number of definitions in the TextColumns collection (see "Supplementary

Traceability TextColumns Collection" on page 556).

Styles


Supplementary Traceability TextColumns Collection

The Supplementary Traceability TextColumns collection stores the definitions of data for the output of unique part numbers.

The value in parentheses after the name is a count of how many definitions are stored in the collection.



Start (on page 558)



and then select a new name in the AttributenName list. To modify the Justivication, Start and MaxChars properties, double-click the value you want to change, type a new value and then press Enter.


Styles


AttributeName


Justification


Start


MaxChars


Copy and Paste a Style

1. In the Project View panel, select a style and then click Copy .

Alternatively, you can click Edit > Copy or right-click the style in the Project Panel and then click Copy.

Styles


2. Click Paste .

Alternatively, you can click Edit > Paste or right-click in the Project Panel and click

Paste.

The software displays the name of the copied style is now shown in the right-hand box at the

bottom of the window.

3. In the New Style Name dialog box, type a name for the new style in the New style name box and then click OK.

The software displays a default name based on the style being copied.

Create a Style

New styles are based on one of the templates (on page 12) that are delivered with the SmartPlant I-Configure.


a. Create an isometric directory (see "Create an Isometric Directory" on page 88) and

project (see "Create a Project" on page 121).

b. Select an existing project in the Project View panel.

2. Click New Style .

Alternatively, you can click File > New > Style.

3. In the New Style dialog box, select the product to which the style applies in the Application list.

The software displays all the template styles that are available for the selected product.

4. Un-check all of the style templates which you do not want to create and ensure that the

required template is checked.

5. Double-click the Name box of the selected style, highlight the existing style name, and then type the new style name.

6. Click OK.

The software displays the new style under the project in the Project View panel.

You can edit the properties of the new style as required.

Styles


If you leave all style templates checked and click OK, any existing styles with the same name under the project are duplicated, and _1 is appended to the style name. For example, Final-Basic becomes Final-Basic_1.

You can also create styles when a new project is created.

See also Copy and Paste a Style (on page 558) Delete a Style (on page 560) Export a Style (on page 560) Import Style (see "Import Style Settings" on page 73) Save a Style (on page 561) Select a Style (on page 561)

Delete a Style

Deleting a style cannot be undone.

1. In the Project View panel, click the style you want to delete.

2. Click Delete .


You can also right-click the style in the Project View panel and then click Delete.

Styles


Export a Style

Before a style can be used, it must first be exported. When you export a style, a variety of control files that ISOGEN requires, such as option switches, to process isometrics and reports are created.

Click Export Style .

Alternatively, you can click File > Export.

The settings are written to the Style.xml file.

See also Export (on page 35) CanExport (on page 127) ExportBehaviour (on page 126) StyleState (on page 126) Style.xml (on page 15)

Save a Style

Before any changes that you make to a style can be used, you must first save the style. Settings

are saved to the Style.xml file.

Click Save Style .

Alternatively, you can click File > Save.


Select a Style

In the Project View panel click a style in the tree view.

As in Windows Explorer, you can click and to expand and close the nodes in the tree view.

The status bar updates to show that this is the current style.

You can use the objects in the Detail panel to modify the selected style.

Styles



S E C T I O N 7

Bar Codes

To output a bar code on the isometric, such as the following example for the pipeline reference, you must create an attribute.

1. In the DFAttributes collection, create an attribute:

Techniques

Techniques


2. Set the following properties as indicated:

AttributeName (on page 548) to Pipeline Reference.

BarCode (on page 342) to one of the valid codes (1,2 or 3).

CharHeight (on page 548) to appropriate value.

Font (on page 548) to the font that matches the bar code value (Bar Code 39, Bar Code 25, Bar Code 25 Interleaved).

XPos (on page 548) to the X position for start of bar code.

YPos (on page 548) to the Y position for the start of bar code.

The required bar code must be installed in your system fonts directory.

For AutoCAD users, the backing sheet must have the bar code font defined in it.

See also AutoCAD Barcode (on page 564) DFAttributes Collection (on page 547)

AutoCAD Barcode

To add the barcode font to an AutoCAD backing sheet, open the DWG, or DXF file and add a new text style.

Style Name - Set the style name to the name of the font file without the extension. In the example shown, this is Bar39.ttf. Ensure that the style name matches the filename specified in the ISOGEN font information file (FONTSTD.FIF)

ISOGEN-FONT 151

FAMILY T

DESCRIPTION Bar Code 39

FILENAME BAR39.ttf

Techniques


Font Name - Select the font name in the list, and must be set to the required font. In the example shown, this is Bar Code 39. If the backing sheet is a DWG file, the backing sheet just needs saving. However, if it is a DXF file, then the file must be saved as DXF release12 format. Use a

text editor to edit the DXF file by finding the second occurrence of the text style name (Bar39) and change the txt entry following that to the font name (Bar Code 39).

These actions are necessary because of restrictions in SmartPlant Spoolgen, which cannot handle DXF files later that AutoCAD Release 12. Also, the DXFOUT routine in AutoCAD for a Release 12 version DXF does not allow references to True type fonts to be

made; they are changed to txt.

See also Bar codes (on page 563)

Bends and Elbows

Bends

You can control the way bends are depicted on the isometric using the BendRadius and

BendRepresentation properties of the Drawing Format object.

The dimensioning for bends is controlled by the Drawing Dimensions object's

CoordInateOutputBends and SeparatePulledBend properties.

See also CoordOutputBends (on page 204) Drawing Dimensions Object (on page 199) Drawing Format Object (on page 239)

SeparatePulledBend (on page 217)

Elbows

You can control the elbows are depicted on the isometric using the ElbowRadius and

ElbowRepresentation properties of the Drawing Format object. Elbows can also be converted to bends in SmartPlant Spoolgen. The project property ElbowConversion is used to define the rules for this.

See also Drawing Format Object (on page 239) ElbowConversion (on page 94)

ElbowRadius (on page 253) ElbowRepresentation (on page 253)

Techniques


External Data

Used to load data from an external data source, such as a database, on import.

The external data configuration (GED Configuration) properties and External Data on Import

on the Project Defaults dialog box need to be set lo allow the external data to be loaded on import. You must also define the external data source and create an XML configuration file, which defines the external data.

See also External Data Source (on page 566) GED Configuration (on page 102) Project Defaults (on page 37) XML Configuration File (on page 567)

External Data Source

External data can be in any ODBC compliant form.

In order to use the data source, you must Control Panel to define a Data Source Name (DSN). In Windows 2000, for example, click Start> Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Data

Sources.

In the previous illustration, PROJECT1 is the DSN name and has been set up as a Microsoft Excel data source.

Techniques


The type of data that is linked to depends on the ODBC database drivers currently installed on the machine. Drivers for Access, Excel, SQL Server and Oracle databases are commonly available.

Setting up a new DSN is dependent on the database being set-up, but in each case, the DSN is given a name and this name is used in the XML Configuration file referenced by the software which uses it.

XML Configuration File

The following example shows the basic structure of the XML configuration file:

<EXTERNAL-DATA Version="POS3">

<PIPELINE>

<!”Data specifying how to retrieve pipeline data --> (see "Pipeline

Data" on page 567)

</PIPELINE>

<COMPONENT>

<!”Data specifying how to retrieve component data --> (see

"Component and Information Data" on page 569)

</COMPONENT>

<INFORMATION>

<!”Data specifying how to retrieve Information data --> (see

"Component and Information Data" on page 569)

</ INFORMATION>

</EXTERNAL-DATA>

Multiple PIPELINE, COMPONENT and INFORMATION entries are permitted in the configuration file.

Macros

A “macro” can appear in the SQL or FILTER tags defined below. A macro is a string that is

substituted at run time with a value taken from the current open POD (Pipeline object data) file. A macro starts and finishes with a “$” character.

Macros take the general form $OBJECT.PROPERTY_OR_ATTRIBUTE$. For example,

$P.PIPELINE-REFERENCE$ means the Pipeline object PIPELINE-REFERENCE attribute.

The following macros are available to reference PODFILE objects:

$P = PIPELINE ... $P.PIPELINE-REFERENCE = PIPELINE PIPELINE-REFERENCE ATTRIBUTE

$C = COMPONENT ... $C.PIPING-SPEC = COMPONENT PIPING-SPEC ATTRIBUTE

$M = MATERIAL ... $M.ItemCode = MATERIAL ItemCode property

$I = INFORMATION ... $I.MESSAGE-TEXT = MESSAGE-TEXT ATTRIBUTE

See also Component and Information Data (on page 569) Example XML Configuration File (on page 570)

External Data Source (on page 566) Pipeline Data (on page 567)

Techniques


Pipeline Data

Within the <PIPELINE> tags, the following tags can appear.

<DSN>

The <DSN> tag contains the name of the DSN created to point to the database containing the

external data. For example:

<DSN> PROJECT1 </DSN

<SQL>

The <SQL> tag contains the definition of a query to be executed against the DSN. It is a string that can contain macros that at run time are substituted with the value of the specified property or attribute. For example, the following table (named PIPEDATA), contains data for two pipelines.

The <SQL> tag must be specified so as to create a query that can identify which row of the table

contains the data to be imported into the application. Typically this is done using the PIPELINE-REFERENCE property, as shown in the following example:

<SQL> SELECT * FROM PIPEDATA WHERE PIPELINE = „$P.PIPELINE-

REFERENCE$‟ </SQL>

In the previous example, PIPEDATA is the name of the table in the external database.

In a POD file, with the PIPELINE-REFERENCE attribute set to APL-BUG-1, the software

generates the following query and returns one row of data.

SELECT * FROM PIPEDATA WHERE PIPELINE = 'APL-BUG-1'

White space (tabs, carriage returns, spaces) are not important in the <SQL> tag.

In SmartPlant Spoolgen, pipeline properties are referred to by the PCF attribute name to which

they are exported.

<EXTERNAL-MAP>

There can be any number of these tags. Each one defines the SmartPlant Spoolgen pipeline attribute that is to receive data, and the name of the field (column) in the row returned by the

query that contains the data. The SmartPlant Spoolgen pipeline attribute can be referred to by either its ISOGEN attribute or Display Name as defined by the SmartPlant I-Configure in the project properties.

The following example uses SmartPlant Spoolgen pipeline attribute - Isogen attribute.

<EXTERNAL-MAP Name="PROJECT-IDENTIFIER" ExternalName="Project ID" />

<EXTERNAL-MAP Name="AREA" ExternalName="AREA" />

<EXTERNAL-MAP Name="ATTRIBUTE1" ExternalName="Client" />

<EXTERNAL-MAP Name="ATTRIBUTE2" ExternalName="Site" />

<EXTERNAL-MAP Name="ATTRIBUTE3" ExternalName="Designer" />

Techniques


The data in the previous example defines a mapping between the five SmartPlant Spoolgen attributes specified in the Isogen Attribute field and the column in the external data specified by the ExternalName field.

The next example uses SmartPlant Spoolgen pipeline attribute - DisplayName

<EXTERNAL-MAP DisplayName="ProjectIdentifier" ExternalName="Project

ID" />

<EXTERNAL-MAP DisplayName="Batch/Area" ExternalName="AREA" />

<EXTERNAL-MAP DisplayName="Client" ExternalName="Client" />

<EXTERNAL-MAP DisplayName="SiteRef" ExternalName="Site" />

<EXTERNAL-MAP DisplayName="Designer" ExternalName="Designer" />

The data in this example defines a mapping between the five SmartPlant Spoolgen attributes

specified in the DisplayName field and the column in the external data specified by the ExternalName field.

See also Component and Information Data (on page 569) Example XML Configuration File (on page 570) External Data (on page 565) External Data Source (on page 566) XML Configuration File (on page 567)

Component and Information Data

The structure of the <COMPONENT> and <INFORMATION> tags is the same and is largely identical to the pipeline data. However, in addition to the <SQL> tag there is a <FILTER> tag, which defines a supplementary filter to be applied at each component.

The query in the <SQL> tag is executed once, at the onset of the Get External Data command. It is used to specify a set of data relating to all the components in the pipeline and can return more than one row. Typically the PIPELINE-REFERENCE property is specified in a $P.PIPELINE-REFERENCE$ macro in this query.

<SQL>



SELECT * FROM COMPDATA WHERE PIPELINE = '$P.PIPELINE-REFERENCE$'

</SQL>

COMPDATA is the name of the table in the external database.

Techniques


The <FILTER> tag is built up from external field names and values that allow a single row in

the set of records defined by the <SQL> query to be identified. For example, the following table contains component data:

The following query, then, returns three records;

“SELECT * FROM COMPDATA WHERE PIPELINE=‟APL-BUG-1‟”

If you define the following filter expression, the software evaluates the expression at each component in the iso file. Any component with REPEAT-PART-NUMBER = „1‟ matches row 1

only.

<FILTER> PART-NO = '$C.REPEAT-PART-NUMBER‟ </FILTER>

You can use all Component, ComponentKeyPoint, ComponentLeg and Material properties and attributes in filter expressions. For example, the component ItemCode is a property of the material with which the component is associated. A filter of this form can be used to match a row in the external data with the specific component.

<FILTER> IC = '$M.ITEMCODE‟ </FILTER>

See also Example XML Configuration File (on page 570) External Data Source (on page 566)

Pipeline Data (on page 567) XML Configuration File (on page 567)

Example XML Configuration File

The following is a simple example of an XML configuration file.

<EXTERNAL-DATA Version="POD3">

<PIPELINE>

<DSN> PROJECT1 </DSN>

<SQL> SELECT * FROM PIPEDATA WHERE [LINE REF] = '$P.PIPELINE-

REFERENCE$' </SQL>

<EXTERNAL-MAP DisplayName="P+ID-From" ExternalName="P+IDFROM" />

<EXTERNAL-MAP DisplayName="P+ID-To" ExternalName="P+ID TO" />

</PIPELINE>

<COMPONENT>

<DSN> PROJECT1 </DSN>

<SQL> SELECT * FROM COMPDATA WHERE [LINE REF] = '$P.PIPELINE-

REFERENCE$' </SQL>

<FILTER> ITEMCODE = '$M.ItemCode$' </FILTER>

<EXTERNAL-MAP Name="COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1" ExternalName="DATA1" />

<EXTERNAL-MAP Name="COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2" ExternalName="DATA2" />

</COMPONENT>

</EXTERNAL-DATA>

Techniques


In the previous example, the external data source PROJECT1 has two tables, PIPEDATA

(pipeline data) and COMPDATA (component data). The attributes P+ID-From and P+ID-To have been added to the Project Defaults Pipeline attributes.

See also Component and Information Data (on page 569) External Data (on page 565) External Data Source (on page 566) Pipeline Data (on page 567) Project Defaults (on page 37)

XML Configuration File (on page 567)

Welding

Weld Lists

There are four types of plotted weld list:

1. Fixed original

2. Fixed operations box

3. Variable layout

4. User-defined

Setting the ActiveList property on the WeldList object controls this.

If this property is set to Fixed, then the ShowOperationsBox property on the FixedLayout

object below the Weldlist object is used to control whether it is an Original or Operations box weld list.

If the property is set to Variable, then the data for the VariableLayout object needs to be set.

If this property is set to User defined, then the data for the Userdefined object needs to be

set. Also, for the user-defined weld list there must be a backing sheet, which has the columns and headings required for the weld list.

The properties on the WeldList object need to be set for all types of weld lists, as these control the number of welds at special situations.

The VariableLayout object's HeaderLines property sets up the text header line for the variable layout, and the contents (MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns) define to ISOGEN the data, start column, and justification on the horizontal line.

The UserDefined object's properties and contents (XYColumns collection) define to ISOGEN how the data is positioned on the isometric, such that it lines up with the columns on the backing sheet. The properties define the start position, layout, and font for the data, and the XYColumns collection stores each data item to be output.

Printed Weld List

The properties of the SummaryFile object below the WeldList object control the format, titles and headers, and so on, for the printed weld list. The XYColumns collection below the

Techniques


SummaryFile object stores each data item to be output, and their position along the line in the file.

See also ActiveList (on page 413) MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection (on page 400) ShowOperationsBox (on page 416) SummaryFile Object (see "WeldList SummaryFile Object" on page 428) Userdefined Object (see "WeldList UserDefined Object" on page 421) VariableLayout Object (see "WeldList VariableLayout Object" on page 417)


Weld Logic

Logic used to control welds.

Four properties control ISOGEN behavior regarding welds and weld numbers:

ShowWelds (on page 303)

ShowWeldNumbers (on page 303)

WeldTypes (on page 327)

WeldNumberSize (on page 326)

If ShowWelds is FALSE:

All weld numbering options are suppressed.

That is, ShowWeldNumbers, WeldTypes and WeldNumberSize are ignored.

OS 53.1 = 0 (all weld numbers are suppressed)

OS 54 = 1 (all welds are suppressed)

else (ShowWelds is TRUE)

If ShowWeldNumbers is TRUE

WeldTypes and WeldNumberSize are used to control setting of OS 53.1, OS 53.4 and OS 54 as shown in the following table:

Weld Types WeldNumberSize OS53

Pos 1

OS53

Pos 4

OS5

4

All Small 1 0 0

Medium 2 0 0

Large 3 0 0

Fabrication Only Small 4 2 3

Medium 5 2 3

Large 6 2 3

Techniques


Weld Types WeldNumberSize OS53

Pos 1

OS53

Pos 4

OS5

4

Erection Only Small 7 2 2

Medium 8 2 2

Large 9 2 2

OffShore Only Small 1 1 2

Medium 2 1 2

Large 3 1 2

All - Implied Erect

as Fabrication

Small 1 0 4

Medium 2 0 4

Large 3 0 4

else (ShowWeldNumbers = FALSE)

WeldTypes and WeldNumberSize properties are ignored

OS 53.1 = 0 (Weld numbers are suppressed)

OS 53.4 = 2 (Offshore weld numbers are suppressed)

Techniques


Weld Constructions

Below are details for all the weld construction types used in ISOGEN.

Bores are indicated so that in those cases where there are two or more, it is clear what the size is

for a given weld on the weld list summary on the isometric, and in printed output summary file.

The AText numbers listed in the panels are used to change the weld type characters from the

defaults shown to the users' own definitions, if required.

90° Set On Branch

90° Reinforced Set On Branch

At reinforced set on branches like this, ISOGEN can be set to generate either three weld

numbers as shown in the previous illustration, or just two weld numbers. When the setting is for only two weld numbers, number three is omitted.

Techniques


Angled Set-On Branch

Reinforced Angled Set-On Branch

At reinforced set on branches like this, ISOGEN can be set to generate either three weld numbers as shown in the previous illustration, or just two weld numbers. When the setting is for only two weld numbers, number three is omitted.

Techniques


Olet

Half Coupling

Tee Bend

Tee Elbow

Trunnion Support - Dummy Tee Bend

Trunnion Support - Un Reinforced

Techniques


Angled Trunnion Support - Un Reinforced

Trunnion Support - Reinforced

At reinforced set on branches like this, ISOGEN can be set to generate either three weld numbers as shown above, or just two weld numbers. When the setting is for only two weld numbers, number three is omitted.

Techniques


Angled Trunnion Support - Reinforced

At reinforced set on branches like this, ISOGEN can be set to generate either three weld numbers as shown above, or just two weld numbers. When the setting is for only two weld numbers, number three is omitted.

See also ExtraRPadWelds (on page 413)

Cut Lists

The cut list can be either plotted on the isometric or printed to file, each being controlled

separately.

Plotted Cut List - There are three types of plotted cut lists: (1). Fixed Standard; (2). Fixed

Extended; and (3). User Defined. Setting the ActiveList property on the CutList object controls this.

If this property is set to Fixed, then the Content property on the FixedLayout object below the CutList object is used to control whether it is a Standard or Extended Fixed cut list.

If this property is set to Userdefined, then the data for the Userdefined object needs to be set.

The properties on the CutList object need to be set for all types of material list

If the user-defined material list is being defined, then there must be a backing sheet, which has the columns and headings required for the Cut list.

The UserDefined object's properties and contents (XYColumns Collection) define for ISOGEN how the data is positioned on the isometric, such that it lines up with the columns on the backing sheet. The properties define the start position, layout, and font for the data, and the XYColumns collection stores each data item to be output.

Printed Cut list - There are two types of printed cut list: (1). Standard and (2). User-defined. This is controlled by the UserDefined property on the SummaryFile object. If set

to False then the old standard cut list is printed. If set to True, then the-user defined cut list specified by the properties and contents of the SummaryFile object is printed.

The Path, Append, and Enable properties are used for both types of printed list.

Techniques


For the user-defined printed cut list the properties of the SummaryFile object setup the headings, and titles for the cut list. The TextColumns collection stores each data item to be output.

See also CutList Object (on page 435) CutList FixedLayout Object (on page 440) CutList SummaryFile Object (on page 450) CutList UserDefined Object (on page 442)

Detail Sketch and Information Notes

The settings for detail sketches and Information notes are stored in the properties of the

Supplementary DetailSketches Object (on page 495).

Controlling Properties

The following properties control the size and plotted position of the detail sketch or information note.

FileFormat

Path (on page 496)

















The following properties control the size and plotted position of the detail sketch or information

note.

FileFormat

Path (on page 496)

Techniques


















AText

The following AText are associated with the detail sketches and information notes.

-456

Used for Detail sketches.

Default = SEE DETAIL ?

This text is plotted at the pipeline sketch location as shown below, the question mark being

replaced by the Cross reference label controlled by the property LabelType (on page 496) .

-541

Specifies the Suffix used for General notes.

Default = _N

These notes apply to the whole of the pipeline and are output on all the isometrics for a pipeline.

They only need to be probed in once per pipeline.

-542

Techniques


Specifies the Suffix used for Specific notes.

Default = _S

These notes may apply to either a specific component or Spool.

Although a Specific note may be probed in at more than one location on a pipeline - it will only

be produced once on the isometric.

-543

Specifies the text used for cross reference to specific note.

Default = Blank

The following AText are associated with the detail sketches and information notes.

-456

Used for Detail sketches.

Default = SEE DETAIL ?

This text is plotted at the pipeline sketch location as shown below, the question mark being

replaced by the Cross reference label controlled by the property LabelType (on page 496) .

-541

Specifies the Suffix used for General notes.

Default = _N

Techniques


These notes apply to the whole of the pipeline and are output on all the isometrics for a pipeline.

They only need to be probed in once per pipeline.

-542

Specifies the Suffix used for Specific notes.

Default = _S

These notes may apply to either a specific component or Spool.

Although a Specific note may be probed in at more than one location on a pipeline - it will only

be produced once on the isometric.

-543

Specifies the text used for cross reference to specific note.

Default = Blank

The format of the detail sketch, information note and drawing output must be consistent. If the output is DXF, then the FileFormat and NoteFormat properties must also be DXF.

DXF sketches and notes must be saved in AutoCAD Release 12 format (to 6 decimal places) and must not contain blocks.

See also FileFormat NoteFormat (on page 501)

Techniques


Dynamic File Naming

It is possible to pre-process the ISOGEN.fls files to substitute a macro for one of the PCF header attributes taken from the current file. The following PCF attributes are supported in macros:

PCF Attribute Description/Comment

$PIPELINE-REFERENCE$ Pipeline reference

$REVISION$ Revision

$PROJECT-IDENTIFIER$ Applies to the PROJECT-IDENTIFIER attribute in the

PCF/IDF, not the SmartPlant I-Configure project.

$PIPING-SPEC$ Piping specification

$INPUT-FILE$ Name of input file without the extension.

For example, in the Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles collection you can use the $PIPELINE-REFERENCE$ to set the FilePath as shown in the following illustration:

The following is written in the ISOGEN.fls file:

CENTRELINE/INSULATION-

LENGTH C:\IsoDir\Project\Final\$PIPELINE-

REFERENCE$-CL.TXT

WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-

APPEND

C:\IsoDir\Project\Final\Reports\$PIPELINE-

REFERENCE$-COG.TXT

If the required attribute is not present in the PCF/IDF, then the attribute NAME is substituted.

System environment variables such as TEMP, USERNAME or COMPUTERNAME can be

used in folder or file paths for report files.

See also FilePath (on page 535) Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 534)

Techniques


Flange Rotation

When flanges are connected it is normal practice to position the flange so the bolt holes are off center, as shown in the following illustration.

The flange rotation function is provided so that the isometric generates a message showing the angle the flange needs to be rotated when the flange is connected to a pipe that is not moving in a primary direction. You can control if ISOGEN generates a message when a flange rotation

angle is required, and the type of enclosure style (if any) to include for the message. This is done by setting the ShowFlangeRotation on the Drawing Content object and FlangeRotationStyle

properties on the Drawing Format object.

Flange rotations are caused by pipe directions moving in a skew direction instead of directly in a

principle plane. For example, if a pipe direction (as viewed on the face of the flange - see rules below) is Up, and at the elbow, then turns to move North + West at an angle of, say, 45 degrees, then the North + West section is said to be in a ‟skew‟.

Techniques


Flange Rotation Rules

Rules that are followed when determining the rotation angle.

1. Always look at the flange face.

2. Set the flange to the normal OFF CENTRES position with respect to the first change in direction that is found by moving along the spool away from the flange being positioned. This can be one of the following:

a. The next leg of the spool following a bend / elbow.

b. A branch connection.

c. A flange at the other end of the spool if it is a straight pipe.

d. A component direction or a branch direction that is specifically identified by SmartPlant Spoolgen, using one of the ATexts -487 to -491. These are for use on spools where the

only suitable reference plane is not covered by a), b), or c) previously discussed.

AText ID Number Default Text Purpose

-487 *** REFERENCE FLAT *** Used to identify which item

is to be used as a reference plane for any output flange rotation angle.

-488 *** REFERENCE SPINDLE ***

-489 *** REFERENCE SUPPORT ***

-490 *** REFERENCE BRANCH ***

-491 *** REFERENCE WINDOW ***

-492 FLAT DIRECTION Used to point to any 2D or

3D triangles on flat spool isometrics.

-493 SPINDLE DIRECTION

-494 SUPPORT DIRECTION

-495 BRANCH DIRECTION

-496 WINDOW DIRECTION

-497 FLANGE ROTATION ? (The calculated angle is output where the ? character is located).

Used to identify all flange rotation angles on the plotted part of a flat spool

drawing.

1. Having set the flange off center to the identified reference plane, rotate the flange in a clockwise direction by the angle indicated.

Techniques


All flange rotation angles are calculated (with all of the necessary compensations to accommodate the pipe movements) such that they are all in the clockwise direction.

Outputting a Table of Flange Rotations

It is possible to generate a table of flanges and the associated flange rotation. This is achieved by using the DFTableAttributes collection to set up a table to output the flange part number and

flange rotation angle.

The material list must be set to non-accumulation

See also Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes collection (on page 547) Drawing Content Object (on page 167) Drawing Format Object (on page 239) ShowFlangeRotation (on page 171) FlangeRotationStyle (on page 255)

Techniques


HeatTreatment-NDE

To output heat treatment - NDE attributes on the isometric, the following Supplementary

HeatTreatment object properties need to be set:

Enabled (on page 463) property set to True.

Path (on page 516) property set to the data file containing the heat treatment data.

Text (on page 516) property

Double-clicking in the Text property opens the following:

The data entered is the link between the IDF and the data in the Heat treatment / NDE file.

The format of the HeatTreatment/NDE file is specified in the function definition file (FDF).


ELEMENT1 'PIPING-SPEC' 1

N.S.-CHECK-WELD 2 3

N.S.-CHECK 4 5

.

See the Supplementary HeatTreatment object Text property for all the possible data settings

The section heading HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILEUSE- DEFINITION is required in the data definition file before this data can be output.

A function definition file containing the Heat treatment attributes definition must be defined in the Supplementary DataFiles ISOGENFiles collection

Techniques





-950 2 ! PWHT N.S. RANGE

-951 3 ! PWHT TEMPERATURE

-952 4 ! PREHEAT N.S RANGE

-953 5 ! PREHEAT TEMPERATURE

-954 6 ! % RT

-955 7 ! % MT

-956 8 ! % PT

-957 9 ! % BHN

The attributes to be output need to be added to the DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttribute collection or the Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttribute collection.

If using this mechanism, the attributes should not be defined in the Project defaults (on page 37).

See also DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttribute Collection (see "DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection" on page 339) Function Definition File (see "FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE" on page 473) Supplementary DataFiles ISOGENFiles Collection (see "Supplementary DataFiles Object" on

page 468) Supplementary HeatTreatment Object (on page 514) Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttribute Collection (see "Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection" on page 547)

Location Points

Location points are used to output a coordinate offset to the nearest main steelwork column or floor. The location point is positioned in the design system, and the steelwork grid and floor levels are defined in the Supplementary AdditionalData object

The plotted symbol used for the location point is user-definable. The default is shown in the following illustration.

The number is only output if more than one location point is used on the drawing. The associated

text is controlled by AText - 471, the default being LOCATION POINT? where the ? character is the cross-reference number when more than one location point is used.

Techniques


The output of the location point reference position, or floor level information on the drawing frame, is achieved by using the text positioning facilities:

E3200 N1448 OF C5

EL2286 ABOVE 2nd.FL

Location point information will only be output on the following types of isometrics.

1. Combined isometric

2. Erection isometric

3. System isometric

Location point records found in the pipeline data file when generating any other type of isometric are ignored.

Text Positioning

There are two types of location point output in the text positioning facility:

LOCATION-POINT-ELEVATION

Used for offset above nearest floor level.

The format of the output generated by the program is:

One space (blank) is automatically inserted between each element.

The following are typical examples:

EL2286 ABOVE 2nd.FL (Single Location Point - Metric Units)

EL7'-6" ABOVE 2nd.FL (Single Location Point - Imperial Units)

No.1 EL2286 ABOVE 2nd.FL (Multiple Location Points on single drawing)

No.2 EL610 ABOVE 4th.FL

LOCATION-POINT-TO-STEEL

Used for offset to nearest steelwork stanchion.

Techniques


The format of the output generated by the program is:

One space (blank) will be automatically inserted between each element.

The following are typical examples::

E3200 N1448 OF C5 (Single Location Point - Metric Units)

E10'-6" N4'-9" OF C5 (Single Location Point - Imperial Units)

No.1 E3200 N1448 OF C5 (Multiple Location Points on single drawing)

No.2 E1875 N2950 OF E3

AText

The following AText are used.

-472 No.? (Generated Cross Reference Number output in ? position).

-473 OF

-474 ABOVE

Drawing Definition File

The section header is STEELWORK-LOCATION, which is followed by four sub-headings each

having their own data entries.

1. ROWS

Sub-heading (mandatory). Data entries are:

Row identifier - Unique identifier for a row in the steelwork grid, One line entry for

each row.

Coordinate position - Position of row in Site N, S, E or W positions can be used, such

as N12000.

2. COLUMNS

Sub heading (mandatory).

Data entries are:

Column identifier - Unique identifier for a column in the steelwork grid, one line entry for each

column.

Co-ordinate position - Position of column in site N, S, E or W positions can be used. e.g.

E18500.

Techniques


1. FLOOR-LEVELS

Sub heading (optional). Data entries are:

Floor identifier - Unique identifier for a floor in the steelwork structure, one line entry

for each floor.

Floor elevation - Elevation of floor in structure elevations to be positive by default, e.g. EL8500. Negative elevations if floor is below zero, such as - EL-500.

2. EXCLUDED-STEELWORK

Sub heading (optional). Data entries are:

Steelwork identifier - List of stanchions that are not required as part of the structure

steelwork identifier is a combination of row/column identifiers that uniquely identify a particular stanchions .

Floor identifier - Only required if floor levels are being used.

Input identifiers

1. Single entry

2. Multiple entries

3. ALL

Each entry to be separated by at least one Blank character, as shown in the following example:

STEELWORK-LOCATIONS

ROWS

A N2000

B N9000

C N16000

D N23000

E N30000

F N37000

COLUMNS

1 E5000

2 E12000

3 E19000

4 E26000

5 E33000

6 E40000

7 E47000

FLOOR-LEVELS

G.L. EL500

1st.FL EL8500

2nd.FL EL16500

3rd.FL EL24500

4th.FL EL32500

EXCLUDED-STEELWORK

A6 3rd.FL

B6 3rd.FL

C6 3rd.FL

D6 3rd.FL

E6 3rd.FL

F6 3rd.FL

A7 3rd.FL

Techniques


B7 3rd.FL

C7 3rd.FL

D7 3rd.FL

E7 3rd.FL

F7 3rd.FL

The previous example shows the use of metric location coordinates. Imperial locations

would be of the following form:

A E1000-0

1 N200-6.1/2

1st.FL EL25-3

See also Supplementary AdditionalData object (on page 458)

Supplementary ReferencePlanes Object (on page 525) REFERENCE-PLANE-DEFINITION (on page 476)

Techniques


Site Assemblies

Use the following guidelines to create a site assembly report and show the site assembly number on the isometric.

Site Assembly Numbers

To show site assembly numbers set the following properties on the Drawing Format object:

SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure

SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize

SiteAssemblyIDs

SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing

Also, AText -478 (default J) controls the characters printed before the assembly number.

Site Assembly Report

Add a site assembly attribute to the bolt attributes on the Project Defaults dialog box.

Techniques


1. Click New to add a new attribute:

2. In the Isogen attribute list, select the Assembly Attribute, type the display name required

and then click OK.

The attribute is added to the list of bolt attributes.

3. Add an entry into the Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles collection.

Techniques


There is also a SITE-ASSEMBLY-FILE-APPEND file type, if required.

4. Set up a Function Definition File in the Supplementary Datafiles ISOGENFiles collection, if

one does not already exist.

5. Add the data for specifying the report, as described in SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT (on page 486).

See also Drawing Format Object (on page 239) Project Defaults (on page 37) SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure (on page 270) SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize (on page 272) SiteAssemblyIDs (on page 273) SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing (on page 274) Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles Collection (on page 534)

Traceability and Unique Numbers

Traceability and unique part numbers have the following three types of output:

1. Unique part numbers shown at each component on the drawing.

2. A table of unique part number on the drawing.

3. An output file with unique part numbers with spool IDs and, optionally, a pipeline reference.

The control of which facility is being used is as follows:

The UniquePartNumber property on the Traceability object controls the generation of the

unique part number. If this is set to OFF then no unique part numbers are generated and all facilities are disabled.

If set to either Numeric or Alpha, then the unique part number is shown at each component with either a numeric or alpha suffix, such as 3.1 or 3.a.

To output a table of unique part numbers, the PlotUniquePtNoTable property on the

Traceability object must be set to True, and the following properties controlling the position and size of table must be set. The frame of the table must be part of the backing sheet.

ContinuousDown (on page 554)








Techniques


To output a file, the Path property on the Traceability object must be set to the path name for the file, and the Enabled property set to True.

See also PlotUniquePtNoTable (on page 554) Traceability object (see "Supplementary Traceability Object" on page 552) UniquePartNumber (on page 554)

Work Measurement

There are three optional work measurement calculations.

1. Spool Weld Diameter

Summation of weld diameter (inches/mm) multiplied by quantity for each spool and/or each drawing.

Regardless of the number of welds in a pipeline and their size, spool weld diameter values are output on this basis:

On spool isometrics--one value.

On all other isometrics--one value per DRG, one value for each spool on the DRG, or both of these.

In the spool information file--one value for each spool.

Output the Spool Weld Diameter on the Isometric

1. Add a data entry to the DFAttributes collection (see "DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes

Collection" on page 339) or the DFTableAttributes collection (see "Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection" on page 547).

2. Then on that data entry, use the AttributeName (on page 341) list to select SPOOL-

WELD-DIA.

3. Set the other attributes as required to set the size and position of the text to be output.

Output the Drawing Weld Diameter on the Isometric

1. Add a data entry to the DFAttributes collection (see "DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes

Collection" on page 339) or the DFTableAttributes collection (see "Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection" on page 547) .

2. Then on that data entry, use the AttributeName (on page 341) list to select DRG-WELD-

DIA.


Output an Entry into the Spool Information File (see "Supplementary SpoolInformation Object" on page 542)

1. Add a data entry into the TextColumns collection (see "MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns Collection" on page 400) on the SpoolInformation object (see "Supplementary SpoolInformation Object" on page 542) .

Techniques


2. Then on that data entry, use the AttributeName (on page 341) list to select either SPOOL-

WELD- DIA/INCH or SPOOL-WELD-DIA/MM.

SPOOL-WELD-DIA/MM - used for Mixed or Imperial units.

SPOOL-WELD-DIA/INCH - Used for Metric units.


The calculated value output is the summation of the nominal size of all the welds on each spool or drawing. For example, if a spool contains welds as shown in the following example:

1" - 4 off

2" - 1 off

6" - 3 off

The spool weld diameter is

1" X 4 = 4

2" X 1 = 2

6" X 3 = 18

24

The calculation is the summation of the N.S. of the following types of welds on each spool.

Weld Type Identifier AText Number N.S. to be counted

Butt Weld BW -417 Pipe / Component

Socket Weld SW -418 Component size

Mitre Weld MW -419 Pipe size

Slip-on Flange SOF -421 Flange size (1 or 2 welds dependant upon setting of

property SlipOnFlangeWelds (on page 413)

Set-on-Branch SOB -422 Branch size

?? -522 Branch size

?? -523 Branch size

?? -524 Branch size

?? -528 Branch size

Olet Let -423 Component size

?? -525 Component size

Techniques


Weld Type Identifier AText Number N.S. to be counted

Reinforcement Pads RPD -507 3 x Branch size

LF -508 2 x Branch size

?? -526 2 x Branch size

L4 -509 Branch size

?? -527 Branch size

Trunnions TRN -516 Trunnion Weld size

?? -529 Trunnion Weld size




1. Spool Centerline Length

This value is calculated and output

On each spool iso.

In the spool Information file.

Output the Spool Centerline Length on the Isometric

1. Add a data entry to the DFAttributes collection (see "DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection" on page 339) or the DFTableAttributes collection (see "Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection" on page 547) .

2. Then on that data entry, use the AttributeName (on page 341) list select SPOOL-CL-

LENGTH.


Output an Entry into the Spool Information File (see "Supplementary SpoolInformation

Object" on page 542)

1. Add a data entry into the TextColumns Collection (see "MaterialList VariableLayout

TextColumns Collection" on page 400) on the SpoolInformation object (see "Supplementary SpoolInformation Object" on page 542) .

2. Then on that data entry, use the AttributeName (on page 341) list to select SPOOL-CL-

LENGTH.


The spool centerline length value is the true length of the spool (including any branches). The

calculated length includes all flanges, fittings and pipe, including the true length around bends. Output values are given to the nearest 1/10th foot or meter.

1. Spool and Drawing Erection Factors

Techniques


Output the Drawing Erection Factor on the Isometric:

1. Add a data entry to the DFAttributes collection (see "DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection" on page 339) or the DFTableAttributes collection (see "Supplementary

TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection" on page 547) .

2. Then on that data entry, use the AttributeName (on page 341) list to select DRG-

ERECTION-FACTOR.


Output the Spool Erection Factor on the Isometric

1. Add a data entry to the DFAttributes collection (see "DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection" on page 339) or the DFTableAttributes collection (see "Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection" on page 547) .

2. Then on that data entry, use the AttributeName (on page 341) list to select SPOOL-

ERECTION- FACTOR.


Output an Entry into the Spool Information File (see "Supplementary SpoolInformation

Object" on page 542)

1. Add a data entry into the TextColumns collection (see "MaterialList VariableLayout

TextColumns Collection" on page 400) on the SpoolInformation object (see "Supplementary SpoolInformation Object" on page 542) .

2. Then on that data entry, use the AttributeName (on page 341) list to select either SPOOL-

FACTOR- DIA/MT or SPOOL-FACTOR-DIA/FT.

SPOOL-FACTOR-DIA/MT - used for Mixed or Metric units.

SPOOL-FACTOR-DIA/FT - used for Imperial units.


Techniques


The calculated factor value is the summation of the N.S. x Length for each size appearing on either a spool or full isometric. The length used to calculate the individual spool and full pipeline erection factors includes all flanges, fittings, pipe and branches, and using the true length around

bends. Output values are given to the nearest 1/10th foot or meter.

Calculated values are output to isometrics using either the DFAttributes collection or the DFTableAttributes collection and optionally, to the spool Information file .

See also DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection (on page 339) Supplementary TableAttributes DFTableAttributes Collection (on page 547) Supplementary SpoolInformation Object (on page 542)


2 -201 • 133

-202 • 133 -203 • 133 -204 • 133 -205 • 133 -206 • 133 -207 • 133 -208 • 133

-209 • 133 -210 • 133 -211 • 133 -212 • 133 -213 • 133 -214 • 133 -215 • 133 -216 • 133

-217 • 133 -218 • 133 -219 • 133 -220 • 133 -221 • 133 -222 • 133 -223 • 133

-224 • 133 -225 • 133 -226 • 133 -227 • 133 -228 • 133 -229 • 133 -230 • 133

-231 • 133 -232 • 133 -233 • 133 -236 • 133 -237 • 133 -238 • 133 -239 • 133 -240 • 133

-241 • 133 -242 • 133 -243 • 133 -244 • 133

-245 • 133 -246 • 133

-247 • 133 -248 • 133 -249 • 133 -250 • 151 -251 • 151 -252 • 151 -253 • 151 -254 • 151

-255 • 151 -256 • 151 -257 • 151 -258 • 151 -259 • 151 -260 • 151 -261 • 151

-262 • 151 -263 • 151 -264 • 151 -265 • 151 -266 • 151 -267 • 151 -268 • 151

-269 • 151 -270 • 151 -271 • 151 -272 • 151 -274 • 143 -275 • 133 -276 • 133 -277 • 133

-278 • 133 -279 • 133 -280 • 133 -281 • 133 -282 • 133 -283 • 133 -284 • 133

-285 • 133 -286 • 133 -287 • 133 -288 • 133 -289 • 150 -290 • 150

Index

Index


-291 • 150 -292 • 150 -293 • 150

-294 • 150 -295 • 150 -296 • 150 -297 • 150 -298 • 133 -299 • 157

3

-300 • 143 -301 • 143 -302 • 143 -303 • 143 -304 • 143 -305 • 143 -306 • 143 -307 • 143

-308 • 143 -309 • 143 -310 • 143 -311 • 143 -312 • 143 -313 • 143 -314 • 143

-315 • 143 -316 • 143 -317 • 153 -318 • 153 -319 • 143 -320 • 143 -321 • 143

-322 • 143 -323 • 143 -324 • 143 -325 • 143 -326 • 143 -327 • 143 -328 • 143 -329 • 143

-330 • 143 -331 • 143 -332 • 154 -333 • 154 -334 • 143 -335 • 143 -336 • 154

-337 • 133 -338 • 133 -339 • 143

-340 • 143 -341 • 143 -342 • 143 -343 • 143 -344 • 143 -345 • 143 -346 • 133 -347 • 143

-348 • 143 -349 • 133 -350 • 133 -351 • 143 -352 • 143 -353 • 143 -354 • 143

-355 • 143 -356 • 133, 143 -357 • 133, 143 -358 • 133, 143 -359 • 143 -360 • 153 -361 • 153

-362 • 133, 143 -363 • 143 -364 • 143 -365 • 143 -366 • 143 -367 • 143 -368 • 143 -369 • 143

-370 • 143 -371 • 143 -372 • 143 -373 • 143 -374 • 143 -375 • 143 -376 • 143

-377 • 143 -378 • 143 -379 • 143 -380 • 143 -381 • 143 -382 • 143 -383 • 143

-384 • 133, 143

Index


4 -400 • 153 -401 • 153 -402 • 153 -403 • 153

-404 • 153 -405 • 153 -406 • 153 -407 • 153 -408 • 153 -409 • 153 -410 • 153 -411 • 153

-423 • 133, 143 -450 • 133 -451 • 133 -452 • 133 -453 • 157 -454 • 133 -455 • 133

-456 • 133 -457 • 133 -460 • 133 -461 • 133 -462 • 133 -463 • 133 -464 • 133

-465 • 133 -466 • 133 -467 • 133 -468 • 133 -471 • 133 -472 • 143 -473 • 143 -474 • 143

-475 • 133 -476 • 133 -481 • 156 -482 • 156 -483 • 156 -484 • 156 -485 • 156

-486 • 156 -487 • 156 -488 • 156 -489 • 156 -490 • 156 -491 • 156

-492 • 156 -493 • 156 -494 • 156

-495 • 156 -496 • 156 -497 • 156 -498 • 133 -499 • 133

5 -500 • 143

-501 • 133 -502 • 133 -503 • 143 -509 • 158 -512 • 133 -514 • 143 -515 • 143 -533 • 133

-534 • 133 -535 • 133 -536 • 133 -537 • 143 -538 • 143 -539 • 133 -540 • 143

-541 • 133 -542 • 133 -543 • 133 -544 • 133 -545 • 133

A About SmartPlant I-Configure • 78

AccessRights • 96 AccumulatedPipeDesc • 377 AccumulatedPipePosition • 377 AccumulatedPipeQuantity • 377 ActiveList • 356, 413, 436 ActiveSection • 374 Add a New Attribute • 48, 112

Add a Row • 27 Add to Collection • 23 AdditionalAllowanceFormat • 202 AdditionalEnclosureStyle • 246 AdditionalWeldEnclosure • 248 AdditionalWeldEnclSpaces • 249 AddRoundOff • 202

Index


All Weld Types • 54 AllowOverflowDrawings • 445 AlternateText • 165

Alternative Texts ATexts Collection • 164 AlternativeTexts • 130 AlternativeTexts Object • 163 AngleAccuracy • 243 AngleStyle • 243 AngleType • 244 AppCount • 93 Append • 404, 431, 453, 464

AppendStandardExts • 180 Application • 97 AppliesTo • 198 AppList • 93 ASCII-SYMBOLS • 471 Attribute Expressions • 115 AttributeName • 331, 341, 346, 380, 401,

407, 420, 428, 434, 450, 456, 509, 539, 542, 546, 548, 558

Attributes • 106 Attributes Page (Drawing Setup Wizard) • 47 AutoCAD Barcode • 564 AutoDrawingSplit • 181

B

Backing Sheets • 12 Bar Codes • 563 BarCode • 342, 347, 549 BendRadius • 249 BendRepresentation • 250 Bends • 565 Bends and Elbows • 565

BINARY-SYMBOLS • 471 Bolt Attributes • 111 BoltAccumulation • 357 BoltDiameterUnits • 358 BOLT-INFORMATION-FILE • 471 BOLTING-INFO-OUTPUT • 478 BoltLengthUnits • 359 BottomMargin • 335

BranchBoreLimit • 203 BranchCptLimit • 204 ByPass • 530

C CanExport • 127 CanWrite • 127

Category • 199, 331 CategoryHeadingX • 376 CategoryUnderline • 376

Change Column Widths in the Attribute Grid • 49

Change Settings for a Single Weld Type • 53 Change Settings for All Weld Types • 53 ChangeStyleList • 95 CharHeight • 341, 347, 548 CharWidth • 342, 347, 549 ClampWelds • 415

Clear • 26 Collections • 22 Color • 199, 347, 496 Colour • 342, 496, 549 ColumnOffset • 393 ColumnsNumber • 342, 348, 549 Comment • 20

Component and Information Data • 569 Component Attributes • 110 ComponentInfo • 530 COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE •

472 COMPONENT-INFORMATION-FILE

Section • 481

COMPONENT-INFORMATION-

SELECTION Section • 484 ComponentLegLength • 250 ComputeNozzleAxis • 251 Configuration Files • 12 Connect to a Network Project • 18 Connect to Isometric Directory • 33 Content • 382, 442, 531

Context Sensitive Help • 28 ContinuationGraphicsOnSpoolIsos • 194 ContinuousDown • 555 Controls • 23 Coordinates Page (Dimensioning Wizard) •

61 CoordOutputBends • 205

CoordOutputBranches • 205 CoordOutputHTCpts • 205 CoordStyle • 528 CoordStyleAtLocationPts • 527 CoordSupports • 205 CoordType • 206 Copy • 25, 36

Copy a Row • 27

Index


Copy and Paste a Project • 121 Copy and Paste a Style • 558 Copy and Paste an Isometric Directory • 90

Copy and Paste Attributes • 50 Count • 164, 196, 299, 329, 339, 344, 378,

400, 406, 409, 419, 426, 432, 448, 454, 469, 504, 508, 519, 533, 538, 541, 544, 547, 551, 556

CptAttributesEnclStyle • 245 CptTagEnclStyle • 251 CptTagsStyle • 252

Create a Project • 121 Create a Style • 559 Create an Isometric Directory • 88 Create User Templates • 18 CreateTutorial_<application name>.xml • 13 CurvedPipeAngleStyle • 298 CurvedPipeDimensioning • 239

CurvedPipeRadiusStyle • 298 CustomHeight • 336 CustomWidth • 336 Cut Lists • 578 CutList • 435 CutList FixedLayout Object • 441 CutList Object • 435

CutList SummaryFile Object • 451 CutList SummaryFile TextColumns

Collection • 455 CutList UserDefined Object • 443 CutList UserDefined XYColumns Collection

• 449 CutPieceEnclosureStyle • 253 CutPieceID • 436

CutPieceNoLength • 252 CutPieceSequence • 437

D DataFile • 512 DataOffsetX • 394 DataOffsetY • 394 DateFormat • 181

DateSource • 182 DDFLines • 460 DecimalInchOutput • 437 Default Support Category • 105 DefaultColour • 299 DefaultDescriptionWidth • 375, 397 DefaultText • 165

Delete • 37 Delete a Project • 122 Delete a Row • 27

Delete a Style • 560 Delete an Attribute • 114 Delete an Isometric Directory • 89 Delimiter • 405, 431, 453, 537, 544 Detail Panel • 82, 127 Detail Sketch and Information Notes • 579 DiagnosticLevel • 182 Dimension Format Page (Dimensioning

Wizard) • 56 Dimensioning Style Page (Dimensioning

Wizard) • 57 Dimensioning Wizard • 55 Direction • 343, 348, 549 Disconnect Isometric Directory • 34 DisconnectionMessage • 182

DoubleUnits • 206 Drawing • 166 Drawing Area Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)

• 42 Drawing Content Object • 168 Drawing Controls Object • 179 Drawing Definitions Definitions Collection •

197 Drawing Definitions Object • 195 Drawing Dimensions Object • 200 Drawing Format Object • 240 Drawing Layers Layers Collection • 300 Drawing Layers Object • 299 Drawing Object • 166 Drawing Setup Wizard • 39

Drawing Welds Object • 301 Drawing Welds WeldEnclosures Collection •

330 Drawing Welds WeldEnclosures Object •

329 DrawingColour • 375, 423 DrawingFrame • 334

DrawingFrame Attributes DFAttributes Collection • 340

DrawingFrame Attributes Object • 339 DrawingFrame Object • 334 DrawingFrame SymbolTable Object • 349 DrawingFrame TableAttributes

DFTableAttributes Collection • 345

DrawingFrame TableAttributes Object • 344

Index


DrawingLayer • 351, 375, 390, 393, 423, 445, 556

DrawingSize • 183

DrawingsPerFile • 186 Drg1of1OnSingleIsos • 359 DScale • 199 DXFUnits • 337 Dynamic File Naming • 583

E Edit an Attribute • 113

Edit Menu • 36 ElbowConversion • 94 ElbowRadius • 253 ElbowRepresentation • 254 Elbows • 565 Elevations/Vertical Dimensions Page

(Dimensioning Wizard) • 60 Enable Project • 34

Enabled • 392, 404, 430, 452, 460, 464, 466, 507, 514, 515, 523, 526, 530, 537, 541, 544, 554

EnclosureType • 331, 542 EndProgram • 462 ErecSuppWeldEnclSize • 321 ErectAccumulation • 357

ErectPrefix • 309 ErectSupportPrefix • 318 ErectSupportWeldEnclosure • 318 ErectSupportWeldStartNo • 318 ErectWeldEnclosure • 309 ErectWeldStartNo • 309 ErecWeldEnclSize • 311

Example XML Configuration File • 570 Examples • 132 Exit • 35 Exploring the SmartPlant I-Configure

Interface • 29 Export • 35 Export a Style • 561 Export Style Fragment • 76

ExportBehavior • 126 External Data • 566 External Data Source • 566 ExtraRPadWelds • 413

F FabAccumulation • 357

FabPrefix • 305 FabSupportPrefix • 315 FabSupportWeldEnclosure • 315

FabSupportWeldStartNo • 315 FabSuppWeldEnclSize • 317 FabWeldEnclosure • 306 FabWeldEnclSize • 308 FabWeldsInPipe • 207 FabWeldStartNo • 305 FallCutOff • 254 FallRepresentation • 255

FDF Sections • 478 File Menu • 31 File Types • 471 FileFormat • 404, 431, 453, 537, 544 FilePath • 471, 535 FileText • 471, 536

FileType • 470, 535 Find • 67 Flange Rotation • 584 FlangeRotationStyle • 255 Flat Spools and Flange Rotation • 156 FlowArrowScale • 256 Font • 342, 347, 548 ForceAllWeldsAsSpecial • 332

ForDryPipe • 466 Format • 208 ForWetPipe • 466 FourDigitYear • 183 FtInTolerance • 209 FUNCTION-DEFINITION-FILE • 473

G

Gasket Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard) • 59

GasketAccumulation • 357 GasketDimPrecision • 211 Gaskets • 210 GED Configuration • 102 GeneralPrefix • 303

GeneralWeldStartNo • 303 Getting Started • 11 GhostGapDimension • 256 Graphically Move an Attribute • 49 GroupHeadingX • 376 Grouping of AText Listings • 133 GroupUnderline • 376

Index


H HeaderLines • 397, 405, 419, 432, 454, 508,

537, 544 HeaderOffsetX • 392 HeaderOffsetY • 392

HeatTracingOptions • 183 HEATTREATMENT/NDE-FILE • 474 HeatTreatment-NDE • 587 Height • 506 Help Menu • 77 HorizontalDirection • 445 HorizontalSpacing • 351, 425, 445

I

ID • 506 IdentifierSuffix • 554 IdfgenConnectionTolerance • 238 IDF-REVISIONS Section • 485 IgnoreUserSplitPoints • 184 ImperialFormat • 212 ImpliedWelds • 303

Import a PipMan Project • 70 Import a Spoolgen 4 Project • 71 Import an I-Configure Project • 72 Import Directory • 101 Import PipeHeader Attributes • 115 Import Project • 69 Import Style Fragment • 75

Import Style Settings • 74 Imported Part Numbers • 99 Imported Split Points • 100 Imported Spool IDs • 101 Imported Weld Numbers • 98 Inches • 212 Include a Report File • 64

IncludeAdditionalMaterial • 436 IncludeBolts • 405 IndividualEntries • 406 InsertBlankLines • 369, 397 InstIDEnclosureSize • 256 InstIDEnclosureStyle • 258 InstIdentification • 260 InsulationStyle • 260

INSULATION-WEIGHT-FILE • 475 INSULTATION-WEIGHT-FILE Section •

485 ISKEYText • 520 IsoDirList.xml • 13

ISOGENTextID • 165 Isometric Directories • 87 Isometric Directory • 32

Isometric Directory Object Properties • 87 IsometricText • 213 IsometricType • 184 IsoScale • 184 ItemCodeLength • 359

J JacketDimensioning • 212

Justification • 342, 347, 402, 408, 421, 434, 456, 510, 540, 546, 549, 558

K Keyboard • 24

L LabelLayer • 496 LabelType • 496

LabelX • 497, 506 LabelY • 497, 506 Layer • 199, 342, 347, 549 LayerColour • 300 LayerNumber • 300 Layout • 351, 369, 398, 445 LeftMargin • 335

Legacy System Support • 10 LengthToBranchPoint • 438 LengthToCL • 437 LinearQuantityStyle • 360 LinearWeightDenominator • 194 LinesNumber • 343, 348, 550 LineSpacing • 369, 398

LineStyle • 199 LineStyleTable • 196 ListDown • 382, 387, 424 Location Points • 588 LocationPtStyle • 526 LockedBy • 96 LowerBore • 198

M

Material Attributes • 112 Material Database • 97 Material List Object • 355

Index


Material List Page (Drawing Setup Wizard) • 46

MaterialFile • 512

MaterialHeadings • 405 MaterialList • 355 MaterialList FixedLayout Object • 368 MaterialList SummaryFile Object • 403 MaterialList SummaryFile TextColumns

Collection • 407 MaterialList Transfers MLTransfers

Collection • 410

MaterialList Transfers Object • 409 MaterialList UserDefined Object • 373 MaterialList UserDefined OneSection Object

• 381 MaterialList UserDefined RemarksBox

Object • 389 MaterialList UserDefined SpoolTable Object

• 391 MaterialList UserDefined ThreeSection

Object • 386 MaterialList UserDefined TwoSection

Object • 383 MaterialList UserDefined XYColumns

Collection • 379

MaterialList Variable Layout Object • 396 MaterialList VariableLayout TextColumns

Collection • 401 MaterialListOverflow • 360 MaterialListSplitting • 360 MaterialsBySpool • 367 MatList • 531 MaxCharacters • 390

MaxChars • 380, 402, 408, 421, 428, 434, 450, 456, 510, 540, 546, 558

MaxCols • 424 MaxColumns • 351, 447 MaxEntries • 382, 390, 424, 556 MaxRows • 351, 424, 447 Menus • 31

MessageArrowHeads • 305 MessageCircleEnclosure • 260 MessageDiamondEnclosure • 261 MessagePointedEnclosure • 262 MessageRoundEnclosure • 263 MessageSquareEnclosure • 263 MessageTriangleEnclosure • 264

MetresCoordinates • 213

MetresDimensions • 213 MinAngleOffset • 185 MinOffset • 214

MISC-DEFINITIONS Section • 486 MLType • 370, 375, 398 Modify the User ProjectConfig File • 19 Mouse • 24 Move Down a Row • 27 Move Up a Row • 27 MultiPortConnections • 265

N

Name • 93, 126, 300 New • 32 NewGroup • 411 NoColumns • 393 NominalSize • 214 NonLinearValves • 215 NonSpecialPosition • 333

NoOfDrawings • 185 NorthArrowBox • 265 NorthDirection • 186 NoteFormat • 501 NoteHeight • 501 NotePosition • 502 NoteWidth • 503

O Objects • 20 Offset • 380, 428, 450 OffshoreAccumulation • 358 OffshoreAllowance • 438 OffshorePrefix • 312 OffshoreSupportPrefix • 322

OffshoreSupportWeldEnclosure • 322 OffshoreSupportWeldStartNo • 322 OffshoreSuppWeldEnclSize • 324 OffshoreWeldEnclosure • 312 OffshoreWeldEnclSize • 314 OffshoreWeldStartNo • 312 OletBranchOrientationMessage • 265

OnShoreAllowance • 438 Options • 77 OPTION-SWITCH-OVERRIDE • 475 OrientationFrom • 266 OutputFormat • 186 OutputLinesTube • 395 Overall • 216

Index


Overall Dimensioning Page (Dimensioning Wizard) • 58

OverflowDrawingID • 361

Overview Panel • 81 OverwritePlotFile • 187

P PartNoEnclosureStyle • 266 PartNoEnclSize • 268 PartNoLength • 269 PartNos • 512

PartNoSpaces • 269 PartNoVisible • 269 Paste • 26, 36 Path • 93, 126, 404, 431, 452, 464, 496, 508,

514, 516, 523, 526, 530, 537, 541, 544, 554

PerPipeLine • 467 PipeLength • 352

Pipeline Attributes • 108 Pipeline Data • 568 PIPELINE-ATTRIBUTE-FILE • 475 PipeLineScale • 187 PipeLineSplitting • 188 PipeLineSplittingInTube • 188 PipeNameInContMessages • 188

PipeNameStyle • 189 PipesThroughPenetrationPlates • 238 PlotFileLength • 189 PlotFilePath • 189 PlotUniquePtNoTable • 554 PositionFix • 501 PostScriptSize • 190

Preface • v PreProcessor • 102 Preview Drawing • 65 Preview the Drawing • 65 PrintedOutputPageLen • 190 Project • 32 Project Access Rights • 76 Project Defaults • 37, 96

Project ID Type • 104 Project Object Properties • 91 Project View Panel • 79 Project Work Folder • 103 Project_Data.xml • 13 ProjectConfig_<application name>.xml • 13 ProjectList.xml • 15

PROJECT-MATERIALDATA • 476 PROJECT-MATERIALMANAGER • 476 PROJECT-PIPELINE • 476

ProjectPipeline.xml • 15 Projects • 91 Properties • 21 Properties Panel • 80

R RecordID • 410 Reference Plane System • 161

ReferenceIDLocation • 541 ReferenceNameStyle • 297 REFERENCE-PLANE-DEFINITION •

476 REMARKS • 478 Remove a Report File • 64 Remove Attributes • 48 Remove from Collection • 23

Remove Weld Types • 53 Repeat Style • 98 Report Options Page (Drawing Setup

Wizard) • 43 ReportContents • 464 Reports Wizard • 63 ReservedAreaDrawing • 337

ReservedAreaDrawingTop • 337 ReservedAreaMatList • 338 RightMargin • 336 RightSide • 370, 398 RotationAngle • 342, 348, 549 Row Manipulation • 26

S

Save • 35 Save a Style • 561 Search by File Section • 68 Search by Option Switch • 67 Search by Property • 67 Section1Content • 384, 387 Section1Down • 384

Section1MaxEntries • 384, 387 Section2Content • 384, 387 Section2Down • 384 Section2MaxEntries • 384, 387 Section2YOffset • 385, 388 Section3Content • 388 Section3MaxEntries • 388

Index


Section3YOffset • 388 Select a Style • 561 Select an Attribute Graphically and Edit its

Value in the Attributes Grid • 49 SeparatePulledBend • 217 SeparateSpoolUnion • 270 Set up a Network Project • 17 Set Up a Project on a Network Server • 17 SetPipeLineDisconnected • 190 SheetNumberFormat • 367 ShopWeldAllowance • 439

Shortcut Menu • 24 ShowAccumulatedPipeData • 376 ShowBIP • 169 ShowCategoryHeadings • 377 ShowClosedEnd • 169 ShowContAtSplitPoint • 170 ShowCoordAtRefItem • 169

ShowCoordAtSplitPts • 170 ShowCptFlowArrows • 171 ShowDividingLines • 370, 399 ShowDrainPosition • 171 ShowEnclosure • 447 ShowEquipConn • 171 ShowErectSupportWeldNos • 317

ShowErectSupportWeldPrefix • 318 ShowErectWeldNos • 308 ShowErectWeldPrefix • 308 ShowFabSupportWeldNos • 314 ShowFabSupportWeldPrefix • 314 ShowFabWeldNos • 304 ShowFabWeldPrefix • 304 ShowFlangeRotation • 172

ShowFlowArrows • 270 ShowGroupHeadings • 376 ShowHeaders • 405, 432, 454 ShowInsulationWeight • 467 ShowIsogenVer • 191 ShowIsometricSpindles • 172 ShowItemDescriptions • 371

ShowMiscPosition • 173 ShowNozzles • 173 ShowNSUnitsInReports • 174 ShowNSUnitsOnDrg • 173 ShowOffshoreSupportWeldNos • 321 ShowOffshoreSupportWeldPrefix • 321 ShowOffshoreWeldNos • 311

ShowOffshoreWeldPrefix • 312

ShowOpenEnd • 175 ShowOperationsBox • 417 ShowPipeLineCont • 175

ShowReferenceDims • 175 ShowRemarks • 375 ShowRPads • 176 ShowSiteAssemblyTable • 176 ShowSupports • 177 ShowTapBrnchCoords • 177 ShowTitles • 406, 432, 454 ShowVentPosition • 178

ShowWeldNumbers • 303 ShowWelds • 303 ShowWetWeight • 467 Site Assemblies • 593 SiteAssemblyIDEnclosure • 270 SiteAssemblyIDEnclSize • 273 SiteAssemblyIDs • 274

SiteAssemblyIDsPerDrawing • 274 SITE-ASSEMBLY-REPORT • 487 SiteWeldsNotAssignedToSpools • 274 SketchHeight • 498 SketchPosition • 498 SketchWidth • 500 SkewAngleStyle • 282

SkewDimStandout • 275 SkewDimStyle • 275 SkewHatchCptGap • 276 SkewHatchCutOff • 276 SkewHatchDimText • 277 SkewHatching • 277 SkewHatchPipeGap • 278 SkewHatchSpacing • 278

SkewInVerticalBranch • 279 SkewMinCpts • 280 SkewMixed • 280 SkewOverall • 281 SkewRepresentation • 281 SKEY • 411 SlipOnFlangeWelds • 414

SmallxLargeNS • 361 SmartPlant I-Configure Help • 78 SmartPlant Integration • 104 Source • 93 SpecBrkEnclosure • 282 SpecBrkRepresentation • 283 SpecialPosition • 333

Specification Change Indication • 150

Index


SPECIFIC-GRAVITY • 478 SPECIFIC-GRAVITY-FILE Section • 486 Specify Alternative Texts • 162

SplitPoints • 532 Spool Attributes • 112 SPOOL-ATTRIBUTE-FILE • 489 SpoolDrawingID • 289 SPOOLGEN (FFISYS) Screen Display • 158 SpoolID • 532 SpoolIDAllocation • 283 SpoolIDContinuation • 283

SpoolIDEnclosure • 284 SpoolIDEnclosureStyle • 287 SpoolIDLength • 288 SpoolIDSize • 287 SpoolIDType • 290 SpoolMatchesPipe • 325 SpoolPrefix • 291

SpoolsMatchFull • 361 StandOutComposite • 218 StandOutOverall • 220 StandOutVertical • 220 Start • 402, 408, 421, 434, 456, 510, 540,

546, 558 StartDrawingNumber • 191

StartPoint • 532 StartProgram • 462 StartTimeout • 462 StartX • 352, 375, 390, 424, 447, 555 StartY • 352, 376, 390, 424, 447, 555 Status Bar • 85 StopOnError • 462 Straight Length • 103

Style • 33 Style Object Properties • 125 Style.xml • 15 Styles • 125 StyleState • 126 StyleType • 127 SuppDimAsDim • 221

SuppFormat • 222 Supplementary AdditionalData Object • 459 Supplementary AuxiliaryPrograms Object •

461 Supplementary BendingReport Object • 463 Supplementary CentreOfGravity Object •

465

Supplementary DataFiles ISOGENFiles Collection • 469

Supplementary DataFiles Object • 468

Supplementary DetailSketches LocalSketches LocalSketch Collection • 505

Supplementary DetailSketches LocalSketches Object • 504

Supplementary DetailSketches Object • 495 Supplementary DwgInfoFile Object • 507 Supplementary DwgInfoFile TextColumns

Collection • 509 Supplementary EquipmentTrim Object • 511 Supplementary Fonts Object • 513 Supplementary HeatTreatment Object • 515 Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS

InstrumentSKEYs Collection • 520 Supplementary InstrumentSKEYS Object •

519 Supplementary Object • 457 Supplementary PipeLineAtts Object • 521 Supplementary ReferencePlanes Object • 525 Supplementary RepeatFile Object • 529 Supplementary ReportFiles ISOGENFiles

Collection • 534

Supplementary ReportFiles Object • 533 Supplementary SiteWeldFile Object • 536 Supplementary SiteWeldFile TextColumns

Collection • 538 Supplementary SpoolAttributes Object • 540 Supplementary SpoolAttributes

SpoolAttEnclosure Collection • 542 Supplementary SpoolInformation Object •

543 Supplementary SpoolInformation

TextColumns Collection • 545 Supplementary TableAttributes

DFTableAttributes Collection • 547 Supplementary TableAttributes Object • 546 Supplementary TitleTexts Object • 551

Supplementary TitleTexts TitleTexts Collection • 552

Supplementary Traceability Object • 553 Supplementary Traceability TextColumns

Collection • 557 SuppOptions • 223 SupportAdditionsWeight • 191

SupportIdentification • 291

Index


SupportsWithMatchingNamesAccumulation • 366

SupportTagEnclStyle • 291

SupportWeldNumbers • 325 SupportWeldSeq • 325 SupportWeldTypeNos • 326 SuppStandOut • 224 SymbolList • 353 SymbolScale • 352 SymbolSelect • 352

T

TableLayout • 425 TableOverflow • 393, 556 TackWeldNumbers • 415 TapBranchDimension • 227 TapBranchInlineScale • 292 TapBranchPipeScale • 292 TapBranchSuppression • 293

TapOnCpt • 225 TapOnPipe • 226 TapOnPipeFittings • 239 Techniques • 563 TeeBendBranchDimension • 228 TeeCrossNS • 293 Template File Page (Drawing Setup Wizard)

• 41 TemplateFile • 338 TemplateFormat • 338 Templates • 12 TestIso • 294 Text • 516, 523 TextFont • 294, 353, 361, 377, 424, 447, 501

TextHeight • 353, 377, 390, 393, 425, 447, 500, 555

TextHeightMultiple • 395 TextOffsetX • 353 TextOffsetY • 353 TextSize • 295, 371, 399 TextWeight • 296, 342, 348, 353, 372, 378,

390, 393, 400, 425, 448, 501, 549

TextWidth • 296, 372, 400 TextWidthFactor • 353, 378, 425, 448 The COMPIPE Material Control Links • 157 The Isometric Drawing Area • 133 The Line Summary Area • 153 The Plotted Material And Cut Pipe List

Heading Texts • 143

The Printed Material List • 154 The Title Block/Drawing Frame Areas • 151 The Weld Box Summary • 154

ThicknessActual • 199 ThicknessLogical • 199 TitleblockPos • 372 TitleBlockVisible • 372 TitleText • 406, 432, 454 Toolbar • 78 Tools Menu • 64 TopMargin • 335

Traceability and Unique Numbers • 595 TracingStyle • 296 TrueScale • 191 TruncationLength • 342, 348 TText • 552 Tutorial Project • 16 TypeSequenceNumbers • 326

U UniquePartNumber • 554 Units • 192 Units Formatting Page (Dimensioning

Wizard) • 62 UNITS-DEFINITION Section • 490 UpperBore • 198

USAStyle • 229 UseI01TypeExts • 193 UserDefined • 406, 453 UserTextSize • 295, 371, 399 UseTangentData • 439 UseWeldGapData • 439 Using Alternative Text • 130

V Values • 21 ValveBW • 230 ValveCP • 231 ValveFL • 232 ValveHY • 233 ValveLimit • 233

ValvePL • 234 ValveSC • 235 ValveSW • 236 VerticalDirection • 448 VerticalSpacing • 354, 378, 390, 426, 448,

555 VertOption • 237

Index


View Isogen Controls • 69 View Report File Output • 66 View the Drawing • 66

View the Message File • 66 Visible • 167, 338, 351, 362, 414, 440

W WastageArea1 • 362 WastageArea2 • 362 WastageArea3 • 363 WastageArea4 • 363

WastageArea5 • 364 WastageArea6 • 364 WastageArea7 • 365 WastageArea8 • 365 WastageArea9 • 366 WEIGHT/COFG-SUMMARY-FILE

Section • 491 WeightOutput • 193

WeightsStyle • 366 Welcome to SmartPlant I-Configure • 9 Weld Attributes • 111 Weld Constructions • 574 Weld Lists • 571 Weld Logic • 572 Weld Types • 52

WeldAccumulation • 358 WeldGaps • 94 Welding • 571 Welding Wizard • 51 WeldList • 412 WeldList FixedLayout Object • 416 WeldList Object • 412

WeldList SummaryFile Object • 429 WeldList SummaryFile TextColumns

Collection • 433 WeldList UserDefined Object • 422 WeldList UserDefined XYColumns

Collection • 427 WeldList VariableLayout Object • 418 WeldList VariableLayout TextColumns

Collection • 420 WeldNos • 532 WeldNumberLength • 327 WeldNumbers • 304 WeldNumberSequence • 326 WeldNumberSize • 327 WeldNumberType • 327

WeldTypeIdentifiers • 328 WeldTypes • 328 What's New In SmartPlant I-Configure • vii

Width • 333, 506 Wizards Menu • 39 Work Measurement • 596

X XML Configuration File • 567 Xpos • 341, 347, 548 XSpacing • 343, 348, 550

Y Ypos • 342, 347, 548 YSpacing • 343, 348, 550 YTypeWelds • 414

SPI-Configure Users Guide.

Documents

Transcript of SPI-Configure Users Guide.